The World of Layonara
Character Development => Development Journals and Discussion => Topic started by: Lily on May 22, 2008, 11:07:05 AM
-
*This book is bound in black leathers and is about average size for a book. The book itself bears the title 'Journal', written in elaborate golden letters. The pages reveal a simple handwriting, mostly written by black ink on the rather grey and old pages.*
-
*After the bartender in the Scamp’s Mug slapped Phyress and she loudly complained but he simply ignored her, she turned her attention back to her journal which was still lying in her lap.*
-Tunar, Mar 24, 1433-
It was a rough sea on my ride from Mariners Hold over to Port Hempstead on the continent of Mistone. It was my first time on such a big ship and across the ocean but I really enjoyed it. It was refreshing, stormy, thrilling, interesting and lovely at the same time, even though it was raining the whole time and not to mention the rough, stormy sea. I really wish Lydia was with me on the ride over to Port Hempstead. I know my father mentioned that town a few times when he talked with my mother about trade and always mentioned the wealthy city of Hempstead.
However, the ship landed at the docks around midnight and the cargo and passengers moved over to steady ground again which I was quite glad about. My first journey on a ship might not have been the best, judging the sea but it was still interesting and a new experience. And I did not get seasick like other passengers on the boat. Of course I was lost when I tried to explore the city mid in night. Among the citizens I saw some adventurers as well but they seemed rather busy with something and gave me some quick directions as I asked for them.
I then decided to seek out the inn and take a drink. The bartender was kind enough to serve me one apple-juice on the house. He’s a nice guy even though the inn did not seem to be very clean at all but I am used worse inns anyways. However, he gave me some directions like where to find what in town. I then asked if he had a job for me to do but he denied. But he told me to seek out Captain Trent in town as he might have a job for me. Same as for Martha.
Anyways, I should get some rest and prepare myself before heading out and get some Trues into my pockets.
-
*After some rather exhausting days Phyress slumps down into her bed in the Scamp’s Mug and starts writing a new entry in her journal.*
-Threas, Mar 26, 1433-
Now these were some long days, really. Just after I bought some general supplies for my ventures here on Mistone I ran into a rather charming, but old man. I am bad with names. A moment ago I still knew his name. When I meet him again I am sure to remember his name, all I need is just to see his face again. However he was kind enough to show me around town a little and helped me to track Martha and Trent down. Martha was around the Merchant District as the bartender already told me; I just did not ask him where that district was located. I think it was the first and last time I headed down in any sewers as they really stink. Our journey down went just fine even though I had to take a few hits by a few slimy things I saw among other creatures. I did the job though and got rewarded by Martha afterwards.
Trent had another job for me. It had something to do with retrieving a magical stick from a tribe of kobolds right outside Port Hempstead. On our way to the camp I saw a rather big creature. It was bigger than a human but I don’t know it looked somehow odd, like an ogre or so. Strange one. I only know it scared me a little.
After chatting with another new adventurer, his name was Michael if I remember correctly, we headed into their camp. It was thrilling and interesting and better than fighting stinky little rats in any way. I found a stick on one kobold with wings which looked rather odd. Of course I know kobolds are somehow related to dragons but still, it makes me giggle. My guide checked the staff over and felt that it was magical of some sorts. He’s a sorcerer from what I saw and what he told me.
After we made our way out again we handed the stick over to Captain Trent again and he rewarded me with a bag and some Trues as well. It was already past midnight as we passed the stick over to Trent so we decided it was best to get some rest first as it were some long and exhausting days.
But after all I learned a lot in the last few days. The weapon I bought at the local merchants here in Port Hempstead was a rapier like Lydia used one, just not as balanced as her one was. Not to mention that this one is just made out of copper but it will do for now. Not like I could take advantage of a better balanced blade yet. However during the last few days I grew stronger in using the rapier and found myself using more or less more agile weapons like the rapier or short sword but I still prefer the rapier and took my focus especially on it.
During the battles we fought I had to dodge and avoid many blows while I fought their masses or when I had to run over the battlefield. I really improved myself and I am more mobile in fights now. Of course I had good mentors with Lydia and Arngrim back on Alindor but now it was me who improved the basics I already learned by them and I am glad I had them as my mentors.
Well and I fought with two weapons at the same time as well. It is hard to coordinate two blades at the same time but I managed somehow. But I think I am some kind of ambidextrous so it is easier for me, especially with my weak hand. And I bet it helps me coordinating by shield as well to parry blows.
But now I am curious about what tomorrow brings...
*Even before Phyress manages to close her journal she falls asleep over it and a slight smile can be seen on her face.*
-
*Phyress rents a room at the local inn in Fort Vehl and straightly heads to her bed where she takes out her journal again, flips the already written pages and writes a new entry into her journal.*
-Tunar, Apreal 3, 1433-
The past days were rather interesting. As I got up again I took a tour around Port Hempstead again as I lost some of my baggage due to the rough see somewhere between Alindor and Mistone. So as I arrived I had only my old leathers and nothing else to dress with. While my studded leathers keep me save and rather dry I needed something for towns or other activities. I just don’t want to take a drink in my armor even though it seems the citizens in these parts are used to adventurers in any way.
So while I was looking for a tailor to get a dress made I met Ferrit Pandorn, a tailor and merchant. She showed me some interesting equipment I might be interested in like a new light armor or a new blade. But I think I should live with what I already have on me for now. The blade I am looking forward to is made of iron and definitely better balanced than my copper one. Lacking the coin and training I told her that I will contact her when it is about time for me. First of all I still have to master my training with my rapier made of copper. Right now I could not really take advantage of the better balance and handling.
After eventually I got my dress made I went out for a walk into the woods right outside Port Hempstead. On my way through the woods I met Eslar again. Yes, I eventually remembered his name. Eslar was kind enough to show me the Stormcrest Crossroads on the way to Fort Vehl and Vehl itself, too. Fort Vehl differs from Port Hempstead. While you can see that Port Hempstead is wealthy and noble, Fort Vehl is more your average town. It is dirty and some if their citizens or guards are not really good looking or friendly. But then I found some work for me to do at the local graveyard. It had to do with returning some essence of a lesser darksoul or so. Not that I really knew what a darksoul was. So together with Eslar I explored a rather huge crypt and fought my way through skeletons and zombies. But the next time I’ll go there I will surely grab a flail or so. It is hard for me to put the skeletons back to their rest with a weapon like the rapier.
The fight against the darksoul was scary I tell you. I was just glad that I did not run away screaming from it and that Eslar conjured some flames upon my blade so I was able to hurt that bandaged thing. It reminded me of a mummy. However the fight lasted like half an hour and it was very exhausting to fight constantly for such a long time. I had to take care that it did not get the chance to hit me and then try to find its weak spots. Oddly I did not find any weak spots and that made it even harder. But the long fight had its benefits. I am now able to land better placed hits on my opponents which cause them more pain and suffer. I think I really specialized myself on the rapier now. Trying it with my short sword I still cannot manage it somehow. I think this comes from focusing all my training on the rapier.
It was a long day and we made it out of the crypt alive and I got rewarded for my help which I was glad about as I still need to save some Trues for a new blade and some other equipment I am looking forward to. Eslar told me that there might be some more jobs waiting for me here in Vehl. SO for tomorrow I will take a look around Fort Vehl and ask citizens or other people whether they have a job for me or know who might be able to have some work for me.
-
*While Phyress sits at the pond right outside Port Hempstead and watches men and women leaving or entering town, she takes out her journal, ink and quill and after several more moments of watching the traffic in the early evening hours, she eventually starts writing into her journal.*
-Wedlar, Mai 4, 1433-
After I recovered in the Inn in Fort Vehl from those scratches I got down in the crypt I moved out again to see if anyone has a little job for me to do. Maybe Friar had another job for me regarding undead but naturally he did not have had any job for me. So while I was standing around in front of the graveyard I saw this woman leaning against the crypt. She was carrying a rather huge walking stick for her size. From her build she was clearly elven. However the woman was looking for some assistance up in the Gloom Woods. Of course I agreed in aiding her and together we headed north towards the Gloom Woods. The name of the woman was Aryanna and is a druid in service of the Longstrider. Aryanna has a rather bossy attitude but I like it. I don’t know but it somehow suits her. Just she could stop prodding me with her staff.
However, we eventually reached that cursed forest and found some strong zombies in there. Somehow I was not able to harm them with my copper rapier. Aryanna told me that these are kind of resistant against such materials and I should go for an iron one next time or something equal made out of wood. We managed to defeat all of them and I saw some even stranger creatures. They looked like a failed experiment when someone tried to build a creature out of many other creatures.
We then met another creature among some skeletons. I don’t know what kind of creature that was but from a camp within the Gloom Woods I gathered that it was called a Zamin. It was a very tough fight and I hardly survived it with Aryanna’s help. It seemed like I wasn’t fast enough yet. It easily dodged most of my attacks and most times it was too fast for me so I was unable to avoid these blows. I focused every single thought on my opponent and closely examined the motions of my opponent as it moved, attacked or dodged. This way I was able to parry most of its attacks and start a counter attack when it left its defense. In the camp I got rewarded for the defeat of the Zamin.
On our way we were attacked by those kobolds of the camp outside Port Hempstead. The previous fights really improved my skills with the rapier. While we were fighting them I tried to do what Lydia taught me in my training. If you want to end a fight quick, make sure you surprise them, flank or attack it from behind and aim for their weak spots. It took me some effort but I think that now I know how to use this technique, given I surprise them and open the battle before they even realize what is going on.
As I finally found myself back in Port Hempstead, Aryanna had to leave after we left the camp again, I wrote a letter to Miss Pandorn as now I think I can make use of an iron rapier. After all this training I should finally manage to make use of its sharper blade and better handling. Unfortunately she did not have any blade in stock so I have to wait for a few days. I don’t mind waiting for the blade though as I still need to continue my other training and of course to make some more friends in these parts of the world.
I can’t wait for what the next days will bring.
*Phyress closes her journal and watches her surroundings until the very night before she makes herself comfortable for a rest.*
-
*Phyress sits down at the pond outside Port Hempstead and eyes her rapier for a moment before she takes out her quill, ink and journal and start writing a new entry into her journal.*
-Wedlar, Junar 18, 1433-
The past few days were quite interesting I have to admit. A lot of things happened in the past few days, more than I thought. I spent the past few days mainly with my training. I only have a slow process but though it is steady. It is quite amazing to see how others use different tactics than I do. There are many ways of battle and I am just walking one of them. Some prefer the more brute ways but I prefer the more agile way.
I ventured a bit with Eslar again and he showed me some towns along the road on Mistone. I have been to Fort Llast, Krandor and Hlint. From the citizens in Hlint I gathered that Hlint once was a town filled with adventurers but most of them are gone now. I have to admit it looks a little abandoned without them. It is quiet for a small town. On our way I asked some citizens if they might have some work for me. In Fort Llast I helped a lieutenant with refilling his chests with weapons.
The last day I ventured with Aesthir and a comrade into the Silkwood Forest. It was an interesting trip but spiders are very dangerous due to their poison. However I hardly survived it and learned from it. While they were focused on Aesthir I attacked them from behind, finding their weak spots.
And now I eventually got my new rapier made. It is made of iron and the balance is far better than if it was made out of copper like my old one. So right now I am busy with getting used to the new blade. But for now I have had enough training and going to get some rest.
-
*Phyress slumps down on a bed at the local inn in Hlint. Tired she takes out her journal, ink and quill and starts writing a new entry into her journal.*
-Tunar, Seplar 24, 1433-
A few weeks have passed since I ventured the last time. It was nice to take a little break and reflect the last months here on Mistone. I saw a lot of places and faces during my time around these parts of Layonara. I can only say I am proud of myself and how I managed the rather rough places I explored with my new friends. I really grew more and more in this time. As I started to explore Mistone I was hardly able to wield my weapons or to avoid blows. But with every battle I fight and every experience I gain I get more and more confident with the ways of battle.
Today I oddly jumped into Trouble again while I was just sitting at the waterfall in Fort Wayfare. He’s hard to miss with the white monkey on his shoulder, always twitching his ear. Well he hardly knew my name anymore but at least he still knew my face. However he offered to show me a little around. I happily agreed and we headed towards Hlint.
On our way to Hlint I managed to cut some goblin ears off some goblins I needed as a proof for lieutenant Astork in Hlint. Trouble helped me with the goblins and to my surprise he shifted into a panther while we were fighting the goblins. I somehow felt that he was very bound to nature but I never imagined it was that strong. From tales I heard that druids are able to shift into some forms of animals. I asked him if he was a druid but he said he wouldn’t call himself a druid. More like an apprentice or so, still learning the ways of a druid. I can understand him. I wouldn’t call myself a warrior either, as I am still learning the ways of battle and trying to find my very own way of battle.
However we ventured into the swamps outside of Hlint where we fought some lizardmen and some other creatures. They looked like flying balls of light and I gathered that they are called will-o-wisp or something similar. After we finally got out of these stinky swamps again we headed into the Whitethorn Forest where Trouble showed me some interesting places. We headed to the Grove of Katia and he showed me some treants as well. I have to admit they were very impressive, walking trees after all. On our way back to Hlint a few Kenkus tried to attack us as we crossed their way but we managed to defeat them easily. Well not that easily as they used to vanish from eyesight.
On our trip through the world I managed to improve my ways of battle. I am already skilled in the ways how to dodge under blows of my enemy’s blades und be very mobile on my feet. But fighting the goblins and Kenkus I had to focus more and more on avoiding their blows when I want to sneak behind them and use their weak spots to harm them from behind. The problem is that my opponents mostly use the opportunity to attack me when I try to run behind them. During my training I now managed not to give them any more opportunities to have an attack of opportunity on me. I also learned how to evade traps.
Trouble and I agreed to meet again for further explorations. I have to agree that I somehow like him being around him and love heading out for adventuring with him. I will see what future brings. Who knows, maybe we’ll head to the Wolfswood Forest together.
-
*Slightly bandaged Phyress enters the inn in Hlint again and orders some wine to her room while she humbles into her room and falls down on her bed. After quite some moments she takes out her journal, quill and ink again and takes a sip from her grape-juice before she starts writing down a new entry into her journal.*
-Wedlar, Oclar 11, 1433-
The past few days have not really been that successful I am afraid. The only thing I managed way dying few days ago. While I was sitting around again in Fort Wayfare at the waterfall I bumped into Trouble again. Trouble told me that he found an interesting place with rather interesting creatures. So we headed down the road in Fort Wayfare und found ourselves in the Forest of Moans where we had some hostile contact with Satyrs. I had to learn that they were very territorial and did not like adventurers passing by. The trip itself went fine but on our way out again we bumped into a rather large group of satyrs. Even though I am trained in the ways of battle I was not able to defeat this last group, they were too much for us to handle. After a long time Trouble fell conscious less to the ground and I was bleeding all over the place as well already. It took them quite some effort to defeat me. The one I was facing I could handle, just the one in my back was too much for me.
Death is something horrible even though I found myself all alive again at the bindstone in Hlint, though very weakened from my death. I only know for sure that I don’t want to die again, it is a pain. However I found Trouble back at the forest and together we took out the remaining satyrs so I was able to pray at the place where I died so I could fully recover from my recent death.
After the unwanted experience we still decided to explore Mistone a bit more. He showed me some nice places and I was able to train my skills along the way as well as not every road is really safe. As we travelled through the woods we got attacked by two griffons and Trouble did not manage to calm them. But during the battles along the way I got more confident with our tactics and our skills. I am getting better and better with my new rapier. I know Lydia would be proud of me already. A lot of time will pass till I will be as good as her, if I ever reach her that is.
For now I should get some sleep and reflect the past few days. Even though my death was horrible I learned something from it: There’s always someone better than you and without training you’ll never be able to get better and more confident in facing your opponent.
-
*exhausted from a very long trip which lasted for several days, Phyress collapses on the bed and writes down a new entry into her journal after she felt a little better.*
-Satari, Oclar 28, 1433-
The last few days have been very interesting and eventful. While I was on my way from Krandor to Port Hempstead I bumped into Trouble and his mother in Fort Wayfare. After I talked a bit with them Miss Tegan left for her business and Trouble offered me to be my guide again. Of course I agreed to it and we started to venture for several days along Mistone and Alindor. First of all I still had a job to do on Mistone. Some old hag in the swamps asked me to help her out with some knuckles. Luckily I still had some on me I planned to give to a priest so he could make some potions for me. However, I handed them over to her and she was very thankful for my help. After we got out all alive of the swamps Trouble suggested to head over to Alindor. I was quite glad to travel to Alindor again, my home. Well of course Alindor is just another continent but it is still the continent where I grew up and hail from.
On Alindor we helped a farmer with his scarecrows. And if I say scarecrows then I really want to point out that they are actually scary! Well Trouble had to fight them almost all alone as I was usually busy with screaming and running around and ended up being surrounded by four more scarecrows. I would have never made it without Trouble’s help but in the end we made it. I did not want to die again and not by scarecrows. That’s for sure. The farmer was quite glad for our help and we wished him the best for his family before we moved on.
Trouble showed me some sort of grove within the Wolfswood Forest. I did not know about that grove yet, even though I spent some time in the Wolfswood Forest around the Wolfswood Ranger Corps together with Celes. It was a very lovely place and I hope to travel there again one time. Trouble knows a lot of lovely places so it is always interesting to travel around with him.
Close to the Wolfswood Forest we helped another farmer with his lost cow. We agreed on helping him and well, we found his cow or better say what was left from it. It seemed like a griffon got hungry and ate a whole cow. In the remains of the fat and overweighed griffons I only found the collar of his lost cow. The only thing we were able to do for him was at least to hand him the collar back.
Fighting the griffon was very thrilling as it was very strong. While Trouble shifted into a cat again and directly attacked it, I sneaked up behind it and waited for a good opportunity to strike it down. The easiest way to strike it was when it flew closer to the ground in order to attack Trouble. With such teamwork we managed to defeat the griffon with just a few scratches.
Trouble and I ventured a bit more around Alindor before we eventually decided to take the ride back to Mistone. Back on Mistone he made be curious about Krashin, an isle up in the north of Layonara where it always freezes. We sailed there and it was really cold over there, more than I was used to.
Trouble showed me an interesting cavern made out of ice which was infested with kobolds, naturally. Actually they were no threat for us if you don’t fight against their shamans that is. Their magic missiles really hurt and almost killed us more than once on Krashin. However the journey to Krashin was very interesting and I learned a lot from defeating our opponents. While Trouble tried to catch their attention I sneaked behind them again and used their weak spots to harm them. With time I improved this technique and am now able to harm them even more. Due to their masses we had to be very careful and always had to watch our backs. Even if I don’t really give them the opportunity to attack me when I pass them for example, they can still catch me flatfooted. Being flatfooted I cannot really dodge their blows anymore and I don’t wear any heavy armor. With a plate I could simply stand there flatfooted as it would not make much difference as you can hardly move in such heavy plates anyways. But if they catch me flatfooted I don’t have any time to react and parry their blows and this is of course very deadly for me. However I learned from my experience up in Krashin and figured out how to still benefit from my graceful movements, even when I am caught flatfooted.
After a warming campfire at the bottom of the cave we fought our way back to the surface and finally headed back to Mistone where Trouble showed me the desert close to Port Hempstead. Well and now I am dead tired and I can already feel my sore muscles everywhere. I should better get some rest now.
-
*Phyress sits down at a bench in front of the Crimson Eagles Memorial, takes out her journal, quill and ink and start writing on a new page, after pondering about something for a moment.*
-Satari, Novlar 14, 1435-
It has been a few years since my latest entry into this journal but not much happened in the past two years to be honest. After my latest entry I had to take some distance from active adventuring as I was getting tired of all the fighting a little. I started my training with Lydia and Arngrim to defend myself in dangerous situations and I have to agree that I step into a lot of dangerous situations lately. As I needed a break I simply travelled on safe routes from one city to another on Mistone. It was a nice life as well but something was really missing.
A few months ago I headed into the Silkwood Forest again for further explorations and I got caught in a fight with spiders which surprised me. I was able to defeat all of them but one of the spiders hit me in my thigh and I had to lie down for quite some time. When things are still very exhausting it tingles a little. I think it is not fully cured out already and some of its venom is still inside of me. Maybe I should seek a priest out about it or let a healer look over the already healed wound.
A few days ago I took a stroll through the Silkwood Forest again and took a rest at the campfire outside of Hlint where I bumped into Trouble again who was quite happy to see me again. We talked about things that were going on in the time we did not see each other and he asked me about what I have been doing in the meantime and I could not tell him much as not much happened in the meantime anyways. He was quite surprised by my skills with the rapier though. I gave him a little show after an imaginary opponent. I dodged imaginary blows, parried and launched attacks into the air where the imaginary opponent was supposed to be. After the little show we headed out like we did in our old days and explored some places I have not been before. He took me to the mountains around Fort Vehl where we encountered some giants. Giants are really huge and I did not battle them before so the first fight was very thrilling as I did not know how tough they really were. Trouble and I did just fine though. While they attacked him I sneaked my way behind them and tried to find their weak spot. However it was hard to hit them though but we managed to defeat them and I learned a lot about my new opponents and certainly improved myself during these battles. As it was pretty cold and we were just to Krashin before we decided to head back though into warmer regions and that was Hlint.
While we were on our way from Fort Llast to Hlint we met a man called Bear, an elven woman called Raven and a toranite knight and a little later Daniella as well, another Toranite.
Raven asked us for some help with the Oil of the Vukas, Juanita must have lost somewhere in the mountains. Together the five of us headed into the mountains. It was very thrilling as there were not only ogres, but giants and giants with two heads. I made some research and found out that they are called ettins. On our task to find the oil Bear bailed out of a sudden because he said he had something else to do. He did not say what but I cannot use one on a task who bails out of a sudden so we were better off without him anyways. Shortly after Bear disappeared an elf showed up in the heat of battle and almost got killed. I mean it was pretty silly and headless. He was invisible and no one of us knew about him being there, charged the ogres ahead of us at the bridge and almost got killed. I told him to be more careful and stand a bit back as it seemed the group already knew him. Needless to say he got killed as we were attacked by the next group of ogres and giants. I have to admit their spellcasters are pretty tough and sneaky and their spells hurt. Without the elf, I already forgot his name anyway, we made our way up the mountains and eventually found the oil. In the final fight we unfortunately lost Daniella who was fighting very brave but unfortunately fell. I was right in time to save Trouble but not fast enough to save Daniella as well. Maybe I had to work out the tactic a little better and others should have listened to my commands more precisely. It seems like Lance, the Toranite, and I had like the same idea but our views differed slightly. Even though he was pretty strong and experienced, it doesn’t make him our tactician. I know he’s been to the mountains more than once already and knows his ways but then I learned from Arngrim and knew exactly the strengths and weaknesses of our group. I did a good job. I am really sorry for Daniella’s death, it shouldn’t have occurred at all.
As we could not linger around for much longer we decided to head back to Fort Llast again. We were almost out of the mountains as a group of ogres ambushed us and almost wiped us out. Well, the ogres themselves were not the real problem but they had a spellcaster with them. I made my way through the ogres to the spellcaster, tumbling over the battlefield, avoiding all of their attacks; I gave them no opportunity to attack me at all. On my way to the caster I managed to kill two ogres and then I faced the big blue ogre. He casted some sort of frost sphere and then vanished from our sight. He then appeared again just to cast another spell at us and I took the opportunity to attack him from behind. The sphere really hit us hard and it took us some effort to stand after that spell. As I attacked the caster he focused his next spell on me and I died immediately before I was able to launch a final strike at him. I fell. Everything worked as planned but no one of us knew they possessed such power. I made my way back to where I fell and prayed for my soul. Then we finally made our way back to Fort Llast where Daniella was already waiting for us and we moved on to return the oil to Juanita who was quite happy about it.
Trouble and I went into the inn in Hlint to eat and drink and I was pretty exhausted anyways. My feet were killing me after like a week full of adventures. I don’t know, but I think Trouble is hiding something from me, I just don’t know what.
However, I learned a lot from our trip into the mountains. Always be prepared for everything and know your comrades good enough to know what they can handle or not. Then you need to work out a tactic which covers everyone. That part worked fine so far but we should have taken more time to observe our surrounding on our way down. With proper observation the ambush wouldn’t have been so bad but they really surprised us. Sneaky ogres. I only wish Arngrim or Lydia were with us. They would have known what to do or how to prepare. Maybe I should visit them again one day, as I should visit Celes again. I bet she’s doing just fine at the Wolfswood Ranger Corps.
But for now I should spend more time with my training so Arngrim and Lydia would be proud with me. I want to master my rapier like Lydia did a long time ago. I want to dodge every attack and launch precise attacks against my opponents and foresee their actions so it is easier for me to dodge or to evade their attacks and use every opportunity to attack them with my rapier. Arngrim and especially Lydia taught me the basics and showed me the way I am currently walking. I took the best from both mentors and combined it for me but then I want to be like Lydia. My strength comes from grace and not from brute force. I already learned a lot of Lydia and improved myself but I am still far from such a graceful way to battle her opponents. I want to be like her and I am doing my very best to become a duelist as well.
But for now I should enjoy the evening here in Port Hempstead and enjoy the life as it is without any battles and death.
*With a slight smile on her lips Phyress closes her journal, and puts everything back into her backpack before she stands up and leaves for a walk into the city.*
-
*With a sigh Phyress slumps down under a tree outside the gates of Port Hempstead, takes out her journal and writes a new entry in it.*
-Tunar, Novlar 24, 1435-
I honestly don’t know why people see me and Trouble as a couple. While I walked from Fort Wayfare to Port Hempstead Ben, or Benji, asked me about Trouble and well I simply told him that it is none of my business what he does or where he is. Like I would care where he is or what he does. He’s just a good friend of mine, at least that is what I say and yes I love travelling around with him.
So I met Trouble again on my way from Port Hempstead to Hlint in Fort Wayfare. He looked injured but he gave me to know he would be alright. The raw wound did not look alright and he was too slow to cover it from my sight. However we went to Hlint together. On our way we were attacked from goblins whose roam the lands around Hlint and entered their cave where we found more goblins attacking us. In Hlint we thought about heading towards Haven to take a walk through the Silkwood Forest that lies near by Haven. To be prepared we stopped at Ilsare’s temple in Hlint to buy some bandages and potions. Trouble told me that he was out of topaz dust which he needs for our stoneskins. While we bought some supplies from the temple another cleric of Ilsare approached. She stood there with her boyfriend and enjoyed the silent night. The cleric was called Ysalina and Trouble called the man Elgon. They asked if we needed help and we told them that we’re heading into the woods and they agreed to travel with us there to help us a little if it is needed.
In the woods we were attacked by some mercenaries but we did a good job and survived. I tried to ask them if they would mind if we sit down together with them at a fire but they simply charged and attacked. Avoiding their blows I tumbled behind them and well that is the end of story here, they did not survive. Trouble then led us to a cave within the woods. He told us that it might be dangerous and crowded with odd creatures we’ve never seen before. However, we were lured in by our own curiosity; I am always curious about new places, secrets and all new things. As we entered we already saw the first strange creature I cannot really describe. It had several arms and legs and a big mouth and frog eyes. As they stomp so hard it makes the ground shake I simply called it “stompy”. We headed deeper into the cave and saw big bugs standing on two legs and making clicking sounds. I charged ahead and attacked. But that was the only thing I got from the battle against the seven bugs. The next thing I can remember is me standing on a pile of bugs and Trouble complained about that I almost beat him down and showed a rather nasty wound. I swear I didn’t do a thing, at least not that I know about. Well it happened more than once so all thought that they do some mind trick with me or so.
The trip down there was really interesting and we made it down to a door and Trouble did not allow me to open it. He said that I don’t want to open it as on the other side are vampires. He is so mean! I really wanted to see a vampire, just see one! It is not like I wanted to charge ahead and attack them. I simply told him I would come back here later then. He made me really curious about what’s behind the door now.
On our way out again we saw even more strange creatures I cannot describe and one of them was really mean. Trouble shouted something about a sword eating creature but I simply laughed at it. And then I had to learn the hard way! There are really such things! Somehow my rapier turned into rust and disappeared as I hit it. I lost my rapier made of iron. Now I am left with just a copper one I bought from a merchant in Fort Llast and I don’t have enough True to buy me a new rapier made of iron as I spent all my money on bandages and potions.
Well, eventually I will be able to purchase a new blade and then can continue my training with it, but in the meantime I should use the rapier I just bought. Once I feel better I will continue my training. Maybe I will see Trouble again so he can show me even more interesting places or even old places as long as I can continue my training. There is still a lot to learn and to improve.
-
*Phyress looks up and drops of water fall down to her face from the canopy above her. She cannot help but smile and wraps her cloak around her so her journal won’t get wet all soaked with water. She enjoys the sounds of the woods before she finally starts writing a new entry into her journal.*
-Threas, Decilar 5, 1435-
While I was sitting at the campfire outside the gate of Hlint and looked for some work, Trouble showed up again as promised earlier to help me with True for a new blade. I simply waited outside of Hlint as I am still waiting for a reply from Miss Ferrit as I sent her a note about an order for a new rapier made of iron. She told me she was not sure she still had one in stock and also wrote that she is going to contact me when he has one made. I did not mind as I still had to earn some money to purchase it anyways.
So while we were still talking at the campfire another woman approached, one Trouble knew. Trouble introduced her as Elle. And naturally she thought as well that Trouble and I am a couple. Really I don’t get why people think so. It is not like we are holding hands or the like. Elle said she had a date with Storan or rather some Bodaks. Storan seems to be a mage of some sorts. Bodaks are some undead creature which can kill you by simply looking at you which makes them kinda creepy in my eyes. After a little more teasing Elle left and Trouble and I headed out as well. We went into the Red Light Caverns and the Swamps on the way to Haven. In Haven itself we met an elf, named Ell. Together with Ell we headed into the Silkwood Forest again. To my surprise Ell casted some sort of spell and immediately all of the mercenaries in the forest were stunned and did not move. I mean sure I knew she could cast some spells but that spell was really powerful but I did not mind and took advantage of it. It made it easy for me to dodge behind them and aim for their weak spots.
We ventured deep into the cave again and I have to say I remember more battles than last time, even though Trouble complained again that I attacked him down in the cave. I can’t help it but I don’t remember a thing. Maybe it is better that way though as Trouble said I was like a berserker, attacking everything close to me.
After we were out of the cave, in this time we were not attacked by creatures which eat blades and the like, Trouble suggested heading over to Dregar to see the desert. Of course I was very excited about it. Ell departed and told us she will come right after us but she had still some business to do on Mistone. So Trouble and I took the fast way to Prantz, the capitol of the Rael Kingdom on Dregar. Prantz is a huge city and I almost got lost, even though Trouble showed me around a little. What I found odd is that if you want to enter the main city where the bank is and some other buildings is, you need to tell them your name and race. I have no idea why. Another thing worth mentioning is that there are dwarves running around everywhere.
After I deposited my earned True for the blade we headed north out of town and headed into the Forest of Fog. The forest is lovely and Trouble guided me to a small village deep within the Forest of Fogs. The village is called Vale and there was also a temple of Katia there. Close to the village is a grove where we talked a little and where we met Ell again. As we arrived in Vale I was already pretty exhausted and tired and decided to stay here and not to head with them into the desert even though I’d have loved to. Maybe next time.
During my training in the lasts month I improved myself. I now can hit my opponents more accurate and move around even more gracefully. Almost like Lydia before she got her knee wounded and it never fully restored again. Even though Lydia is not around, I know she’s proud about me and the way I went. I don’t feel ready to see her again right now though. If I see her again I want to prove myself in a duel with her, just her and I. Even with her knee she will beat me around in the arena like mad but it is the best way for me to learn from her experience and advises. Maybe I should look around for a Duelist who can show me their ways of battle and become my mentor. Only time will tell. But for now I should try and find some rest here under this tree. Oddly it is almost raining the whole time here in this forest, not that I mind rain. I will continue my journey tomorrow.
*Phyress stuffs her journal back into her bag and takes out a rug to cover herself, curls up to a ball and falls asleep into a deep slumber, smiling slightly as the wind brushes through the canopy.*
-
*With a wide smile Phyress sits down at the monument in Port Hempstead, takes out her journal and writes a new entry.*
- Sunra, Jenra 1, 1436-
Quite a lot happened in the past few days. As I spend several days with wandering around in the Forest of Fogs I found an entrance to a cave. Naturally I ventured down into the cave. On my way deeper inside I came across several corpses of giants, their wounds still fresh and the blood not dried yet. Carefully I headed even deeper into the cave and to my surprise I met a crowd of adventurers. Ell and Trouble were there, among a halfgiant and some other adventurers. They were kind enough to let me tag along. Even as I had to fight without any protections as some giants attacked us, I did not get a single scratch. The rest of the venture in the cave went smoothly as well and I was warded.
As we got out if the cave again I met a cleric of Mist, his name is Hjalmar. I think he and Trouble don’t get along all too well. I might be mistaken though. Hjalmar headed along with the rest of the group the Anuroch Desert. The desert was really thrilling as we had to fight a lot of giants. Some of them even threw fireballs at us and some flame arrows. It was very hard to jump out of their way but I did a good job even though I did not manage to evade all of them, yet! It will come in time. We headed through the desert and got to Audiria, a town within the desert. I left the group for a while as I wanted to explore it a little more and they already moved on. I met them soon after I eventually left town though. While I was wandering around town they headed down into a cave which was taken by giants as well. It was a really interesting trip for me. I even saw giant scorpions in the desert and was almost lost between all their legs.
We then headed to a region called Ore Hills. Ore Hills were infested with some ogrillions from what I gathered and Trouble had his doubts that we will make it out alive again. I have to say it went pretty good and learned a lot down there. Hjalmar used a nice tactic which I will adopt some day; I just need to find a way first to see through magical darkness. Even without darkness it was nice to see how good the team worked together. Everyone knew his position and responsibilities, not like the trip where I gave the commands but that was due to lack of discipline from the group. However, after we came to Dalanthar again, Hjalmar and Oma left and the halfgiant headed somewhere else as well.
I travelled a bit with Ell and Trouble before Ell left and we came across the halfgiant again. Together we travelled a bit around again before Trouble and I headed back to Prantz where his parents got a house. I slept over at his place and forced him to sleep on the couch while I claimed the bed my own. After I slept I took their portal back to Mistone.
Back on Mistone I offered my help to the Captain of Fort Vehl and had to retrieve something for him. I eventually found it and handed it over to him. He was very pleased and handed me a helmet over. It is said that the helm will help me a little with giants. I am curious to see how it will help me but it was really nice of him to give me such a payment.
The next stop on my route was Haven where I had to help Officer Kit. Kit was looking for some help with refilling the weapon chamber and naturally I offered my help. It was quite a walk but eventually I managed to get her all weapons she was looking for. For my help she gave me a helmet as well which is like the one Jursen gave me, just better and can make me barky as well.
And now I can fully focus on my training as well. Miss Ferrit sent me a letter the other day that I can pick up my rapier and now I just picked it up. There’s still a lot to learn as I saw in the past few days but I know with enough training I can finally become a duelist and face Lydia. I am already looking forward to it!
*Phyress shuts her journal with a giggle before she puts it back into her bag again and leaves port Hempstead.*
-
*Phyress sits at the docks in Port Hempstead, her feet tangling over the water as she looks into the sinking sun. Before the sun fades completely she takes out her journal, ink and quill again and writes a new entry into it which lies on her lap.*
-Mulnari, Jenra 16-
The past few days have been very eventful again. I feel that I will need a break at some point and lean back and enjoy my life while I am still young. I’ve fought too many battles in the past few weeks so I am not even sure on what side I stand any longer. Actually I think that we are the intruders and murder the others we call our foes. There are of course two sides on a blade or on a coin and the one need the other, they could not live without the other one as then they would lose their meaning. I know it is quite odd but lately there’s too much blood on my blade. Earlier I simply used it to defend myself but nowadays I head with others into caves and we slaughter our way through masses of foes just because we are after something that we can find in their cave. We don’t care about whether they live there or not, I bet some already lived there before the humans showed up. We slaughter others because we say they are robbers and outlaws but isn’t it partly our fault? But I think I am starting to realize that this is the way of an adventurer or however we call us. We sometimes cannot avoid killing others to reach our goals which are paid with their lives. We convince ourselves that it was a rightful thing and get mad if one of our comrades falls. Life was easier back in Nel. I never had to make my mind up about such things and now I try to stay out of trouble and live my life as good as I can. Of course there are bad people around but sometimes they just want to defend themselves when we invade their territory. I cannot help it, such is life. I can only make the best out of it.
But well, I am still focusing on my training and I am making little steps forward. Currently I am trying to figure out a new technique Arngrim showed me once and which he loved to perform on me during my training. Arngrim always knocked me down to the ground by brute force. Always when I tried to knock him down he just had to chuckle and started a counterattack so it was like I always knocked myself down. Right now I am trying to modify his technique a little so it suits me more so I can rely on my grace and not on brute force. I just need to find the right moment and use the moment of surprise to easily knock my opponents down. I think I am on a good way already but there is still so much to figure out and still will take me hours of training to use it good enough to even have the chance to knock someone down. I will continue to train this technique on my further travels and adventures. I am also trying to aim even more precisely for their weak spots to hurt them even more. I know it won’t be easy to improve myself but I am positive that I will make it in the end.
Lately my old leather armor slows me down as well, I mean not in speed but in my movement and reflexes. Nowadays I am using my new and lighter armor more and more, especially when Trouble or someone else improves my grace. Trouble of course was teasing me about my new armor as it was bright orange and was not really like my old armor, style-wise. Well I finally found some time to alter it a little and of course to dye it. Now it is black and red like my old armor. Personally I hope this armor will last a bit longer than the old one and not slow down my movements in battle as this will end deadly if I cannot dodge right in time from their blows.
Together with Trouble and Ell I travelled across Alindor the other way and I have to say I really enjoyed it. We got close to Nel but in the end we did not head there. With Arke and Oma we were in some swamps close to Katherian and we had to fight against masses of trolls there. It was a very tough and challenging battle but in the end all of us made it out alive again. Back in Katherian we departed and Trouble, Ell and I headed to Mariners Hold. In Mariners Hold the guards were looking for some help and naturally we offered our help. It seems that they got some trouble with the bugbears on Bear Island so we headed over to the isle. Before we headed there Trouble had to flirt with a strange elf, naturally. I already heard about Bear Island but never been there before. But I imagined it almost like it really was. Just some details were mixed up. We headed down into a cave or dungeon and had to make our way through several bugbears to eventually face their leader. It was a tough battle and they outnumbered us one to ten I’d guess. The three of us made it though as we work well as a team. Everyone knows what the other one is going to do or what one can do or cannot.
After we got out again we headed to Mariners Hold where we handed over the head they wanted, got our reward and I headed straight into the inn to get some rest at last. I must have slept for like a whole day. As I already said before, adventuring is exhausting. That is why I think about a break as well. But I want to see Arngrim and Lydia before I do though. I can’t take a break while I could still use the time to learn more about their ways of battle. That reminds me that I still owe Trouble a dinner, but then I need a new dress. Well I cannot train the whole time, I need some social contacts as well and nothing’s better than an evening with my friends in a tavern with a good drink, stories from adventures, heroes and tales. Maybe I should organize something. We will see.
*With a slight smile on her lips Phyress shuts her journal and looks into the sinking sun which is almost completely sunken now. She lays back and watches into the sky till the night falls over Port Hempstead and she heads into the inn.*
-
*Phyress sits down at the pond outside the gates of Port Hempstead and starts writing a new entry into her journal.*
-Wedlar, Febra 18, 1436-
I headed out with Trouble and some others again and continued my training. It took me some time and effort but now I finally figured out how to knock them down. Of course I hardly knock them down and fail most of the times but the first I knocked down were giants anyways. The kobolds I just faced were rather easy to knock down. I still need a lot of practice with my new learned technique though. I also improved my attacks in general as I can aim better for their weak spots now and use it as an advantage in battle to defeat them faster.
Besides that I now purchased an enchantment for my blade. I just hope I won’t lose it again to a rust monster; that would be very mean and unfair.
And as a sidenote, I shouldn’t drink from Essa’s wine again. I know I was very drunken and woke up with a huge headache so I laid down for a whole day to sober out again. Maybe I will find some work to do in the next few days. We will see.
*Phyress shrugs slightly and closes her journal before she heads out towards Fort Wayfare.*
-
*While Trouble fell asleep at the lake around the Viper's Teeth, Phyress takes out her journal again and watches the sleeping Trouble from time to time, smiling.*
-Freas, Seplar 20, 1436-
In the past months I’ve been working heavily on my training. There is so much to learn yet so little time. Due to my training, especially working on my knockdown-technique, I can use them much more precise and with less effort. Not to mention that my timing improves more and more. You could say with every defeat of my opponent I grow more and more confident with my blade, my equipment, my techniques, talents and of course myself. Mainly I travelled around with Trouble and Ell, though I’ve seen many other new faces as well, like Sein or Fil. I also got to know many new places and I love to travel to them together with Trouble, Ell, Oma and some others from time to time.
Of course I was in need of the one or other break from time to time so I used my time to think about new ways of how to improve my skills with my rapier and other techniques. I often wandered around in the Forest of Mists and thought about Arngrim and Lydia. I really adore Lydia. She’s great as both a friend and of course as my former mentor. Still I won’t be a match for her but I know I can only try. Right now I am focusing a little on my offensive. I am trying to aim more precisely and trying to hit them on more vulnerable spots.
I have been shopping a lot of supplies and equipment lately. I am glad that I was able to sell some boxes of aloe and one box of bodak teeth, though I have to get at least one more box of teeth. I am hoping I can see more boxes of aloe though so I can afford even more equipment or save some True for even more expensive treasure and equipment. I bought some nice gloves and a necklace which help me with more graceful movements.
Due to these circumstances I decided to purchase some platinum reinforced clothing from Trith. I feel more and more that my current armor is already too thick and restricts my movement in battle. The lighter the armor is the more I can use my grace in battle. That’s why I decided to buy not a new armor but clothes. I still have to get used to them till I can wear them effectively.
Ah well Trouble’s waking up again. I think we will travel around a bit. He looks kinda weak so I think something happened to him. We’ll see.
-
*Pleased with herself Phyress takes a room at the local inn in Port Hempstead and orders a buys a bottle of wine from the barkeeper. In her room she uncorks the bottle and fills some wine into her cup. She sits down at the desk with the already lightened candles and sips on her wine before she writes a new entry into her journal.*
-Tunar, Seplar 24, 1436-
The past few days since my latest entry into this journal have been rather eventful. Actually I did not get that much into trouble this time though some others really did. But more about these happenings later. After I spent a few days in Dalanthar to recover from the latest exhausting trips I decided to head back to Port Hempstead. It had been some time I have been there and it is always good for the latest gossip and rumors. The citizens of Dalanthar themselves behave strange lately. I asked a bit around and it seems that several children have been kidnapped during nights. According to the rumors no one ever saw how the children were kidnapped; it is like they just vanish while they are sleeping in their beds. It seems like a few adventurers returned some of the children already, though many other children are still missing. They even pointed fingers at me behind my back when I was on my way to the inn. I cannot blame them in anyway, these are rough times for them and I have to admit, maybe I should not have had to wear dark clothes and all covered in my cape and hood. However, nothing happened on my way to Port Hempstead itself. As I arrived in Port Hempstead I saw a poster at the market hall about a guild of merchants called 'Raven Trade Company’ while I was looking for anything useful across the board. The name Storold I still remembered; I just had to find their house. After some time I eventually found the company which is located in one of the more wealthy districts of Port Hempstead. I have to admit their guild hall looks quite comfy as well. What I usually see are huge storage rooms and far too big rooms everywhere where I could get easily lost. This place was a lot smaller and therefore looked way more inviting and nice to me. I found Storold at the company who was busy with refilling the stock of some of their wares. I asked him if he had a necklace for sale which makes my movements even more agile. He simply smiled and told me that he just made one and was about to put it in their crates with their goods to sale. Storold was kind enough to let me use their portal so I was able to easily get back to Dregar.
While I was travelling across Dregar I found Trouble sleeping under a tree in some mountains which are called Viper’s Teeth, as I have already mentioned in my previous entry, but that was all written in hurry. Even though he was sleeping he was a little pale in his face and was shivering slightly from time to time. I could not help but sit next to him and watching over him. I think he had a rather bad incident as I was able to see some signs of battle on his body. As I did not want to disturb him I simply wrote an entry into my journal and as he woke up he was rolling his eyes about that everyone around him seems to keep a journal or diary with them. I don’t know, but I like to write down what I think or what I did during my lifetime. Later I can surely smile about what I have done in my life as an adventurer. And of course it always reminds me about who I am and where I am from; I just need to read my first entries again I wrote since I arrived in Port Hempstead for the first time.
I was right that something happened to Trouble. He told me that he died somewhere down in a cave in the Forest of Mists. I told him that I will accompany him and help him to get past those giants so he would be able to pray at the place he fell. On our way through the mountains we met Jaelle who was apparently heading the same direction as we chose. In Orcs Watch we met Oma and Ell again and after a nap for me we headed down into the cave together to help Trouble. Everything went well so far and Trouble was able to pray where he fell in a battle he was not able to win. So we pressed a bit on and launched an attack on a group of rather strong giants in the cave. The first few we defeated easily but then things got a little weird. Having trust in my comrades I attacked two giants who were running towards me and I really thought my friends were right behind me. Apparently not as I fell easily and did not get any support from them. Luckily Jaelle saw me down on the ground and tossed a potion at me which brought back my spirit and I got up. I jumped up just to get knocked down again, not right after I got up but a few moments later because no one thought it as necessary to bless me with some healings. It is not like we were lacking a cleric or someone else who was able to heal. Either Trouble or Ell should have taken care of my wounds. I don’t know what they were doing and it all started with no backup from the others as I had to face two giants at once, one wielding a huge greataxe. At least I had a soulstone with me so Ell was able to raise me again. Still all this could have been avoided. The last was lacking every sense of tactic and was pretty much unorganized. As I wanted to address the situation later it was like no one really cared about it. Of course I was pretty much ed about this and I told them not to get too close to me as I would bite. Now I slowly have to find trust with this group again. I am not comfortable with relaying on those I cannot trust to back me up or let me defend the group all alone against opponents I am not able to stand alone. If I could only dodge more of their attacks, then everything would be fine.
It seems like something really got between Trouble and Ell. On our trip in a crypt in Krandor they were discussing something. I have no idea what it was about and honestly, I did not even care at that point. Ell and I usually tease Trouble a bit but I think something got mixed up this time and things got out of hand. At some point Ell told him that she will tell him why all think he’s an idiot when we are out again. After we were out of the crypt again Ell and Trouble left to somewhere to settle their dispute. I don’t know what their talk was about nor do I want to know, but either one or both must have said something that hurt the other one. My guess is that Trouble said something silly. He was always telling her that he is sorry for what he said and it seemed like something really got between them.
Due to these circumstances our trip into the crypt of Storan went rather bad as well. We did fine till a locked door. Trouble and Ell took a rest while I was standing guard and then started to prepare for battle. As I picked the lock though Ell was not fully prepared yet and Trouble forgot to cast an important ward on me. I picked the lock as I was told and just stepped through the door as one of these bodaks got me already and died immediately. Ell had to raise me again after they defeated the undead creatures which were lurking around in the chamber we were in and I blew off some steam on Trouble as I was pretty much loaded. So we ended up trapped in exactly the same chamber again with a little difference this time: Ell in one corner and Trouble in another and helpless me. As someone had to do something I asked Trouble about a blessing which makes me more agile again. Still being down, he casted it on me and I focused on the door again. I had to sacrifice my precious tools but in the end I picked the lock and we headed to Hlint where our ways departed.
I headed to Port Hempstead where I met Storold and Miss Elohanna and had a little chat with them. At first sight they seemed like a couple but Elohanna told me she was happily married to a man called Krys. After some time I moved on to make some alterations to the platinum reinforced clothes I bought from Trith a month ago. I am not quite sure if I can life with the design I have right now but it looks way better than before. It took me some time but now I can use the armor effectively and I think that these clothes won’t slow down my movements so fast. I just have to get to used to my new armor though as it is way lighter than my old leather one. Somehow I start to think that my shield will slow me down at some point as well. Lydia always fought without a shield as well. It will require some tough training to avoid the blows I used to parry with my shield. After all I don’t want to get hit and need to dodge it somehow. This is what I should be focusing on, besides improving my way with the rapier in order to become a duelist.
One or two more cups of wine and then I will try to get some sleep. The past four days have been very eventful after all. And then we will see what tomorrow brings.
*Phyress shuts her journal again and smiles slightly. After a few moments the guides her attention to her wine again and some bread.*
-
*With an amused look Phyress sits down under a tree in Fort Wayfare, watching citizens and travelers passing by. From time to time she writes a paragraph down into her journal and then observes her surroundings again.*
-Tunar, Oclar 24, 1436-
I continued with my training the whole last month. Well of course I did not only train on a daily basis but I have to agree that there was a lot of training involved after all. Besides my training I have been out with Trouble and Ell again. It is always quite amusing to see how adventurers differ from each other. So while I joined a group into a cave in the Great Desert, Ell and Trouble were there as well, no one really talked with the others. On the ventures I usually participate there is a lot of chatter going on. But then it is Trouble, Ell, Oma, me and some other adventurers from time to time. I heard numbs talking more than them! I think the only time someone of them opened their mouth was to answer Trouble his question why they were so silent. Silence is one thing but you need to communicate for tactics when the group is under attack. I really did not get it. We need to know what the others are doing and shout commands from time to time. Just telling Trouble that they all were focusing on their task did not really please me. Neither did it please Trouble or Ell. I think someone cut off their tongues or they poisoned it so they had no control over it during the trip. I simply cannot work with a group like this. Even on rests no one was talking. It was worse than on the funerals I witnessed. However I was quite glad when we got back to the surface and I departed from that group. I focus on ongoing fights as well but that doesn’t keep me from talking to my friends during a trip. Even when they moved there was no talking involved at all. Well honestly I don’t care about them anymore. Doubt I will see most of them again anyways and I still got Trouble and Ell and other friends who can actually talk.
On a later trip with Trouble, Chi and Ell through the Forest of Mists, Trouble forgot to cast a specific ward upon me. Don’t ask me about the name. I only know it keeps me unaffected from the cloud he usually casts to stop our opponents’ movements. I made the mistake once before and ran into his cloud unwarded. The result was that I was stuck in a large stone and was not able to dodge the fireballs and flame arrows the casters of the giants in the desert threw after me. I died before I or Trouble even realized about what was going on.
However, as I was forced to stay out of the cloud I was able to keep control about our tactics and was able to shout commands to them. Once Chi was surrounded for example and I told Trouble to take care of her. The other time giants sneaked up behind Ell which she did not notice. I did though and told her to watch her back. You see, communication is good in the heat of battle. It keeps us all alive.
Well I already said that this Malkor is annoying. This time we stood in the desert and Malkor simply sneaked up on Trouble and knocked him down, yet again. He always does that. Sneaks up on him and then knocks him down. Of course Trouble gets angry and shouts at him which seems to be enjoyment for Malkor and ends with Trouble being knocked down more and more. I don’t know his reasons behind that and I don’t care about them but it is not the first time this happened to Trouble. It would tick me off as well. Even harsh words did not help so we left to the inn in Audira. We told him not to follow us but he did nonetheless. I still wonder why they did let a goblin in anyway. However, as I defended Trouble and told Malkor to leave him alone, he started to annoy me as well with his childish antics, invaded my personal space and was close to harass me. If there were not so many other travelers around I would have simply drawn my rapier and ended it. And what was quite sad that he still did not get what he was doing wrong. Maybe he should have simply changed back to his normal, human form though. It might have been the best for him to do, but he did not. Well in the end he told me that he did not like me and left. I did not care about that, I was just glad he left in the end and did not show up so far. After he left everyone was relieved and ready to move on and then we had some fun again and did not worry about any silly actions from his side and the team worked as a team again. Like it did before it showed up. As I already discussed with Ell. Either Malkor stops his antics or I will leave. It would have ended with everyone leaving anyways. If he learned from this he is surely welcome to join our group again but as things look right now it is the best for everyone if he doesn’t travel with us.
On a trip with Trouble, Ell and Chi I handed my old shield over to Trouble. Trouble was pretty much surprised that I handed over to him. He saw me fighting without my shield on the trip before and asked me why I did not use my shield. I told him that I feel that it is slowing my movements down as well, like armors do these days or anything heavy. I even modified the armor, well my reinforced clothes, a little so that there is enough room for my movements. However, I told him that I don’t use my shield anymore due to my training. If I keep on blocking attacks with my shield I will never fully figure out how to dodge in the right moment. This way I am forced to use my brain to observe their movements, foresee them and then manage to dodge or evade their attacks. I know this is a rough method but like Arngrim already figured out: It seems I love to learn it the hard way. I know it is pretty tough and painful that way but I can only learn from the experience I made in battles. In a fight not only brute force is needed, not that I make use of it anyways, but what is needed is your brain. The more I will use my head to foresee their movements the more I will be able to dodge them. I am slowly learning and getting better already. I am just glad I always have Trouble and Ell with me so they can tend my wounds after the battles. So this why I handed my shield over to Trouble. Keeping it with me would only tempt me to use it again in the end and that would be a step backwards with my training. If I really want to become a duelist like Lydia and even want to duel her, I will need observe their movements and try to foresee her next strike so I can try to dodge or evade it. I need to keep up with my training. Trouble and Ell told me that I made huge progress with my training. I know I did and I thank them for their trust in me and even their support, but I need to keep up with my training even if this means I will have to endure more cuts and wounds. But then I have Trouble and Ell with me. I know I can trust my life to them, even though Trouble let me die once lately. It was not his fault but I love to tease him with that anyways.
Besides all this I was able to help a man called Larry back on Mistone. He was looking for his hammer he borrowed a friend. This friend actually gave the head of the hammer to a friend so that there was a lot of running involved which was rather amusing. But in the end I managed to return the hammer to Larry and he gave me a ring as a reward. He told me that it bears something of the Al’Noth inside. Something that will make them laugh. I think such a ring is hilarious. I might test it on Trouble when I see him again and see if it actually works or is just rubbish. We will see.
*Phyress shuts her journal and leans back against the stem of the tree, watching the children of Fort Wayfare playing tag with a slight smile upon her lip.*
-
*Phyress sits down at the temple of Katia in Vale, takes out her journal, quill and in and starts writing a new letter. A slight smile can be seen on her face.*
-Satari, Decilar 21, 1436-
Sometimes Trouble is no fun at all. Well Chi and I had some fun but oddly he did not. I wonder why. On a venture through the desert together with Trouble, Ell and Chi, we stopped in Audira on our way back to Orcs Watch as I decided it was on Chi what to do next. We stopped by in Audira and Chi wanted to take a swim and refresh herself in the sea. As it was her turn to decide I followed her to the sea as I felt pretty much drained and dirty with all the sand and giants. The sand was simply everywhere. While I headed with Chi to the sea, Trouble went into the inn to drink and eat and I think Ell followed him. I am not too sure about that though. However, the sea was very refreshing after the long venture from Dalanthar and Chi really enjoyed it, as I did. While we were talking in the water we got an idea to improve my skills and techniques for future battles. Chi was performing some ritual or dance in the sea; however, she was jumping and tumbling around like the water did not slow down her movements at all. I decided to do some of my training in knee deep water as well now. First it was very hard and I hardly was able to dodge right in time or to react but there more I got used to the water the better I got and I was able to dodge or evade more and more blows. This also helps my training with foreseeing my opponents’ attacks. The harder it is to move away the more I have to observe their movements so I have more time to get out of the way. After a few minutes I was already pretty much exhausted. But the more I practice in the water the better I will become.
After quite some time we finished swimming in the sea and got ready to leave again. Chi decided that Trouble should have taken a swim as well. As he did not want to join us to the sea, Chi decided to bring the sea to him. I sneaked ahead and placed my boot tightly on his chest so he could not move away and gave Chi the command. Chi ran by and splashed a load of water over him. I quickly jumped away, out of his and the waters reach. It really made Chi and me laugh but somehow did not like our little prank and got mad at us. I don’t know but it was still fun, even as he said he was not going to talk to us for the rest of the day. A few moments later he was talking to us again though. Seems like it was not all too bad then. I know that I would do it again, just for the entertainment.
However, even though it has been like three days since my latest venture with Trouble and Ell I still feel weak and drained from running all across Dregar. It was very thrilling and exciting though as I saw some new places. Some I don’t want to return for now. Ell mentioned a cave of trolls somewhere on Dregar and we decided to head there. Well getting there was the rather easy part, till three vampires blocked our way. It was a tough fight and they almost got us. They pretty much dodged like every of my attacks and somehow I was not able to find any weak spots on them. They did not us though. Their blades were very sharp and hit right through our armors and left some ugly wounds. We decided that it was better to turn around and Ell mentioned that there was a path through the Sinister Woods to the cave. In these rather dark and creepy woods we had to fight our way through a lot of spiders and snakes. As we almost got to the cave Ell somehow lost her nerves or so, I cannot really explain it else. After we defeated some more vampires she started to yell something at Trouble again and then left. I have no idea what got into her. Even though Trouble is an idiot sometimes, I did not see him doing anything wrong this time. Maybe she acted that way because he cured the poison in my veins and did not cure the poison in her veins? I have no idea to be honest. If I see her around again I will ask her what was wrong.
But for now I should stay in the woods. I might even stay here a bit longer. A week or so I guess. When I feel better again I will head to the lake close by and practice a little. I am close to master this technique if I train a little more. I already improved myself with evading their attacks by foreseeing their attacks. We will see.
*Phyress smiles softly, stuffs everything back into her back and leaves Vale in the direction of the lake.*
-
*Phyress sits down at a table in the inn in Orcs Watch, orders some wine and food. While she is waiting for her dinner, the watches all the other travelers and citizens who are in the inn this fair evening. Phyress eats her food and takes the wine to her room, where she sits down at a table, enjoys her wine and starts to write a new entry into her journal.*
-Mulnari, Jenra 23, 1437-
I think Trouble thinks I would know what is going on with Ell these days. Honestly, I don’t know it either. I told Trouble that to understand her he will need to know the background why she acted up like this. It took me some time till he realized that I had no clue as well. Ell simply told him it was a woman thing. But that did not help either. I did not have had the chance to talk to her either so we are still pretty clueless here.
My break from adventuring was very good. Not only I had time to review my current progress in the arts of battle and my defense, I also had time to think about certain things that worry me from time to time. Sometimes it seems like men only get in the way, trying to be bossy or simply say that one could tag along but don’t really need aid in battle. The last matters for Trouble. After some time he seeked me out in Vale again, after he had a long talk with his mother, and asked me if I wanted to venture out with him. I told him that if he needs a hand I would love to accompany him. And then he blankly told me he would not need my help, he could handle our opponents alone just fine. Sometimes I really think Trouble does not think before he opens his mouth and I simply replied that it would be fine with me. I’d simply watch him fighting them and would not even arch a brow if he fell in battle. I would simply watch him bleeding to death given he was defeated by them. Well that really got him and opened his eyes. Even though I know that I could actually defeat my opponents on my own, then I still rely on my comrades for their aid in battle. You never know what is going to happen and they sometimes hold nasty surprises for you and then your last thoughts are: Why didn’t I listen to my comrades and was too selfish to realize that some battles can only be win together as a team. I really think he knows better now. It took me some time but then we fought back to back, trusting the other to help the other one if things go bad, which gladly did not happen this time.
Experience taught me that I need to take a break from time to time from all this adventuring. It is very interesting and thrilling, sometimes even too much of the later. But if I am out for too long and don’t take time for myself to regain my strength and take care of my wounds and my very soul, I start to blunt emotional. If that happens I am to a point where I don’t care anymore and don’t really see a difference between foe and friend. A few years ago I was close to that point and took a long deserved break from any active adventuring and I only managed to take the break because I still cared for Trouble and Ell. The other thing that might happen to me is a nervous breakdown which is followed by emotional blunting. Sadly my mind is not as strong as I am agile, else I’d have it easier, but such is life. As long as I take a break from time to time I’ll be alright.
But for now I should go back to my practices again. I still need to figure out how to better foresee their movements in order to dodge their blows. We will see.
*Phyress shuts her journal with a slight sigh, leans back against the chair and takes a sip from her wine.*
-
*Heavily wounded Phyress sits down behind a building and curses slightly. After she cleaned several wounds and cuts and bandaged them with her remaining bandages, she sighs and takes out her journal, writing a new entry.*
-Wedlar, Febra 25, 1437-
Sometimes things simply do not go as planned. Well I did not expect all this injuries from my last battle, to be honest. It is not like I wasn’t prepared to face my opponents, some giants in this case, I just was somehow unfocused. Being elsewhere with my mind I was not really able to focus on the movements of the giants and therefore was not really able to evade their attacks, not to mention I was not really able to attack them effectively and I don’t even want to mention knocking them down. Everything seemed to go wrong on my little trip to the desert. In these situations it is always good to have friends around, friends you can rely on and trust your life in their hands. I really needed them this time but in the end I had to fight this battle alone and barely survived.
The last trip with Ell and Trouble was a bit odd though. Naturally Ell and I were teasing Trouble yet again and it seemed we crossed the line where he simply ignored us. If he wanted it this way then sure, I can play such games as well and knocked him down, just to see if he would still ignore me afterwards. As predicted he did not ignore me anymore and casted his stone spell all over the group, then he stormed off. But then things just really messed up. Ell tried to mend things and got between Trouble and me and Trouble was shouting at her, simply as she was got in the way and he was ticked off by me. After Trouble and I were even again, Ell was mad at Trouble and left; Lance running after her to talk to her. Trouble agreed on not ignoring me anymore, or to give me the feeling of being ignored and I won’t knock him down again, well not while I am myself. I cannot guarantee for anything while I am possessed or confused, like in the one cave where I almost killed him once or twice, according to him. I still don’t know whether that is true or not. However, Ell returned because of me which made me a little proud. I told Ell that Trouble was not mad at her and she just got between the fronts and then she and Trouble must have talked about it. However, things seem to be fine between the three of us again; well for now that is. You never know what will happen next.
Before this hiatus happened, Ell, Oma and I were venturing through the Forest of Fogs and we did quite fine. We proved that we did not need any male support to make it to the bottom of the cave. First there were a few doubts as Trouble was not without and therefore we missed his really handy cloud spell to stop our opponents. We worked great together as a team and no one of us fell and we easily made it. Every one of us knew about the abilities, strengths and weaknesses of our comrades and with joined effort and skills we were able to defeat them. In the battles we fought down there I got more and more confident with my blade and I make very little steps towards to mastering the new technique to foresee their movements to dodge them right in time.
So well, for now I should take care of my injuries and make sure they won’t get infected. I don’t know how long I will stay absent from any trips with Ell and Trouble, But I am no use when I am more dead than alive. I’d be just a burden for them. In the meantime I can practice even more though, as long as it won’t be too exhausting. When I am all set again I will seek out Trouble and Ell again to plan even more adventures. And I should send letters to the ladies again so we can do another ladies-out-night and prove that we are not as weak as some men always tend to think and that we need their protection. Pathetic!
*with a snicker Phyress shuts her journal again and immediately has to stop it again, covering a wound on her hide with her left hand. She curses and carefully stuffs everything into her bag again and dozes off.*
-
*At night Phyress arrives in Audira and enters the inn. After dinner she heads to her room, takes off her boots and starts writing a new entry into her journal while she lies on her bed, sipping from her wine from time to time.*
-Wedlar, Mar 25, 1437-
After my wounds more or less were healed I decided to head back to Fort Wayfare on Mistone because I still had to sell Chakar two boxes of aloe. This reminds me that Sallaron and Tegan both want to buy some aloe from me as well. As far as I know Sallaron wanted two boxes and Tegan just one. It might have been the other way round as well, I am not too sure anymore; I only know that I need three boxes of aloe. Gathering aloe is always nice when I am taking a walk on either Mistone or Dregar. It always allows me to be alone and think about thinks, like when I reviewed the incident with Trouble a few days later. However, after a long journey I arrived in Fort Wayfare, where Chakar was already waiting for me. Together we walked to Port Hempstead as Chakar had to visit the bank first. I was really happy to hold 4000 True in my hands again as I am planning to buy a new enchantment. I already contacted Galathea about an enchantment for my weapon and she told me that she is going to work on it and will contact me once my enchantment is ready for delivery so I can pick it up. This enchantment will be stronger than the current one I poured over my blade.
After I stored the True on the bank I headed out of Port Hempstead and towards Hlint. Right outside the gates of Port Hempstead I met Ell again who was missing me. It has only been a month since me met lat though. She asked me about my plans and I told her that I was going to hunt down some Bodaks as I still need to hand over one box to Sallaron. Ell was quite glad that I asked her if she wanted to accompany me and together we headed towards Hlint. Ell and I worked just fine as a team and watched the other’s back. I have to admit, Ell became very powerful. Aragen surely puts a lot of faith into her, seeing how many blessings and wards he offers to her. I still think that if we go undead-hunting I am more or less a burden to her. In a fight I usually take advantage of their weak spots. Unfortunately I cannot find any weak spots on them; might have something to do with the circumstance that they are not alive anymore and don’t feel pain. Do they? The next time I have the opportunity to ask one I surely will, though I guess I already know the answer. And naturally we were attacked by mummies again. They scared me as well so I kept on running around, screaming and Ell had to take care of them and then calmed me down. On that occasion Trouble showed up as well and together we found another key which should open the door to another chamber. Unfortunately the lever was trapped and each time I pushed it, the trap triggered and sent a lightning after us. Oddly I could not open the door without disarming the trap first. Even with limber fingers I was not able to take care of the trap and after many more lightings we eventually decided to head out of that crypt again and come back later.
Afterwards we headed over to Dregar, the desert to be more precise. I suggested to head there simply because I forgot some of my stuff in North Fort where I took care of my injuries. In North Fort our ways departed and I grabbed my stuff I hid in town. I spent the night in a tent with some other mercenaries and in the morning they were leaving North Fort again. I asked them if I could tag along for some time as they did not mind me around. While most of them were heavily armed and therefore reminded me more or less of Arngrim, one was only wearing reinforced clothing and was wielding a rather fine weapon, namely a rapier like I do. Well I have to correct myself here; it was a rapier but way finer and more elegant than my weapon. She told me the name of such a fine weapon was “Silver Foil” and allowed me to wield it for a short time. I was really stunned by the elegance and balance of the blade. I must have looked extremely funny as she started to chuckle all of a sudden and I started blushing which made her chuckle even more. She introduced herself as Richelle. She and I really got along just fine and she offered me some help to master my weapon. In the battles we fought she was always very nimble and it seemed she was dancing on the battlefield, spinning around and dodging every blow when the giants were trying to hit her. Richelle told me she was only so gracefully in our fights as she did not use a shield either. The less armor you wear the more you have to take care you don’t get hit and if you are nimble you don’t need a shield anyway as it is just in the way when you try to dodge a blow or try to hold balance in a jump.
When our group took a rest Richelle took her time to help me with my ways of battle and we were training duels. The practice with her was very exhausting but I learned a lot from her. She even showed me how to land more accurate and more critical attacks. Thinking about it now it is quite simple, though timing matters as well to hurt them pretty bad. First it looks like just a normal attack but once you cut into the flesh you spin your blade a little, pierce into the flesh and move it fast outwards again. That way it leaves a bigger, more painful wound which you can take as an advantage in battle. Richelle and I were training this technique for like a week since I eventually got my timing right. Of course I was able to land critical attacks on them before but with this technique it will be easier to launch such an attack. I really loved the time with Richelle but eventually our ways departed again. It was quite sad after the weeks we travelled together among the other mercenaries and we surely had our fun. Before our ways departed she handed me a rapier and told me that I should try to master it in order to become a real duelist. It is a swashbuckler’s sabre and comes with a larger cross guard than ordinary rapiers so I should be able to parry better than with a usual blade and to fend off my opponent’s blow. I am very happy about this little gift but feel that I cannot really make use of it just yet. Anyway, the time with Richelle almost felt like with Celes; I really miss her. One day I should really stop by the Wolfswood Rangers Corps Headquarter and visit her. Maybe we could even travel around like we did when we were young. I am sure I will meet Richelle again one day and show her the progression I made and I am eager to see how good she really is. Besides I can fight some duels with her just to prepare myself to face Lydia one day.
But well, now I am back in Audira and I need to seek Trouble and Ell out again to tell them about Richelle. I won’t tell Trouble any details about Richelle though as he will just start hitting on her. I am sure that when he does, Richelle will start hitting on him as well, with her rapier. However, we will see.
*With a slight grin she closes her journal and glances sideways to her new rapier. She stands up and fondly runs a finger over the engraved lily on the blade with a slight smile.*
-
*Phyress sighs and sits down under a tree in Orcs Watch and starts writing a new entry into her journal.*
-Wedlar, Seplar 11, 1437-
Life is something we always should keep honored as it is our very own life after all. Sometimes things happen which should never have happened though but then we cannot change them and some say it is fate. I don’t care much about destiny, nor do I think there’s any fate. If I meet my fate then I am not free at all and I want to keep my freedom, even if I have to fight for it. What I believe in though are ways or call them paths. I walk a path called my life and my choices and actions might force me to go one direction of a crossroad but in the end I made the decision myself and it was not ruled down by fate or the like. I only know that at some point in this mortal world my path will end. I don’t know exactly when it will be or how it will happen. Will I fall in one of all these battles I fight or will I die of old age? Will I get poisoned or die of disease? No one knows what the future might bring; I just have to keep on living even if it is hard from time to time. On a recent trip with Ell and Oma to a cave in the Forest of Fogs things went really bad and resulted in the death of Ell and Oma. I managed to slip away unseen, badly injured that there was more of my blood on the ground than in my veins. It took me some time to take care of all these deep cuts and nasty injuries but I finally managed to stop at least the bleeding and was about to leave the cave and tried to seek out Oma and Ell again. As I tried to get out of the cave again I ran into Trouble who was apparently roaming in the caves as well. He saw my miserable constitution and took care of my wounds and in the meantime I told him what went wrong and that the result was that Ell and Oma were defeated. Trouble simply stormed ahead, not even fully prepared and I could not help it but I had to take care of him. Needless to say Trouble got pretty much kicked around by the same giants which blades already tasted the blood of Ell and Oma. I tried to protect Trouble but I ended up with being stuck in Troubles nasty cloud and the giants had their fun in simply killing me while I could not move in any way. If it was not even bad enough, I lost a piece of my very soul to the Soul Mother. I cannot really describe how it was, it was just horrible and not a pleasant feeling in any way. And now where she got something from me, I know that she will be there waiting for me, trying to consume my very own soul till nothing will be left anymore and this frightens me. A higher being living from our souls is just wrong if you ask me. It is like a small overture to the destiny which reminds us about our life as well. It shows us that nothing lasts forever and that we are mortal to the core. Every time we get closer to our final death, to the end of the path we all walk, the more and more we will remind what life really means and what we are. I don’t regret my attempt to save Trouble’s life at all and I’d do it again as this is my way of showing I care for others, especially my comrades and friends and I know they would do the same for me.
Sometimes my view about things differs from others though who travel with our little group from time to time. I was curious about how Lance, a toranite paladin, justifies us killing all these giants while we were in the desert. We rushed into their cave, slaughtered our way through them and headed out again, their blood all over us. Lance gave me to know that all those giants were considered evil in the eye of Toran and that this would justify their death, or how I prefer: Our murder on them. Anyway, I would try to defend myself or my family as well when a group of adventurers invades the place I call home and kill everything and everyone. And then he gave me something along the lines that we have to kill them before they kill us, turn evil or they attack caravans passing by. I simply gave him to know that he should consider me evil then as well as in this case I am like a giant. While I actually don’t care about their death as it is either them or me, I hate that some people trying to seek justification on telling them evil and us good. That is just not right in my eyes. For a Toranite it might be easy to stop thinking and simply follow blindly and say oh the giants are so evil and follow an evil god but I don’t. If you listen to him there are good and evil humans as well so why doesn’t he say all humans are either all good or all are evil? Why are there good and evil humans but only evil giants? And then he told me I have no idea and told me his mentor was a dark elf. I know that most people see dark elves as evil, but then why was that one good and all those giants in the cave evil? Lance has no right to say all giants we slaughtered were evil by heart. Some might have been like his dark elf mentor and tried to break out and start a new life? Even though I am a mercenary and offer my service for Trues, I am still better than them as I don’t justify my actions by law and an odd view about black and white and I don’t even dare to chose either side.
One thing I don’t get about Lance either is why he is in love with an aragenite priestess. As far as I know Toran is not in the best terms with Aragen, or so I heard. As far as I know paladins have a strict code so why would one chose love before one’s god? Personally I somehow doubt Lance’s words. He told me that they are free to love and marry anyone they want to. I somehow doubt Toran would allow such a thing without any consequences. I always thought his paladins would fall from grace by loving someone their god doesn’t like at all. But what do I know? I am simply a swordswoman and have no idea about the ways of the gods and the motives of their holy warriors. I think I will see if something happens to Lance about this whole love thing. He would not be the first who is falling from grace after all.
Besides all this chosen confusion I trained hard again to become a duelist like Lydia and Richelle are. After a trip with Trouble, Ell and Jaelle to the desert on the continent of Dregar, Jaelle asked me for a duel as she needed some practice with her weapon, a rapier as well. I agreed to it and promised to be gentle with her and I focused mainly on parrying her blows and using counter attacks when she took her defense. We battled two rounds and it was very good training, even though Jaelle got injured pretty badly. I was able to block most of her strikes but some I just did not evade right in time and was left with some minor injuries. Focusing on blocks was good training and helped me a lot with examining her movements and move away right in time or simply to block them. I know I am close to master this technique.
I even started to focus on a new technique. This is actually rather hard to learn and takes a lot of my concentration. During our trips we often had to fight invisible creatures or some who hid themselves in the shadows or some even blinded us by bright light. And no, Trouble did that to me as well on several situations but those were accidents and not aimed at me, I was simply in the wrong place at the false time; our timing is not the best from time to time. However, if I cannot really see my opponent I have to rely more on my other senses and experience to imagine where they are and simply strike in the direction I think they are. This will still take me some time but I know I will master it in the end and use this advantage in farther battles. It is pretty mean to know they feel save and then you simply strike at them and see blood dripping from nowhere. I am sure Trouble and Ell will be impressed when I master all these techniques. I know I am very close to master them both. But to finally master them I should seek them out again and practice a little with them on one trip or the other.
But for now I should head to the inn and get some rest. Maybe I will drink the one or other glass of wine as well before heading to bed. We will see.
*With a slight smile on her lips she puts her journal back into her bag and heads to the inn in Orcs Watch.*
-
*Phyress sits in a chair in Ell’s living-room, writing a new entry into her journal. From time to time she looks around as if she was looking for someone or something.*
-Freas, Mar 6, 1438-
A lot has happened from my latest entry. Somehow I did not really find any time to sit down and write a new one, even though a lot has happened in the past months. Most of my time I’ve been busy with my training to become a duelist, in fact I already was one before. I actually was a duelist for the time I left Alindor and sailed to Port Hempstead. I just never was good enough to be called one and still I am not. Well of course I could call myself one but Lydia would kill me for doing so. She told me to come back and show her my skills in a duel, given I feel ready for it. Even though I made a huge progress during these years after I left my old mentor, I’d still lose against her. Her knee will never fully recover again but she would still kick me around in the arena like I just started my training. However, I learned a lot from my journey together with Richelle and practiced what she told me.
I eventually figured out how to foresee some of their movements and therefore to improve my defense. It is still hard to jump away right in time as I still need to focus on the ongoing battles and then taking care of their movements is hard. Trouble was kind enough to help me with this problem. He casts some sort of spell that makes me smarter so it is easier to get and therefore I can dodge their blows in time. It is still harder than with my old shield, but in the end I am more agile and nimble on the battlefield and it will surely aid my reflexes. Carrying a shield around is so encumbering when your advantage in battle is your dexterity and reflexes. I practiced this technique along the one I mentioned in my former entry. I wanted to hit them more accurate when I am blinded so I can still stand a chance against my opponents. The advantage of my opponents is that I cannot see them with my own eyes or only hardly. This way I cannot really strike any blows at them, nor can I see their movements so I could dodge them. It took me quite some time and effort to improve my ways when I am blinded but I think I finally managed it. The experience was rather painful. Try fighting a weak opponent while being blindfolded! When your vision is gone you have to rely on your other senses, mostly your hearing. But now I trained enough and mastered this technique and battles already confirmed me that it is way easier to fight concealed opponents now. I also managed to figure how to launch more precise strikes at my opponents. The technique is rather hard to learn and I just managed to make use of it but I would not say I have mastered it at all. I will still have to train hard to eventually master this technique. But for now I am just glad that I finally figured it out after quite some years of hard training. During all the battles I fought along with Ell and Trouble I also improved my attack itself. I aim way more accurate these days and also managed to improve the rate of my attacks. As I started my training I was very slow but during the years I grew more and more confident with my weapons and my training itself so I was able to speed up my attacks a little.
I also thought about focusing my training on a new attack which looks rather acrobatic; given you have the grace to perform such an attack which clearly not everyone possessed. I still know this technique from Dylan and he showed it to me several times during my training with him. Sometimes you are surrounded and you’d be too slow to take them all down one by one. Sometimes it is simply better to launch an attack at all of those who stand close around you and threaten your life. In such time it is always useful to perform a so called “Whirlwind Attack” and try to make a gap between you and your opponents. The coordinating and balancing is the easy part for me, seeing I perform somersaults and backflips anyway. It would be easier if Arngrim would be around now to show me how to use this technique but I don’t feel ready yet. Of course he is not Lydia but if I see him then Lydia will show up as well and I promised her the next time we see each other we will have our duel. Maybe I should seek Richelle out again and ask her about some assistance for my training.
The past few months have been odd as well. Not the months itself, but our little group as well. Even though we are well trained and disciplined, and Trouble says we are one of the best well working teams in battle he has seen, we tend to disagree on many terms and end up in arguing about them and sometimes we are close to stop working as a team all together. I have to admit, sometimes I was not innocent and stirred up the flames a little and those things come back to me sooner or later. I cannot help it, but it seems the more power they are granted, the less they care about others. It would not be the first time Trouble came to me, just to tell me he could take care of a band of giants on his own and would not need my help. Ell acts different as well. She’s quieter these days. I think it has something to do with this Lance. Personally I don’t get why she’s with him but then I am preoccupied as he is a Toranite and I cannot really stand their teachings. Actually he is a nice guy and I can get along just fine with him, till he is going to mention Toran. But after all this is none of my business. As long as he makes Ell happy I won’t interfere.
This reminds me I haven’t seen Jaelle around for some months now. I still need to see if Trouble really talked to her after he simply ignored her. Well at least now I know why he freaked out about our little prank. Both of us were invisible as we spotted Trouble standing around close to Dalanthar. Jaelle kissed him which looked quite funny as she was still invisible and Trouble clearly surprised. Then Jaelle yelled that I should stop kissing him as he was with her and not me. Of course I joined Jaelle in this little prank and was pouting about why I was not allowed to kiss him as he belonged to me. Oddly Trouble did not really like our little show and stormed off. I already had an idea about why he freaked out and showed us his cold shoulder, but later Ell confirmed it and I had a little talk with Trouble. Even though I told him more than once that I don’t want anything from him, he still seems to have feelings for me, so therefore we were playing with his feelings. I just hope everything works out with Jaelle and Trouble.
During our trips we gave ourselves titles. Well I already had my title but Ell and Trouble did not. Trouble is now called “Commander” as he loved to boss us around and Ell is now called “Flame Angel” due to all her fire spells she loves to cast. And I? I am still “Maiden of Battle”. Ell thinks it really suits me.
I should seek the two of them out again and plan a few more trips. I heard that Moraken might have a little job for me to do. Well, we will see.
*Phyress stretches while she shuts her journal again and stuffs it back into her bag. Unseen she sneaks out of Ell’s house again.*
-
*with a sigh sigh Phyress sits down under a palm in Audira close to the coast and starts writing a new entry into her journal. From time to time she looks up and stares into the distance, not really focusing on anything.*
-Tunar, Seplar 10, 1439-
I have been back for like two weeks now, yet it seems nothing has really changed it all. Shortly after I travelled back to Prantz on Dregar I bumped into Trouble. Seems like he is usually somewhere around me. Maybe he is even stalking me, I would not know. However, it was nice to see him again and still alive of course. We walked in the direction of Corax Lake where we bumped into Ell and Oma. It seemed like they really missed me and were glad to see me still alive. Trouble of course thought me as dead and that I was gone forever and would not return as I did not let him know when I left like a year ago. Really he should know better as I am not an easy kill. I have to admit I missed all of them as well as we work just fine as a team. Everyone knows what the other one is capable of and where everyone’s limit is, more or less. We went through the Forest of Fogs and headed towards the Sinister Forest and everything was like when I left, although Trouble mentioned that now where I am back the teasing and making fun of him increased rapidly. Am I really such a bad influence? Nah, I don’t really think so but sometimes he should better keep his mouth shut; but then it is always good entertainment and if he wants me to stop then he should simply say so.
I already made some good trades since I am back among my friends. Tegan had enough time to finish my new suit which was already handed over to me by Sallaron. Now I simply need to seek her out to fulfill my part of the trade. Sallaron himself offered me a trade as well. I have to gather quite a load of ore for him so he will hand me over a fine amulet which will clearly help me in my way of battle. It will help me to become even more limber in battle. First I hesitated when he offered me the trade as I am no dwarf and not used to mining. I am not very strong at all and prefer the graceful way but however, I agreed. Together with Trouble, Ell and Oma I went a little mining and I already regret the deal a little, but just a little. My hands are still hurting a little from all mining and I am really slow at the progress itself but I already got a third of what he requested me to mine for him. Trouble naturally groaned about that all his friends are working for his parents, more or less but I cannot help it, a job is a job. Reminds me that I have to ask him about a mining trip for some amethyst which I need for another trade.
A few days later he took me and some others over to Belinara, where we travelled a bit around. I have to admit Arnax looks somewhat nice. Well at least I like it more than Port Hempstead of Prantz but to be honest, I don’t really care at all in which town I am as long as I can find the one or other job. We decided to travel to the Sharawood but when we had to face some of the people who live in there we had to turn back again. Their archers a pretty good and it took us some effort to keep everything in line but we made it. Nonetheless it was a good choice to head back to Dregar at all. At least I know most of Dregar these days and know what we can face or not, even though I am curious about Belinara now but that can wait for now. I should rather focus on my training to become better than Lydia. When we were back on Dregar we went to Storold’s house as Trouble had to do some babysitting on his golem or so. Storold’s golem was apparently broken and he found it somewhere. He also told me that he has another golem as well which is supposed to have a soul and I don’t really buy that. I never heard of a golem with a soul; they are merely constructs. It is just some metal and wires but having a very own a soul? Anyway, a gnome showed up to help as well and fixed the speech of the golem a little. It mumbled something about portals and a The’thalus or so. I did not really keep the name in mind but it seemed that the one or the other in the room knew about that person were a bit shocked and frightened. Maybe I should ask around for this guy and find out more about what is going on.
I really wonder when I will see Richelle again. We travelled around together for a year and now she is gone again or rather I left her new mercenary group when we got close to Prantz again and I decided it was time to say farewell for now again, as much as I enjoyed the time around her and the group. The good thing about the group was that all of us seven were women but each of us had her very own way to defeat our opponents. Tyrith was a more brute woman and fought like a berserker, relying more on her strength and fighting with a greatsword. Lywn, a half-elven maiden, preferred her daggers, may that be when facing an opponent or from a longer distance, when she threw some daggers at her opponents. She used to poison her daggers and attacked them from behind, just like I use to do. She pretty quick on her feet and was hard to keep pace with her and she was always twirling around somewhere. Even though everyone was different we fought well together, like a unit and honestly, we were in our hearts. I really miss the six as it was a great time and we had a lot of adventures together and grew very strong. I had enough time to watch the others practicing and learn the one or other thing from them, not only battle related. I just hope Richelle will let me know when she is organizing a trip somewhere as I will follow her anyway.
But as I already said, for now I should focus on my duel with Lydia. I know I will have to face her sooner or later and I better be prepared. I just hope I can practice hard enough to even stand a chance against her in a duel. Well, we will see.
*With a slight smile Phyress closes her journal and takes out a small dagger she got from Lywn, playing around with it a little.*
-
*Phyress leans against a tree close to the shoreline of Audira, flipping through the pages of her journal while Richelle and Tyrith are taking a swim in the sea. She watches them for a moment with a slight smile on her lips before she turns her attention back to her journal and starts writing a new entry.*
-Threas, Novlar 19, 1439-
I am glad I ran into Richelle and Tyrith on my way back from my latest trip with Trouble, Ell, Oma, Aerimor and Amanda. Actually I was merely standing around close to the Bay of Carocsa and took final preparations for some practice as Aerimor showed up from the direction of the Ore Hills. We chatted a little and he asked if he could join me somewhere and naturally I agreed. I don’t know why, but he is very nice and his pointy-ears look funny. Well all elven ears look funny, yet cute. Not to mention their agile build and dexterous movements. But do I even know the elven form is really him? He changes a lot into various creatures. So far I have seen him changing to a lizard, a kobold and a fairy-dragon. No, not a fairy-dragon, it was more like a drake.
However, just before we were about to head out, Trouble, Ell, Oma and Amanda showed up and the bunch of us headed into the Sinister Forest to a dungeon of some sorts. The place is filled with powerful undead and according to some rumors I heard there once lived the dragon which attacked Hurm some years ago. I have no idea if it still resides somewhere in this dungeon and the dungeon is huge and somewhat haunted so we were not able to find any peace to rest for a moment. At one point we had to pass through a corridor with two doors. I found the first one unlocked as I approached it, the second one was not locked at all, I think. However, a few of us already passed the first door and were attacked by the undead. Amanda found herself in front of a locked door and everyone was shouting for me to open it again. Funny as it was not locked in the first place or someone must have unlocked it before I even saw the door. As far as I know no one else of the group is able to pick a lock anyway, besides Oma’s pixy. I saw the pixy down there but doubt it picked the lock as I still think there was no lock at all. However, the pixy was already gone so it was my duty to open the door whilst the battle was still going on and it took me quite some effort as I hardly was able to concentrate on my task with the battle going on behind my back. Some were shouting to wait for the others but honestly, while the battle is still going on? In the next room we gathered again and immediately some of us were hit by a sunbeam Ell obviously casted because some of us did not wait for the others. Right! And no, she was not sorry for hitting others as well who actually waited. This already made me yell around why in the name of the gods we were hit with a blinding spell. However, no real explanation was given to us. If it was not enough at all, Oma thought it would be fun to throw her Great Thunderclap at us just to knock us down on our behinds or simply to stun us and me really got mad. She didn’t say a word at all and I simply stopped fighting for the rest of the trip. Why should I risk my life and as thank I’ll be stunned, blinded or whatever? Trouble stopped fighting as well, even though he only stopped fighting for the time we were in the crypt. After we got out of the woods and found a safe place to take a rest, our group disbanded quickly and I was still ticked off. Oma whispered to me that she was sorry for knocking me down while she gave me my share of the coin we found on our little misadventure. I did not forgive her yet, neither Ell. First of all they have to come up openly with it and secondly I cannot trust them for now in battles.
I don’t mind being knocked down in the heat of battle, such things can simply happen but you don’t simply throw spells at people. I only know if it happens I will knock them down as well, even if it will hurt them more than their spells hurt me. I just cannot stand this. If they said sorry immediately after it would not have been all too bad and I would have cheered up a few moments later ago and did not stop fighting at all. Not saying anything leaves the impression that they do not care about their comrades or friends at all, even less those who were uninvolved and not really the targets of their moods. Right, I am just collateral damage.
I stormed off and gladly ran into Richelle and Tyrith who were able to understand me and calm me down a little. Naturally Tyrith knocked me down as well but I did not mind at all as it is her way of greeting a close friend so I felt honored. Richelle was more reserved though. Well alright, she always is. The three of us then went to blow off some steam on some poor giants which got in our way to Audira. I fought more like a berserk than the usual me but then I was pretty much ed anyway and did not care. I have to admit I felt good slaughtering my way through them and slowly I calmed down until I collapsed due to exhaustion and Richelle and Tyrith were worried about me. I gathered that Tyrith carried me the whole way to Audira where Richelle rented a room for the three of us to spend the night.
On the next day I asked them for some assistance with a technique I wanted to learn for long now. Actually I started my training more than one year ago, yet I did not figure it out so far. The technique is called 'Whirlwind Attack’. I have seen Tyrith using such a technique earlier by using her greatsword when she was surrounded by several opponents. You spin into the air, trying to hit all opponents close to you. The spinning part is somewhat easy if one is able to hold the balance, even in midair. It is even harder to hold the balance when you hit someone and that was it involves a lot of focus and concentration. However I figured this technique out with Tyrith’s help. It will be very useful when I am surrounded by several opponents but I won’t really make use of it, it is just to make some room. I am still faster by defeating them one by one than to spin around the whole time. While the technique is nice I cannot find their weak spots and therefore I am not able to hurt them seriously. When Richelle and Tyrith are back from their swim they wanted to practice a little with me so I can improve my technique to knock my opponents down. My technique is fine, but more and more of my opponents resist my attempts to knock them down lately. I have to figure out a way where this is not the case. It will take me quite some time as I cannot do it by brute force. This is why I rather train it with Richelle than Tyrith. I also want to improve my reflexes a little as lately it became hard to get away from Trouble’s fire spells.
Lately I have been thinking about Trouble a lot anyway. He is not any longer with Jaelle and I wonder why they aren’t a couple anymore. I don’t know why I am thinking such things but Trouble still promised me a dinner and a night out at a ball, dancing. Maybe I should test a little on Trouble, seeing what his way is going to be now. If he wants another relationship, would it be just like with Jaelle or does he want a relation because he loves someone? I cannot explain, but when Trouble is around I feel safe. Anyway, I should waste my time on this issue; it is his life, not mine. I should rather join Richelle and Tyrith for now and relax a little while we are here and swim a little as well. I just hope Tyrith won’t pull me under and I drown. However, we will see.
*Phyress giggles a little as she closes her journal and jumps into into the water to join Richelle and Tyrith who are splashing water at each other.*
-
*With a slight smirk playing around her lips Phyress sits down at the table in the room she rented at the local inn in Leringard and eyes the old journal laying on it, as well as several ancient looking letters. She flips through the pages before she starts writing a new entry into her own journal.*
-Threas, Febra 5, 1440-
It seems like Trouble is not interested in a date with me after all. I waited at the Tempest’s house in Prantz as I wanted to drop some ore for Sallaron and some sapphires for Tegan as I collected some of it with an interesting elven maiden. Trouble showed up so I could enter as neither his father nor mother were around at the time and while I was already there I asked Trouble about the ball we still want to visit and about the progress with his dancing lessons. Well he did not take any more dancing lessons but he promised to continue when he sees Ell again. However, I called it a date and he felt a bit uncomfortable about it, at least this was the impression I got. It seems like I have to push him a little more and see where this goes. I cannot help it; he made me even more curious by the way he reacted.
Before I met Trouble I headed out to gather some sapphires. I knew they would be somewhere on the one isle but I never exactly knew in which cave I would find them. At the port I saw a woman sitting in the snow, warming up at a fire she lighted. She introduced herself as Aryanna and told me that I would not survive the trip without her help and so she accompanied me. Her Common is not very fluently and she is a little bossy, poking me with her staff the whole time. I did not mind at all as I was already used to being bossed around by the Commander and she is a guardian of nature as well, just like Trouble. We had to face goblins on their mounts and really, they were pretty tough and it took us quite some effort to defeat them. It was not like they did not die quick but their attacks were pretty precise and our wounds deep. It took us likely more than just one day to get to the bottom of the cave where we found some deposits of sapphires and I happily mined them. Aryanna was not that pleased as I did not give anything in return. Well I did give something in return actually, the blood of the goblins we defeated. However, half frozen we reached the surface again and its bright sun which blinded me immediately. After we got back to the port our ways departed and I headed straight to the Tempest’s house. It was good training to fight against goblins on mounts as I ordinarily do not do such things.
However, my recent trip was very interesting, even if I did not travel with Trouble this time. Oma was around though but I am still slightly mad at her. The same goes for Ell but I did not see her around yet. Trouble told me she was very sorry about what happened back in the crypt but I told him that she has to come up with it herself. Well, besides some known faces like Aerimor, Amanda, Oma and Chakar, there were some other adventurers on board I did not know yet, like Hjalmar and another woman I did not see a lot of times, always hiding somewhere. I think she was called Alatriel or something similar. Besides us there were some other passengers on board as well. On the journey the passengers were in their cabins as it was foggy and rainy outside. I like such storms and rain so I did not mind the weather at all, besides it gave me some time to chat a little with the captain about him and his crew. His crew reminded me a little of Trouble, Ell, Oma and me. We used to work great together as well. However, at some point the lookout reported pirates which headed to us and tried to take over the ship. With joint forces we were able to defeat two of their attacks. Sadly it took some tribute of our vessel as we were hardly able to take the fires out and water already filled the inside of the boat. Luckily we saw an island not too far away and our ship tried to reach the shore. Well we more or less made it, even though I almost drowned as we had to swim the last part to the island. I am glad Tyrith did not see me as she would be rolling on the floor laughing about me.
The island was not on any of the captain’s maps and we had to fix his vessel again so we could leave this abandoned island again. So we had to search for some spring for fresh water, metal for nails and the like, as well as wood for the ship, naturally. We found a spring and a little later a flooded cave where we had to face some giants. We were able to use the clubs of the giants as tools for the repair and we also found some veins in there. However the men forgot to take some picks with them so we had to leave the cave for now. Back at the boat I described the way to the spring as well as to the deposit to the captain and he sent some of his men after it as they could not start the repairs anyway as they were still lacking the wood. While we explored the island a little more we met a native tribe. Naturally they did not speak common, nor did anyone of us understand their language so gestures and drawings had to help communication. They gestured us to follow them and guided us to a grove of some sorts with very sturdy trees. It would have been perfect for the repairs if the men did not mess it up at all. The tribe was asking for one woman for one tree which of course we did not agree to, even though Alatriel wanted me to leave with them. Their leaded stormed off after spitting in front of Hjal’s feet and looked rather ed. I somehow doubt it was just about the trade but something else as well. However, now we were their enemies and they attacked us. If the fighting was not enough already, Hjal and Alatriel were ing around again and I could not stand it any longer. I told the captain that I would take care of it and simply left. Being a woman they did not attack me and I gestured them that I would come with them. They then guided me through the woods to their leader.
I was quite surprised when I saw a man, probably from Mistone himself. He was also surprised to see one of the invaders in his basement as well and was curious about why I wanted to see him. I told him that I did not want the bloodshed any longer and were trying to come to an agreement with him. He was curious about the other women of our group as well so he left to check on them. He told me not to run away as it would create a mess given I would have touched the door. Besides that I had no desire to flee. His hideout was quite comfy and I just arrived. Before he vanished he caressed my cheek. I was alone. I could not help it but search through his things. I found some ancient letters as well as his journal. While I was waiting for his return I flipped through the pages a little. I did not really read it yet but I am sure there are some interesting things written down in it. What makes me still wonder is why he lived for more than 50 years with the tribe. I think I will find an answer in the journal or in the ancient looking letters. Then all of a sudden the door opened and a little pouch was dropped on the ground. Next to it someone started to write on the ground to pick it up and to head back to the ship. I used the stardust and vanished from everyone’s sight. It was Galathea who came after me and together we ran back to the boat while the others were still defending it. All of us hurried and our boat just hit the water again as the tribe came to a stop at the shore. I saw the man standing beside them and could not help to blow him a kiss and wave his journal in the other hand. Too bad I was not able to see the expression on his face but I am sure he paled when he saw the book in my hands. I am sure this was not the last time I met him. I am sure he will come after his book, or just to see me again.
However, we returned safely to Leringard again. On the way Alatriel told me she holds more respect for me now, seeing I took his journal with me. It will surely give us some conclusions after all. All I can say is that it was a very interesting trip, even though I did not really make any new friends on the boat. I cannot wait to see Trouble’s reaction when I tell him this story. But anyway, in the morning I should leave and continue my training. Where? We will see.
*With a slight smile on her lips Phyress shuts her journal and guides her attention back to the other journal laying on her desk.*
-
*With reddened eyes Phyress takes out her journal and lights a candle in the tent. Woken up from the light Celes turns around to face Phyress for a moment and looks at her for a moment, her expression saddened before she falls back asleep. Watching her sleeping friend Phyress takes out her quill and ink and starts writing a new entry into her journal. Some of the words are almost not readable, washed away by the tears whilst she writes.*
-Tunar, Augra 3, 1441-
Some promises will never be fulfilled. Sometimes it is just too late. I will never be able to head to a ball and dance with Trouble, nor will I be able to have dinner with him at his parents. It is too late now; he is gone, forever. I still cannot realize he is already dead, nor do I even want to realize it. How can he be dead already? Why did the Soulmother take the last remaining pieces of his soul? Why cannot he come back to dance with me? So many questions and most of them will stay unanswered. I only know he is with the Longstrider now and looking down on us. And this all happened like half a year ago now. How could I miss such a thing? Maybe I did not really miss it but did not want to hear about it and simply overheard it? I cannot say, not right now in my current situation.
Actually my day was going to be great. The day before I teased Storold among some others in Port Hempstead about me being his girl or that at least we have an affair. However, the next day I sat down there with him and we simply chatted. He asked me about my training with Angela. A month ago Angela was willing to be my mentor and show me the way of a duelist to improve my way with the rapier. She did not want Storold to teach me. I guess I could rather teach him the one or other thing than the other way 'round. Angela seems to be a nice person and like me she loves to tease others, especially Storold it seems. Her blade is like the finest I have ever seen with my own eyes, although I wasn’t keen on touching it due to my respect for it.
While I was sitting around the memorial in Port Hempstead Snagnor showed up again after quite some time. I did not see him around in ages and it is usually always nice to talk with him or to exchange the latest gossip. The information he held for me was not what I expected though and I told him he should stop fooling me by saying Trouble passed on. Apparently he did not know I didn’t know about his death, yet. What followed after was almost a breakdown. It seemed like the world was about to crash on me. It could not be. He could not be dead. It took Snagnor several attempts to persuade me that he was really dead. I still don’t want to believe it. I remember I started to cry my heart out and me resting my head in his lap. This couldn’t be true at all. It was like a bad dream, just that this one was real and there was no way to wake up from it, seeing it was reality. My heart is still bleeding and I am thankful Snagnor was there to comfort me. I did not see myself like this. I was not myself or maybe I was? I never felt such emotions for anyone, not this intense. How do people say? You tend to realize when things are too late? I wish I’ve seen it earlier but I think I loved him. I cannot help but I felt happy when he was around and I enjoyed his presence, even when we were fighting about the one or other meaningless thing. And all this came to an end now? I don’t want him dead, I want my Trouble back! Run around with him in the woods and simply laugh about his bad jokes.
I don’t know how many time passed when I laid on Snagnor’s lap. It could have been hours or days. I did not care at that moment. Snagnor made sure I was alright before I left and headed towards the harbor. I cannot really recall how I got here into this forest. I surmise I sailed to Mariners Hold and headed this way where I passed out somewhere in the woods, according to Celes. I did not really realized what was going on around me; all my thoughts were about Trouble. I loved him and I did not want to realize when he was still alive, unsure about my feelings were not responded by him. I should have told him and I should have been with him. If I was there I could have saved him! I always did! He saved my life and I saved his. We were only strong together; every one of us needed the other one to survive and I was not there to save him this time. His passing is entirely my fault. I was not there for him when he needed me most. I was not there to bury him, or to hold his hand when he let out his last breath. He’s gone, forever.
As Celes found me I had bruises and scratches all over my body and from the look of it I was caught in a battle. Whether I lost or not does not matter. I probably charged blind into a band of mercenaries. Seeing I have all my belongings still with me I probably defeated them before I passed out farther away from them. I am glad she found me there and took care of my wounds. She really made progress within the Corps. The bandages were well made and the wound skillfully bandaged. I just wish the circumstances we met were better than this. She carried me to a safe place in the woods and made camp. We talked for hours about Trouble and she comforted me by just being there for me and holding me. I really needed that. I am still terribly confused by all this. It hit me really hard. I thought I could deal with the death but now? Killing is one thing but losing someone you are very close to is another.
I should be really sleeping but I simply cannot! I have to think about Trouble the whole time. Yes, I loved him and that is probably the reason it hits me that hard. Why? Just why did he have to die? It is unfair! Unfair after all the great times we had together. We could have ruled the world, just him and I. Together we were strong and fought many battles we were about to lose but we never gave up. Our will was strong together. Together we could have defeated everyone who got in our way. I remember times where I defeated him almost dead myself from some giants in the Forest of Fogs on Dregar. I died in the process but it was totally worth it. Now I even realize why I acted so selfless. That’s not my way. He was always there for him and I did not care to sacrifice myself just to save him from certain death. I was his Maiden of Battle after all and he was my Commander. I just don’t know how to live on from here. I am just a Maiden and lost without him.
Even though you are dead now, Trouble, I know you will guide my steps and that you will be with me. I know you’re taking care of me and you will always stay in my heart. It is yours after all. You will always be with me. Gods, it hurts so much to know we will not be able to fight battles together anymore. No, that is not right. We will fight battles together as you are with me, even though I won’t see you. You always wanted me to improve myself in the ways of battle, Trouble. You wanted me to be strong and I am trying to fulfill one of those things you always wanted me to do. I am trying to master my blade for you, Trouble. I need to jump over my own shadow. I did not believe in myself, but you did. I thought my blade was the only thing that kept me alive but now I see how wrong I was about it. What kept me alive was my love to you. You gave me something that was worth fighting for. I will find the place you fell even if it will cost my life. There is one more thing to do for you besides your wish for me to master my weapon. I am going to find the place you fell and plant a tree. It shall have sturdy roots, just like you were yourself and reach up high in the skies, up to the gods. You were a great person after all, Trouble. It should be a place for all those who seek wisdom and guidance as you offered to me. You shall not be forgotten, Trouble. You have your very own tale to tell.
I will always love you, Trouble. Be my guide and guide me through the dark eternal night I have to go through now. I need you more than ever now. Please don’t leave me alone...
*Under tears Phyress shuts her journal and cuddles under the fur next to Celes, slowly falling asleep with her hands around her journal like she is holding the very last thing that will remind her of Trouble.*
-
*Phyress sits under a tree in Audira, watching the sailing ships from the shore. After silent moments in the setting sun she sighs and starts writing a new entry into her journal.*
-Wedlar, Novlar 4, 1441-
Trouble’s passing still hurts my very soul. It has been like two month already and I don’t really feel any better. I am trying to hold up the masquerade as good as I can but I know that at some point, a weak moment in example, it will fall down and everyone will know how I really feel. Jaelle knows how I feel, seeing she had to go the same way I did. She just had more time already but I can see she’s still filled with grief when Trouble’s death is mentioned. This just cannot be true! I am still not accepting his death my any means. I never wanted this to happen. I somehow feel a little bad for Maran as well. On a recent trip with Fleur he poked me about my mood over and over again, almost pestering me about what is wrong with me and I frankly told him to shut up as I just got to know that a close friend of mine died. He felt sorry and told me he did not know. I gave him to know he could not as I never talked with him about it. It only increased his curiosity about the relation of my friend and me. Seeing he does not tell me anything like that when I asked him several times back in the past I simply refused to answer. People should stop worrying about me; I am better than that. I won’t do anything stupid; at least that’s what I am saying myself.
Maybe I am doing something stupid these days anyway as it seems Del Alo’rion is on the move again. As I feared he showed up in Hurm, as expected to be honest, seeing he still had a hideout around Hurm which I never found. A retired Overseer hired some mercenaries to find the ones who kidnapped his daughter a few weeks ago. They wanted him to retire from his position so they’d release his daughter. The exchange has already been made and a new one, called Marcus, already holds his old position within the merchant guild. I found some links to Del Alo’rion, even as the retired Overseer introduced us to our task which was plain simple. Meet the bandits at the place where the exchange took place and find out the one who blackmailed him to retire. It should be just outside Hurm and we were given the map. However, it seemed that Del infiltrated the guild, made good word of him, hired mercenaries, kidnapped the daughter, and blackmailed him to retire in order to take his position. Knowing how he worked in the past, it was easy to assume Del was behind this. Especially in Hurm, seeing it is a good place for Trading and he has a hidden base somewhere around already. Probably he bribed his way up or he blackmailed people to get this position. It is not like he did not do it in the past already.
After we gathered more information we needed from the Overseer, we headed out to find said place. It did not take us long to find it outside Hurm and some mercenaries were guarding it. We decided to talk them into giving us what we wanted to and I took over the “negotiations”. My idea was to offer them a merge. I told him I came on behalf of the White Lily and that my guild was willing to merge with the Del Alo’rion’s. I did not mention the retired Overseer sent us as we were not allowed to. Everything went according to plan until I made a slight mistake and mentioned Del’s name. I should have seen it coming that mentioning his name was a mistake as no one in a position as Del would send someone to those little mercenaries in order to guide us to his basement and he shouted commands to his friends about attacking us. Right in time G’ork showed up behind him with a dagger around his throat and, who wonders, he told us everything we wanted to know. I promised him not to kill him and that every one of us could walk back home unharmed, given he told us what we wanted. We had to dig in a little deeper from time to time but in the end we did not kill him, just threatened him with his life. It worked wonders and I was not in my best mood after all. G’ork then asked if he should kill him just in case and I denied. Not because I promised the poor mercenary to spare his life, just because he’d be dead if he told anyone, anyway and he probably knew better not to tell anyone. I did not allow cutting off his tongue either, just not my way. We already had him where we wanted and we got the location of Del’s hideout. Not to mention he confirmed we were dealing with Del Alo’rion.
To reach the hideout we had to enter the sewers out of town and passed a worker down in the sewers. I bet he got a story to tell when he finished work and went back home. However, the way was full of traps and most doors or gates were locked. Most were pretty easy to disarm or to pick. Just with one I had problems but then it was very good work. Together with a dwarf I decided to handle it the rough way and destroyed the door. Maybe I should mention that most of the mercenaries we had to face on our way to the hideout were women. I have no idea why they are fighting for them or if they were forced to do. We made our way through and finally got into a house of some sorts, the windows all barred. In the lower level we found a little boy and Galathea and I decided to free him. Well it was Galathea who took care of him and had the idea after all but it took her my skills to free him from prison. We searched through the house and found a crystal of some sorts. According to Sein it holds some healing properties or something like that. I am not too sure with all the magic. I leave that to the spellcasters.
While we all were gathered Del Alo’rion showed up and I noticed that he bought himself more suitable clothes and robes. Naturally some of us attacked him immediately which almost got us killed, despite me shouting to stop this insanity. But no, why bother listening to poor little Phyress? After all she has no idea at all. Well finally they stopped fighting and we got to talk a little to Del. It seems he’s after becoming a king now. I always knew he was after governmental power but I never imagined such a position. But king of where? I have no idea yet. I somehow doubt he has connections near to any crown but I cannot rely my thinking on that. From time to time he is unpredictable. I cannot help but think that I somehow will meet him again and that I am part of a plan to him. I just don’t know which. After some time of more of this friendly chatter with him he decided to disappear again and leave us with the mess we created in the house to the local guards. We somehow persuaded the guards we were not really responsible for all this and explained we merely were here to free a kidnapped boy, which was actually true. Maybe it was not the whole truth but true after all. The retired Overseer handed us over our payment and the job was done. Maybe for some it is just a job but I am meeting this Del over and over again and it gives me creeps as I cannot figure out what his true intentions and goals really are. And right now I am still an easy target to influence. We will see what future might hold on the whole matter with Del Alo’rion.
A week after I sailed back from Hurm to Port Hempstead I met Snagnor again in Wayfare and talked a little about recent happenings. I did not want to talk about Trouble by all means. The wound is still too deep and fresh to talk about it. While we were chatting about the advantages of a bow made of mahogany, Maran showed up, all excited about a cave he found in the Silkwood Forest. The cave was infested with spiders and he did not fully explore it. Curiosity beating the two of us we decided to follow Maran to his cave and making jokes about a name for the cave. We called it 'Mighty Maran’s cave of nasty spiders’. The cave was indeed filled with little and large spiders and I did not really find it really thrilling but it was nice enough stop thinking about Trouble for now ... I thought. We found a way which led us deeper into the cave. The whole cave was very dark and I heard the sound of spider-legs tipping over the floor the whole time. However, the spiders were very tough, much harder than those on the first level. Together we managed to defeat them and reached the end of the cave. Just as we were about to head out again the ground started shaking and I had to hold my balance not to fall down. Having no clue about what caused this we tried to make our way out of the cave as fast as possible. We were not keen on the idea to be crashed by falling rocks from the ceiling. But it seemed like someone or something did not want us to leave. We fought our way out through many spiders and it seemed like they were eager to end our life, attacking us from both sides. We were almost out of the second level as a large spider almost rolled over us and attacked us immediately. It took us quite some time to defeat this spider but in the end Snagnor, Maran and I managed to finally kill it with joint forces. During the fight I tried to knock it down several times, using a slightly new technique. I did not have had any success yet but I am still looking for a way to improve my technique to knock my opponents down. After the spider was no more the passage was clear again and we easily made it out again. Before we left we heard some hissing north of us and it gave me creeps, as I only saw darkness crawling in there. Do I even want to know what lurked in there? Probably not. I only know that the cave still gives me creeps and I won’t head back there for now, although it is still a very interesting place. Maybe Maran will take me to the cave again, I don’t know. I only know that Trouble would have loved exploring this cave and it makes me sad.
The trip into the desert so Trouble could search around for topaz did not do me any good either. All these places bear memories with Trouble. We have been through so many things, why did he have to die? It’s not fair...
*With tears in her eyes Phyress tosses her journal back into her back and covers her face in her hands, clearly not wanting anyone next to her while the sun sends the last rays of sunlight over Audira and finally fades, leaving only a shadow of a woman, crying for the very soul of the one she loved.*
-
*With a weak smile Phyress sits down against a tree at the Corax Lake and stares over the water. She then looks at the flower in her lap she got from Maran some time ago, somehow still blossoming. With a sigh she takes out her journal, quill and ink and starts writing a new entry into her journal.*
-Freas, Decilar 20, 1441-
I am quite glad that Del Alo’rion did not show up again as I have other things to deal with now. This time it is about me and not some insane mage who wants to become king. Like that I was captured on an island by natives. Apparently some were bending the truth a little but Snagnor could not know when he told me. He was concerned about me and asked for the why and how of my capture. I told him that I was not captured nor held against my will and that it happened like two years ago. I don’t know about any recent captures of me. I might be still terribly confused but I guess I would still know about a capture, wouldn’t I? And then he mentioned something about me becoming queen. I had to tell him it was just a joke. Actually it was not really a joke, just a lie. I just wanted to stop him and play my little games with Del Alo’rion. I have no real intentions to become his bride, nor queen. But then I have to admit he is cute in his own ways. But maybe I am just still confused or I love the thrill.
It has been some time but I finally spoke with Ell again. Of course she wanted to tell me something about Trouble and I only got to know about it because I went to refill my canteens on a stream while Ell, Jaelle and some others were gathered around a campfire here at Corax Lake. As I came back I heard Ell saying that she wanted to tell me something while she was talking to Jaelle about something. Probably it was about me and Trouble’s death. However, I asked her to tell me. It seems like she and Trouble had a longer lasting talk shortly before his passing and obviously she wanted to talk about me about his death. I almost started crying and told her that I am not ready for it, yet. Despite it was not the right place or time to talk about such things. I mean there were like eight others gathered around us? Do I want them all to know my misery? Not really. I know Ell and Jaelle, among my other friends care for me and will help me if necessary and I really appreciate it. But there are some I don’t want to talk about such things, nor want them to even know about my relation to Trouble.
Shortly after we all headed into the woods as apparently giants were attacking a small village within the Wolfswood Forest and the citizens were asking for help. I already forgot the name of that settlement, not as it will matter anymore, but more about it later. However, we agreed on helping them and went for a two day march from Vale further north. I think it was north; I was elsewhere with my thoughts so I did not really pay attention. It was odd that we saw less giants than usual around and I pointed out that it is quite natural when they all gather somewhere else or leading an attack on a little settlement. We soon met their troops though. As the ranger already mentioned they were well organized and equipped. I cannot really compare them to the giants I usually face in the desert of in the woods. These were way stronger and their shamans were capable of handling powerful spells, like calling burning rocks from the sky. I was among some who charged one of these and fell. I managed to evade all falling rocks but then another spell hit me with full force. Heavily wounded I tried to retreat as fast as possible from it but the last thing I saw was a crushing hand pacing down to me, then blackness.
I don’t know how many time passed but all of a sudden I found myself gasping for air as I suddenly started living again. My vision came back and I saw Jaelle and Ell over me. Ell apparently brought me back from the death and I thank her for it. Ell and Jaelle were clearly worried about me and helped me getting up again. I asked Ell if she had another soul stone but she shook her head but gave me to know she would raise me regardless as she cared for me. I know it is more than I’d ever ask from her. I know she will be there if I need her. We had to face more giants before we finally approached a bridge. The local militia used the bridge to hold the giants back. I already doubted the gate on the bridge would not hold long if the giants unleashed their joined strength. We had time enough to recover from the long journey and after some time we heard them coming for us. The gate fell in an instant, but we held the bridge. Soon they were building rafts to come across the river as well. All of us knew we could not hold this spot forever. There were just too many of them so we fell back and headed to the settlement. The fortifications there were rather bad. I mean wooden barricades won’t really stop any giant in rage. They’d just jump over it. I asked the one in charge for some traps and started placing traps all over the area before the barricades. It would not really stop them, but maybe slow down their attack a little and cause confusion. And we needed time so the citizens could flee out of town and towards the shore on the east.
There were two roads leading out of town and the giants were attacking both when their attack on the settlement finally started. Everyone but G’ork and I decided to guard the main road into the settlement. No one else cared to guard the other, smaller passage into town so we did it. G’ork and I worked well together. It was almost like he watched my back and I his. Luckily the giants decided to focus their attack on the main road but they still kept us busy. While we were not fighting we talked a little about tactics and the like and it was a refreshing talk. Then the first big wave of the giants stopped and apparently one citizen of the settlement approached. I did not get everything as we were still taking care of the small passage but from what I heard the giants were after revenge. It seems like he or someone else slaughtered giant women and children in a cave. I’d go berserk as well if someone decided to kill my family, despite the fact that I don’t have a family. The second wave came and we managed to defeat them all. Blood was everywhere. I think I still smell slightly after it. It is not that I was really involved in this battle as I had a hard time to even find a spot where I could hit them. However, a big giant showed up, probably their leader, and just looked down at us. Grohin said something to him but I have no idea if he even understood. Their leader then walked away and with him the giants left. It was over and we made our way back to Corax Lake where we departed again. I sat down on the cliffs above the lake and was lost in my thoughts, thinking about Trouble, as G’ork approached and asked me who taught me how to fight as he did not see many small ones to face giants and can stand them. I told him my old mentor back on Alindor did, along with her friend. I asked him why and he just gave me to know that he wanted to know just because he was curious. G’ork is a nice guy after all and he told me that I should simply contact him when I need a hand. I felt a bit flattered as G’ork does not seem to be one to make friends easily but I like him and we work well together. I will contact him when I need a hand; you bet!
Ell approached me as well and we were talking a bit about Trouble. It seems like she has the same problems as I. Everywhere she walks she finds the places filled with memories about him. I don’t know but I am sure he is watching us. She offered me to show his grave. It should be somewhere around Dun Lake. His parents decided to busy him there. When I feel ready for it I will head there with her. I just need time...
*With a sigh Phyress shuts her journal again and stretches a little, rubbing her back against the stem. She remains at the lake for several more hours before she finally stands up again, grabs her stuff and heads toward Prantz. A tear rolls down her cheek while she slowly makes her way to the capitol of the Rael Kingdom.*
-
*Phyress sits down at the lake in Hlint with a soft, yet weak smile on her lips. Her eyes are not that reddened anymore, yet a red smear still remains around her pupils. With a hearty sigh she takes out her journal and starts writing a new entry into it.*
-Wedlar, Febra 18, 1442-
Trouble’s passing still hits me hard when I remind myself about the joyful moments we used to have in the past. All his teasing is gone, but our adventures together will always remain in my memories and heart. It still hurts my very soul that he won’t travel around with me, nor that we will fight about something silly, like whose tomatoes is he trying to steal or making fun about Sallaron’s pink shirt. I bet his father has a pink skirt somewhere as well. Maybe I should ask him about such a skirt. Just thinking about Trouble still leaves me all sad and filled with grief and tears. I don’t want him dead! I need him! Everywhere I go I get reminded of past adventures and journeys we made. If I explore new places we never heard about before it hurts my very soul that he cannot see it with his own eyes. I knew he loved to see new places, just as I did.
Last week I received a task that would have made him all curious as well. Actually I was merely passing through Haven as some adventurers or mercenaries were blocking the road towards Silkwood Forest. I bet some of them were, but they made it clear they were no mercenaries at all. Being a mercenary is nothing bad after all. I just travel around, see a lot of places, have several adventures during my tasks and get around. However, they planned on heading down the mines for some explorations. I let them know that it would be a quite dangerous trip as the gnolls down there are quite ferocious and attack any intruder at sight. I could not help it but to follow them into the mines. I did not really know half of our group, just Fleur, Aesthir and Daniella. Well I knew Mor as well. But then I did not see Daniella in ages and I somehow doubt she remembered me at all. Well, needless to say the exploration went pretty nasty. First of all, someone did not like Fleur comments on some things and turned around to leave. Daniella headed out with him and we never saw her again. So well, we ventured down the mines and someone, I think it was one of the dwarves, decided we should try our luck and opened the first door we saw. Needless to say there were gnolls hiding behind it, just waiting for us to open the door in order to attack us. Some of us tried to hold the door but I thought it was pretty senseless, seeing we lacked someone a good fighter who could stand his ground against the gnolls. Besides that everyone was rushing to the door and therefore were blocking my way so I could not interfere at all. As one gnoll broke through our lines I simply sneaked up behind and killed it. As everyone was still blocking my way I decided to just stay in the shadows and watch. One after one of us fell and they just defeated 2 gnolls or so. In the end there were just Fleur and me left. Fleur managed to escape by casting invisibility and I simply stayed hidden in the shadows. Well it was really a disaster as like six or seven of us fell. Thinking about it we would have done better by simply using tactics and not rushing ahead blind. Most of us left after the suicide-exploration and just Mor, Fleur, Aesthir and I remained in Haven.
While we were discussing our defeat and lack of tactics, G’ork passed through Haven, apparently about to head down into the cave to mind his own business. G’ork asked me what I was doing around here and I told him about the trip to the mines that went all nasty. While we were still chatting a Halfling showed up, apparently a blacksmith. Abdul was looking for some help to get him some iron nuggets. He had a map with the location of an old abandoned mine deep within the desert called the Spirit Dunes. We agreed payment and then headed off. It was a very long and exhausting trip through the desert and the desert did not really welcome us. On our way we had to fight manticores, ants and giants as well. I was glad for G’ork’s blades. Actually he surprised me by using two shortswords. Apparently he has a lot weapons on him. We fought well and we finally made our way to the entrance of the mine. Well it was a hole of some sorts and therefore we had to climb down. G’ork and I made our way down easily. Aesthir and Mor had some problems, somehow. Maybe because they still had their armor on? But what do I know? I don’t even wear any armor. My armor are my reflexes and grace. Armors just encumber me way too much. However, we had to fight some giants and ants but we eventually found some veins of iron running through the abandoned mine. At one vein we actually found the remains of a miner. It seemed old but we found a drawing o a man on a horse on him. Probably his son or daughter drew it and he kept it with him the whole time. I cannot help but think it was very lovely, well that he carried it around with him the whole time, not his death. G’ork and I worked well down in the mine and he always took care of my back. On the battles we fought I focused on new ways to knock them down as my current technique just does not want to work as I want it any longer. They just don’t want to fall down before me! But well, we finally made our way out again and back to Haven where we met the Halfling again. He was pleased with the eight nuggets we handed him over and he gave us our payment.
On the exploration I learned quite a lot. I got to know that there used to live ogres in the Haven Mines before the gnolls moved in and took their place. It seems they even keep some of them as their slaves. Second, manticores can be quite deadly as they shoot little needles after you to defend themselves. They hurt a lot. Besides that I got to know a few details about G’ork’s past. Seems he had a hard and rough childhood. I am just glad I had a good childhood and a loving family and Celes. I really miss her. Probably I should go visit her again. I promised her to return when I feel better again. But then I want to see Richelle and her band of mercenaries again as well. It has been some time we travelled together.
But then I would give my life to just travel around with Trouble again; even if It was just for a day. But this will remain a dream. A dream I am fighting for...
*With a heavy sigh and tears in her eyes Phyress closes her journal again and watches into the night sky, looking for the Longstrider’s constellation. As she finds it a soft smile can be seen on her lips and she whispers Trouble’s name in awe.*
-
*With a sigh Phyress takes out her journal again and slumps down against a tree in Katherian. She eyes her rapier lying on the ground next to her and runs a finger about the back of its blade. Glancing to her journal she takes out her quill and ink and starts writing a new entry on a blank page.*
-Threas, Mar 26, 1442-
The past few weeks have been very confusing. Not only because I still suffer from Trouble’s death, but because some things happened I did not really expect to happen. Maybe it is Katherian itself, I don’t really know but on one day I had two rather odd encounters. The first one was about Maran. Apparently Maran was about to visit the temple of Xeen in Katherian and was very surprised when I sneaked up behind him and my hand slid around his waist. What makes me wonder is that his head did not explode. It was just redder than anything I’ve ever seen before in my life. It was as red as the red on my armor. He was very surprised by me being there and he stammered like every word, trying to find excuses why he was inside the temple. I don’t know his true intentions behind it and to be honest, I don’t care. I only know that girls avoided him in the past because of his bad leg. Maybe something else happened in his past as well but I never really bothered to ask him about it. I don’t but I don’t see any problems with him visiting the temple. Many do. Therefore I don’t really understand why he is trying to hide it. However, I agreed on not telling anyone about it. I will only tell if he gives my little secret away. Maran thought that Trouble and I were a couple. I told him that I refused him once as he did not love me. What made things more interesting is that Snagnor saw us talking in front of the temple and as we reached the docks again he started teasing Maran about visiting the temple and Maran already started blushing again. I told Snagnor that Maran was with me and therefore did not visit the temple. I know, it is a blatant lie but then he really was with me.
However, recently rumors were spreading around about a captured ship by some pirates close to the shore of Katherian. The ship carried loads of grain. The owner, someone called Arkolio, offered 20.000 for bringing the pirates to justice. At the docks we saw a mercenary who was going to hand us over 10.000 True. He would keep the other 10.000 and hand us over the information we’d need to get to their hideout. Mor, Maran, Snagnor, Mel and some others were there as well. Among them were three Toranites. They called themselves “Road Wardens”. I don’t know but I had a bad feeling about them from the beginning. Always saluting their commander or however they call the one in charge of their little group of just three. To be honest, I would not even let them guard a dead rat. The captain wanted to make one of us the sergeant and therefore leader of the little investigation. My name shortly fell, but it seems I have to work on my reputation. One heard my name and was like “Phyress? Hell no!” However, the captain decided to make me responsible for this mission. I was in command and I felt flattered. It is good to know that there are some who trust me enough to hear my orders and want me as their sergeant. Those who know me know that I am not a bad person at all and are capable of leading a little group. However, the Toranites did not agree on the vote and if the captain made one of them the spokesperson the trip would have ended nasty and with a failure.
We soon left Katherian and sailed to the Dragon Chain. I briefed a little with the captain and gave commands to my team. We were going to sail to the shore in cover of the night with just a rowboat. Apparently there was going to be a meeting of pirates to trade the grain for True. While I was still waiting for the right moment to let the rowboat down and sail to the shore, bubbles were seen on one side of the ship and immediately after we found ourselves in a battle fighting odd creatures of the sea. It was a tough fight but the two of us did well. Luckily the captain had a priest aboard so we were able to raise them again. Shortly after we made our way to the island.
On the island the Toranites started to become our greatest worry, despite snakes and pirates. It felt like they wanted to blow up our cover or were even working together with the pirates. I was in charge of the exploration and they did not seem to bother ignoring my tactics and explorations. I sent Snagnor to scout ahead. All of a sudden I saw three Toranites running around, “securing” the area and shouting “area secured” to each other. I mean why bother scouting the island while you have three Toranites in your team who were about to blow up everything? Most of us simply ignored them and I wished them dead. Or arrange a trade. Grain for those three Toranites. I fear we’d have had to pay them for taking them tough. They were just a burden. Snagnor found out that there were two pirates agreeing on the exchange and we went after them. I tried to be all diplomatic and offer them a great trade but they simply attacked. We managed to defeat them, though. We managed to capture and tie one pirate up before he left with a ship. It was senseless arguing with him as I already had a headache from the three Toranites so I let Mor talk to them. As a follower of Rofirein he’s better at all this law-stuff anyways. The pirate demanded on his high-seas-right or something like that so I ordered to untie him. He tried to flee and Snagnor simply shot him. I did not care if he was dead or alive at that moment. I only thought about getting rid of the Toranites and do us all a huge favor. I’d have gotten a monument by doing it. However, we soon found another group or pirates and I sneaked up on their ship to secure it. In the meantime someone opened the battle. I found the ship empty but after we successfully defeated the pirates we found the first sacks of grain and also some tracks of sacks leading farther in. I ordered the three Toranites to secure the ship and stay there so it stays that way. Shortly after we had the burden with us again. Someone of us if the ship was secure and it was reported that our crew on the ship secured the other ship. Farther on the island we found another small hideout of the pirates. Actually there were three groups so I divided my team into three. Everyone taking care of one group. The Toranites were responsible for the archers in the middle. Seeing everything was settled, I launched attack. As I feared it did not go smoothly. No wonder when no one was attacking the archers and joined battle after we were more or less done with them all. Because of their ignorance some of us might have died and that I cannot stand. I was their leader and they had to obey my orders. They simply acted like saboteurs or like they were working in line with the pirates. However, we found more sacks of grain and dragged it all to the small pirate ship we secured and made our way back to Katherian where we handed the grain over to its rightful owner, along with the ship. I really should have left the Toranites on the isle. Not that it is really the effort but maybe I will report the actions of these three Toranites to their church. They don’t really act like Toranites. Their actions are even more chaotic than mine.
I am just glad that the trip is over and won’t see the burden again for some time. Well, I hope I won’t have another encounter with them at all. And if I do, then G’ork will be with me. I really wished G’ork would have been with us. He knows how to deal with such a burden. Besides that I really love to travel around with him.
Speaking about it, I met G’ork prior to this little chaotic exploration at Corax Lake again. The sneaky bugger simply showed up right behind me and surprised me. G’ork was just passing through and on his search for some herbs. He asked me if I want to tag along and I did not mind at all and told him that I would love to. I cannot help it but I like fighting with him back to back. I know he’s way better with his double-axe than I am with my rapier. He truly mastered his chosen weapon which is apparently the double-axe. He swings it very skillful and sometimes his opponents make the mistake and run right into one of the axes. Well, it is their own fault and it is either them or him. And I don’t want anyone to kill G’ork. I already lost Trouble; I don’t want to lose G’ork as well now as we get along just great. He just takes me as I am and doesn’t curse my name like some others do. I asked him if he was willing to show me some tricks and tactics along our journeys and he agreed to it. I got my first lesson when I had to practice some sword-techniques against a colossal scorpion. It took me quite some effort and time to eventually defeat it, but I lived. Even though I am a weakling compared to him he doesn’t mind me around at all and I love him being around him. All in all it was a very interesting journey and I had a little more insight to his past and also learned something about orcs and dwarves. Unfortunately he had to leave as soon as we reached Dalanthar. I would have loved to travel with him a little further but I know we will in near future and I am really looking forward to it.
I don’t know, but right now I am very confused again. If I just knew why?
*With a heavy sigh Phyress shuts her journal and wraps her arms around herself, staring into the sky with tears in her eyes as the night falls over Katherian.*
-
*With a slight smile on her lips Phyress sits down on a bench in Dalanthar, takes out her journal and starts writing a new entry into it.*
-Wedlar, Jular 18, 1442-
The past few months have been very eventful, indeed. And I am just lucky I did not meet any more road wardens so far, although Maran mentioned he saw them around recently. Just thinking about the task I had to fulfill with three of those in my team still gives me a slight headache. But at least now I know how to handle such a situation. Thanks to Storold in this case. I was merely walking around Port Hempstead the other day in my beautiful dress when I met him at the monument, as usual. It seems his hearing went well. I would not know as I was over on Dregar when I heard about his hearing in Spellgard and there was no way I’d have made it to Spellgard in time. We then talked about his taste for dwarven lasses while working hard as blacksmiths. I don’t know but I thought he’s prefer human women and not doing such hard labor at all. But well, everyone got its own taste. I only know that I am not dreaming about dwarves crafting armor! He then told me something interesting about apples around the rusty river. Apparently they hold some very strong poison and make you very ill. Storold said that he wouldn’t even give them to his enemies, knowing what they’d have to endure. Actually he tasted one of these apples. It gave me the idea to pick some of those apples and hand them over to the road wardens if they are going to annoy me and the group again. The rightful protector of the Al’noth told me I could not do that and I frankly told him that I see no difference between poison and the wave. He uses the weave and I use poison, it is not much of a big deal. He uses the weave to weaken his opponents and I’d do the same with poison. And as well as the Al’noth poison can be used for cures as well. He simply did not want to agree to such facts. Well, our views simply differ on many things and he was avoiding an answer when I asked him if the use of poison is justified if used for something good like weakening the arch-enemy of Alindor, given it would show any effect. He simply avoided the question. I think it is a touchy issue for him. I don’t care if I use poison as long as I can take my advantage out of it in battles or the like.
Shortly after I left Port Hempstead and was on my way to Hlint as I bumped into G’ork between Fort Wayfare and Port Hempstead. G’ork was actually heading towards Haven. He wanted to drop something into his house and then head out for a mining-trip somewhere. While we were at his house he showed me some interesting things he found during his travels over the whole world. I have to admit, some were very nice. Lie, everything he showed me was nice. However, I finally got my key and can now hand Sallaron the iron over G’ork and I mined for him the other day so I can eventually settle for the trade. I just need to contact Sall first and let him know I got everything he’s asking for. I just hope he’s alright. I still suffer from Trouble’s passing and I was merely in love with him but for Sallaron? Well it was his son. It must have hurt badly. Some wounds just never seem to heal.
The trip with G’ork went very well. I assisted G’ork a little; not that he really was in need of my help down there, but I love travelling around with G’ork and apparently he likes me travelling with him as well, besides we share the same opinion about most issues. However, I managed to help him and did well. I knocked down our opponents and launched attacks at their weak spots. After we got back to his house I bought a very nice and useful helmet of him. It was rather expensive to me but then I needed it dearly. It will protect me better than the one I used to wear before so I simply sold it to a pawn-shop afterwards.
I had a lot of good practice lately together with G’ork or with Maran and Fleur. During all our explorations I finally figured out how to improve my knocking-down and how to evade certain spells casters throw after me, mostly in the desert. It took me quite some effort to sharpen my reflexes that way so I could easily evade any incoming fireballs or flame-arrows in the desert on Dregar. It took me even more effort to find a way to knock my opponents down more effectively but I finally managed. G’ork helped me a little with it as well which I am quite proud of. I think G’ork has many enemies or those who want to see him dead and therefore keeps mostly to himself. It might be a result of his past as well but without it he wouldn’t be who is now though. I am just glad I got to know G’ork. The talk we had up in the mountains certainly helped me to understand his views as well. It is good to know about his past and I freely shared mine as well. I cannot help it but I enjoy travelling around with him and I know he cares for me as well. He is like the big brother I never had in my entire life.
It fills me with joy and grief if I travel around with Maran these days, seeing he becomes more and more like Trouble with his skills. He managed to figure out how to cast a Stonehold and warded me just like Trouble did earlier and then we stormed a camp of giants in the Forest of Fogs. I am not entirely sure whether to like or hate it. I sometimes don’t see Maran in front of me but Trouble. As much as I like travelling around with him, I just hate that he is like Trouble more or less. I just don’t know, but it is confusing as I only see Maran as a friend and am not in love with him as I was with Trouble. Someone must really hate me for torturing me this way.
Anyways, I just came back from a very interesting exploration with G’ork. Actually I was just buying some supplies in Dalanthar when a disguised G’ork showed up and motioned me to follow him and naturally I did. I still have to giggle when I think about him in his disguise. White doesn’t suit him at all. It looks ugly on him. Well it would look ugly on me as well but I had to agree with him that it is a perfect color for a disguise. Someone headed over a head to the Authorities in Western Gate and they thought it was him. When I heard about the rumors I had to snicker. No one beheads G’ork easily. He’s too strong for this to happen and I somehow knew someone was playing a prank to the authorities or so. So in no way it was surprising to see G’ork around and still breathing, with his head where it belonged. Together with G’ork I explored a hideout of some bandits in a valley close to the Thunder Peaks. I have to admit they were very tough and not easy to defeat. It was easy to aim for the half-orcs and bigger bandits but the Halflings were pretty limber and hart to hit, not to mention I never succeeded in knocking them down. I proved that I could handle it though when I had to face them one by one. With G’ork I continued by training there as well. He helped me by knocking them down and left the rest to me. Naturally they clambered back to their feet before I defeated them. It was a nice and entertaining exploration and I am already looking forward to explore even more places with G’ork. G’ork told me I should work on my timing and speed though. Well I won’t learn anything over night and therefore make slow steps but eventually I’ll manage to improve myself. Right now I am looking for a way to leap to my opponent and strike him down, using a moment of surprise. The thing is that I am not that good at hiding and they usually see me so I cannot use that moment anymore. Sneaking up on them got hard over the years as I did not focus on being more stealthy but more deadly with my rapier. I am already practicing on this new technique and I should better ask Angela, my mentor, for some tricks how to manage something like that, given she knows such a technique but I am pretty sure about it. It’ll probably a rough training but I’ll live. I already survived Arngrim’s training and that was hard but hey, I still live, don’t I?
I just wish I had some more True in my pockets so I could purchase a fine rapier made out of adamantium. It is such a balanced and deadly blade but sadly I cannot afford one at the moment. I need to save some money and ask G’ork if he has one for sale. Else I will simply ask one of the guilds which reside in Port Hempstead.
Anyway, I should be on my way to Port Hempstead again and look out for Sallaron. After all G’ork wanted me to leave him a message. Reminds me that G’ork might have a task for me. He did not tell me what it was about but I will certainly do it. Well, we will see...
*With a wicked grin Phyress grabs her stuff and heads out of Dalanthar, towards Hurm.*
-
*With a heavy sigh Phyress enters Port Hempstead and slumps down in a quiet corner where no one will disturb her. She is somewhat pale as she takes out her journal and starts writing a new entry into it.*
-Freas, Novlar 6, 1442-
Before I am writing anything about the rather bad moments in the past few months I want to enlighten myself about a cute elven priest in service of Ilsare. I was merely walking around Port Hempstead in search for any new rumors and gossip while a almost shy looking elven man approached me and ask for some help, after we introduces ourselves. It seemed there was some trouble down in the sewers and despite the stench I agreed helping him. I cannot help it but he was cute so why not be a good girl and help the poor priest of Ilsare? He was no Toranite after all but then I doubt one of those would ever ask for my help. I am probably marked already as a bad person. Anyway, I loved helping the elf called Julius and will help him again if he ever requests my assistance again. Well he got to know I am a mercenary and he doesn’t need to pay for my help. Together we managed to solve the trouble down in the sewers and I had to be on my way again, after saying farewell. I hope he is doing alright. I haven’t heard from him in ages now.
Maybe that’s due to the fact that I have been travelling around with Richelle and her band of mercenaries again for months. I left an expedition on Dregar just to meet Richelle again and then they dragged me off with them. It was a very nice and interesting trip and it was good to see them all again, not to mention to fight beside them. Richelle was very pleased with the progress I made in the meantime we did not see each other and helped me to understand the way of a duelist a bit more. I know I still have to learn quite a lot to become as good as Richelle or Lydia but I know I can do it. I just need more time. After months of travelling around with the band again I left them again as soon as we arrived back in Dalanthar. I hope I will see them all again, as soon as possible. There is still so much I can learn from them all.
Sometimes I ask myself what I am even doing here. Lately I think I am doing a pretty good job screwing my life up. I don’t feel any urge to act certain ways but in the end I simply do what I feel like and in the past few months it never ended in anything good. I am known as a free and independent mercenary. Well maybe not independent as I heavily rely on my friends. Most times there’s one of them around to save my life. I should honor it and return the favor.
However, it all started with an expedition to a cave in the desert on Dregar. I went there all alone and actually it should run smoothly. My tactics were well defined and I knew what to expect in that cave. I wasn’t in the cave for long when I had sight of my enemy, giants in this case. One of them ran towards me, trying to overwhelm me. Everything went fine, until I found myself surrounded by giants and there was no way to escape, or to fight them all at the same time. I cannot really remember but I think I managed to defeat one or two of them until I was heavily wounded, pain aching everywhere. Waiting for the right opportunity I used some stardust which should make me invisible and tried to use the breach I fought to retreat a back and heal my wounds. Even though I was invisible they kept swinging their clubs around aimlessly for me, aiming for the noises I made why I tried to escape their circle. I managed to dodge the one or other blow, until I got heavily hit in my back. A gasp of surprise escaped me as I felt it hit my spine and everything around me turned black. As I woke up again I felt like I lost something very dear to me; something that only belongs to me and defines who I am. I fell and apparently the Soul Mother ripped something off of me. I felt terrible and disorientated when I woke up back on Orcs Watch. I don’t even want to think about how Trouble must have felt when he finally passed away, the feeling that there is no way out anymore. Cruel! I don’t want to think about it. I wouldn’t be able to bear with it. Not yet and I doubt I ever will. I loved him with my soul and someone or something ripped him apart.
The other day started actually nice. While I was around Port Hempstead again I saw Sallaron in front of the bank and I reminded myself that we still had a deal going on. I told him I got everything he requested for the trade and he told me he forgot my necklace somewhere in his house over on Dregar. It was very disappointing but then he showed me a rapier which he wanted to trade. At first I thought he was kidding me when I saw the blade. It was a Silver Foil! I was about to faint, knowing what I saw in front of me and poor Sallaron had no idea what he just offered me. He saw me about to faint and asked me about the blade. Really, he did not know about the Silver Foil. He had it all along and never used it. Certainly, he uses his longswords but he never heard about the Silver Foil. I briefly told him some details about the blade and in the end we settled for a trade. There was no way to refuse that trade. It was a Silver Foil! A very fine and well defined weapon and only masters of said art can make any use of it. Sadly I did not master that blade yet. It takes one quite some training to use such a fine blade. I know Richelle has one of those rapiers as well, even though those are quite rare but then not many are skilled enough to wield them. I don’t either. Such a blade would surely help me to defeat Lydia, yet I doubt I will be able to wield the Silver Foil when I am finally going to face her. Mastering the training with the Silver Foil will take me years from now. The only thing I can do is travelling around and practicing and learning from others about how to wield this blade. For now I should ask G’ork to make and sell me a rapier made of adamantium. I am sure I can train more with that weapon than with my current iron one. Of course, it still works great, yet rapiers made out of adamantium have a better handling and are more balanced. That way I will be able to hit my opponents more accurate.
However, while Sallaron and I were in the bank and I handed him over the first part of his requested goods, shadows flipped from the wall behind us and attacked everyone in the bank. I drew my rapier and together with him I managed to defeat the shadows. The banker called us demon practitioners and rushed out, screaming for the guards. In all this chaos Sallaron managed to escape and left me alone. He really owes me an explanation when I see him again! However, I refused to answer the banker about who he and I were and therefore the he sent the guards after me. Even though I wanted to cooperate they tossed me into jail to my dislike and mumbled something about hanging me for good. Do I really enjoy such a good reputation? Anyway, I managed to get myself out of jail by telling them Sallaron’s name. Did I have any choice? I had nothing to do with all the shadows attacking us and then I don’t like being called a demon practitioner, despite the fact that Sallaron left me all alone in the chaos. Well, I got him all the time he wanted to leave the Port Hempstead. Word now spreads around that Sallaron is wanted for questioning in Port Hempstead. Well really, it was his fault. Don’t deal with demons! Lesson learned! We’ll see how this will turn out in the end.
The other thing which happened just a few days ago is rather sad but I could not help it when it occurred. Maran and I were actually heading down to that spider infested cave in the Silkwood. Naturally we met Fleur on our way down there and we teamed up, like we always do. Despite the poison it was a rather easy trip with no big surprises on our end of the blade, or paws on Maran’s side. My training to improve my knocking down clearly helped us when we had to face those dark and creepy spiders and we did fine. They almost did not have any chance to get to their eight feet again once knocked down. That way I could take advantage of their weak spots and therefore it was easy for Maran and me to defeat them. Naturally I was breathing heavily when we were surrounded by like 15 spiders but in the end we did fine and managed to defeat them all. Somehow it does not seem like the poison affects Maran at all, just like Trouble. I had some real problems with their poison and almost dropped my blade several times, due to a sudden weakness and some cramps I was able to control though. Lesson learned. Poison is bad, unless it serves me and is not used against me.
However, the tragedy started when we were exploring a cave on an isle up on Krashin. I cannot really remember on which isle we were but I know it was like the second trip to that cave for me. From the previous expedition Maran and I knew about the strength of the goblins. Some of them are even riding on spiders, wolves or worgs. We did way better than last time though and they were hardly able to even hit me. I managed to evade almost all of their attacks and landed quite some good hits on them, thanks to G’ork. However I had a hard time to know them down and many times I had to fight them on top of their mounts. It wasn’t all too complicated but the battles surely lasted longer that way. While we were exploring the cave I got to know that Maran and Fleur have a rather odd relationship. I don’t even want to think about what I got to know earlier and just want to forget about it at all. One thing though, it is about dressing up like a caveman or so and I don’t even want to imagine what is happening behind closed doors. I am disgusted at Fleur and Maran. They should keep such things for themselves. Maran would have never said such things but Fleur freely did. That’s not what turned this trip into a total misery though.
We were already on our way back up to the surface when I complained about the spell which makes me even more limber. Maran handed over Fleur a bunch of scrolls to Fleur so she could cast them on me. One of them was Cat’s Grace. The thing is that spells invoked from scrolls don’t last as long as those directly casted from the Al’Noth and therefore left me without grace in most battles down in that cold cave. In such cold regions that spell is very important to me as it keeps me living, seeing my advantage is my dexterity and I can hardly move when I am all frozen, not to mention fighting. It makes me an easy target for any opponent. Apparently telling him to cast a spell on me next time is Maran’s weak point and he was almost at my throat and compared me to a dwarf. Somehow I cannot really stand dwarves right now, seeing how they threaten G’ork with their lies. I trust G’ork and not those dwarves, even though at least one of them is a Rofireinite. The two of us had a heated discussion and it ended with both of us being upset. He said when I am not pleased with what he offers he sees no use to protect me with his spells at all. I told him that would be fine and I won’t take the frontline then. While I love all his wards I cannot live without any grace. I don’t need any strength, seeing my advantage and training heavily rely on my mobility and reflexes. I therefore followed after them and we got attacked. Well not we, but them as I hid myself in the shadows and simply watched them die. Ordinarily I would not do such a thing, especially not to friends or comrades but I felt pushed. He made his point and I made mine. He was not going to give me that spell and I was not holding the frontline. I managed to get out of the cave while I stayed in the shadows. It did not feel alright to just let them die there and I already regret that I just stood around there in the shadows and watched their demise. It was even harder to pass their lifeless bodies and move out on the surface just by myself.
In the end it was the wrong way to show how we depend on each other. They have a hard time without me and I do without them. I should have stepped up and saved them and settle this argument with Maran. But I did not; I am a fool. Maran is probably searching for me already. I can only imagine he will shout the nine hells on me and wish me dead or suffer. I would do the same and already did the same in the past. I am not even sure if Maran will ever forgive me. I don’t really care about Fleur but about Maran. When I asked Fleur about a flame-spell for my blade as we headed down to the spider invested cave she frankly gave me to know that she’s no wandering spell-book. I only asked because Maran got one but I did not and it wasn’t the first time. I frankly gave her to know that I am not able to wield a blade then and simply rolled my eyes. How shall we survive when we don’t work together? If she doesn’t share her wards why should I share my blade? Everyone has a responsibility in a team and there is no “I” in team, after all. The key to survive is to work together. If you don’t want it this way then you are already dead. Trouble always shared his blessings with me, knowing we need each other. He needs my blade and I need his blessings he freely shares with me. I cannot help it but when there is just me and Maran we work way better. As soon as Fleur is around as well things somehow change and not for good. She is not a bad person at all but I just cannot work with her as I do with Maran. Not to mention I hardly know anything about her, nor do we really talk during an exploration or task. She just keeps herself to Maran.
The only thing I know right now is that it will be hard to approach Maran now as I can understand him being pretty much ed about me right now. Well, I am responsible for my actions and I have to live with the consequences, whether I love or hate them. My only hope is that he will forgive me at some point but it will be a very long and hard way to walk. I just hope that at some point he will trust me again. I care for him.
*With a heavy sigh Phyress shuts her journal again and looks up into the darkening sky. While the leans back against the wall the mouths 'I am sorry, Maran’ towards the sky, looking miserable.*
-
*With a slight smile Phyress slumps against a wall and eyes some travelers around the Caesin Docks before she takes out her journal and starts writing a new entry. Actually she starts reading her last one though, seeing she did not write any in ages.*
-Threas, Seplar 5, 1443-
I really should have written this entry so much earlier. It has been almost a full year since the latest entry and so much has happened in the meantime. Not only personal issues, but also things that may affect the world had happened. I managed to screw up my life a few more times but also managed to solve some of my major screw-ups.
I think I better start with the meeting that was held above Haven. While I was wandering around in Port Hempstead I met Storold. While we chatted along he asked me if I wanted to head to Haven as well. Apparently there was some kind of meeting in Haven to discuss an upcoming war. Naturally, seeing I am way too curious from time to time, I came along with Storold. In Haven I saw some old faces but also many new ones. Some I knew from hearing but most were fairly unknown to me. What really was amazing that the Bird Lord of Katia herself, Plenarius, showed up and held the discussion and shared his knowledge about the upcoming war. Before the meeting really started he looked around and said he knew many faces already but some were new to him so naturally I introduced myself to him. Besides me someone else did as well. Either the other ones were asleep or they all met Plenarius before it seems. However, the meeting dealt with the Drachs, some kind of crazy creatures, who are led to march against Mistone sooner or later. This all seems to be related to what happened around Kuhl or so I heard. I have to admit, it was hard for me to understand a thing but of course I am interested about it all. It already affects Belinara and when they come over to Mistone it will affect me as well and I somehow doubt they will be pleased with just parts of Belinara and Mistone. So there were two main things we had to discuss. First was how to deal with the Drachs. We still need to dig for some more information as fighting them will be insane. From what I heard they are very tough opponents and I doubt I could even stand a few seconds against one of them. I’d probably be dead in like one or two hits, given I could dodge or parry any of their blows. The second was about how to prepare our defenses and search for more allies. Rael Kingdom over on Dregar was suggested but frowned up upon some of us. Personally I have no idea about Rael. I only heard from Arngrim that he took over Prantz or so in the Blood-War. Just when we were about to finish our meeting the dark unicorn showed itself up again. First I could not believe my eyes when I saw it but it really exists! First I thought it as just rumors but now I have seen it with my own eyes. Plenarius flew up the cliff and casted some spells on it but from what I got it had like no effect on it. What I got to know about that creature though is that it seems to be powerful evil, or so I heard. However, some of us will go and plan our defenses and some will try to find out more about these Drachs and how to stop them. I will do whatever I can to help them with our defense and tactics. Seeing I don’t know all too much about the Drachs and what is behind them that’s the only thing I can really do to help. I know they will come over by ship. The western coast if I recall right. Maybe I can do something about it. I only know I am all eyes and ears now and pay even more attention to rumors now. There’s got to be something to do after all, doesn’t it? Maybe I will even find some new allies along the way who are willing to support us in the upcoming war. And there will be a war!
After we talked business Plenarius offered those who still stayed above Haven to share the tale about Eon’s betrayal on Katia. It is an old tale and I did not hear it before so I stayed willingly. More than a thousand years ago the one we now know as a goddess, Katia, still travelled across Belinara with her friends. Seems like Belinara never was such a great place but in the end there now blossom some forests which would not without Katia’s efforts in the past. Without Katia there would not be the Kuhl Forest or the Great Forest by now. However, she was betrayed by one of her friends who teamed up with Bloodstone because he promised him all so great power. Really, mages! Seems they all go mad sooner or later and are power obsessed. I would never betray my friends just because of power. That would not be like me, really. Of course I already had some screw ups with Maran which almost made it look like a betrayal as well but that’s another story. However, Katia later travelled around with Rofirein who was already a god and travelled around with her, using a disguise. Too bad I did not get to know how Katia finally became a goddess. But I am sure that’s another story that will be shared by someone sooner or later. Maybe I should ask a priestess of Katia or around her temples. I am sure some of them will freely share the story of her goddess. No one can deny the truth she once walked the lands as a mortal being. But really, it was quite a night and my head hurt afterwards due to all these information I got and then we still need to improve our defenses. Not to mention we still need to find out exactly where they will land when the war begins. I just hope I will have enough time to prepare myself for battle.
Speaking about battle; I was about to drop some things in Haven when I met G’ork in his house. I did not see him for quite some time but he seems to be doing just great. He asked me for another expedition to improve my ways of battle, but he wanted to offer me a job first. Well, his offer was about two jobs in the end. Seeing G’ork does not hold the best reputation around he needs a trustworthy salesperson with a pretty face and he thought about me. I of course accepted as I really owe G’ork something and would have done it anyway because he is a real friend to me. He takes me as I am and we can talk just about everything; or we simply about Toranites. I cannot help it but they still dislike me for their own reasons. I don’t know but I am a nice girl, well most times. Anyway, I accepted his conditions. For every sale I get 25% from the True. I will mainly deal in armors and weapons but I am sure there are some other things lying around in his house which will be for sale as well. I think I really should place a poster in the major market halls and advertise his fine armors and blades. For me being his salesperson I get a better price than others, seeing I work for him and we are business partners. I therefore already places an order for a blade made from adamantium and I am really ready for a new blade and while my old iron one still works fine, the adamantium one has a better balance and handling so I can hit my opponents with more accuracy than now. The second job he offered me is about dealing with information. If I get to know anything about the upcoming war that might be of interest I have to tell him. Depending on how good the information is he will pay me. Seeing I need the information as well it is a great deal and then I love working together with G’ork.
However, after we talked business he asked me about my progress with my training. I told him that I have been quite busy and therefore did not travel around much lately. Therefore he headed to that misted village again in the peaks where he taught me some more things and advised me what to do better. And really, this time I fought way better than last time. Of course I am still no match for G’ork but I proved myself worthy this time. I took down many of our opponents. The dwarfs we faced were pretty silly and ran blindly into my blade. Seeing I improved my technique it was easy for me to knock them down on their behind and hit them where it hurt. And it really did! Well, for them that is. Just the rogues still give me creeps. They use poison as well which pretty much slows me down and makes me an easy target. Luckily G’ork took care about them so I could take care of the others. We worked way better than last time and we finally made our way to the bottom of their hideout. On our way we were once ambushed from behind but we managed. Our ambushers were mainly dwarves so we pretty much knocked them down to the ground and ended their lives. Pretty fast and simple, just the way it should be. As I wrote after the latest trip into their hideout we were almost beaten down. Knowing how it ended last time we knew their tactics and worked something out to defeat them. This time it went all smoothly and we hardly were hit. If course they hit us from time to time but this time I did not think about running for the sake of surviving. G’ork and I both knew what I was capable of and on which of the bandits I should focus. After we took them all down we made our way out again and G’ork went to sleep at the crossroads while I continued my way to Dalanthar. I cannot help it but I enjoy travelling around with G’ork more and more. I am all curious about to which places he will take me next.
A few days later I met Maran again. Maran and two others were just preparing to head into the Ore Hills and he did not mind me along. I did not expect him to even allow me to accompany them but then I am quite skilled with my blade and am a help in any battle, given I don’t pull such a stunt again and abandon my friends and let them die because I was upset. However, the trip went well and after we were out again Maran and I left the dwarves so we could talk and we really had to talk. We both wanted this settled after all. I led Maran to the place where I talked with G’ork a few times as not many head there these days and no one could hear us shouting, if we were going to, seeing the place is in the mountains. Most important to Maran was to know what I really did. If I just left them or if I was watching them dying. As I really care for Maran and Fleur I frankly told him the truth even if it hurt my very soul but I cannot deny the fact that I just stood in a corner and heard how they took their last breath and screams before they died. Yes I betrayed my friends and like Katia Maran and Fleur did not want to believe what happened, but it was the truth. Unlike Eon I cared for my friendship and fought for it and Maran did not want it gone forever as well but then he could not trust me again; not after what I did to him and Fleur. While we were talking it came out it was not so much about him but Fleur. During our talk I found out that at least Maran fell in love with her. Well they really seem to get along just fine and fit together in my opinion. However, Maran gave me a second chance to prove myself. Maran will cast some minor blessings on me so I can work on what I destroyed. Knowing what I did to him I’d die just to show them I still care for them. I only know I will ever abandon them again just because I was upset about a silly scroll! He also told me Fleur was probably to blow me up for what I did but a few weeks after my talk with Maran I met her again and she was all friendly again. She probably still hates me for what I did or maybe Maran talked to her already; I don’t know. But everything seems to be alright for now. Maran and I fought many battles together already and we did fine, even though I did not enjoy all of his blessings but then he is quite skilled and I trust him. I hope he will trust me again in time. I just don’t want to throw away my second chance. I talked about my latest screw-ups with Richelle as well and she told me that if it happens once it is a mistake but if it happens several times then you are seeking for it. I am not such a person, I care for my friends.
While we travelled around in the desert on Dregar we met Julius and Emry. Julius I knew and he is someone I like. Emry though is well, odd if you want to put it that way. While we had a rest in Audira she asked if someone had some scrolls he or she did not need. On my travels I gathered some odds and ends and therefore had some scrolls in a scroll-box which I was willing to trade for or to sell. While I showed her the scrolls Emry got all excited about some boots we found along the way and wanted them so dearly, so dearly she all forgot my scrolls I still showed her. Seeing she was busy otherwise I stuffed my scrolls back into the box and took care of my blade. While we were already on the move again she all of a sudden asked me about my scrolls again. I told her she could have them, depending on the price. I cannot help her but she really thought I was giving her the scrolls for free. I simply showed her the scrolls so she could make her mind up about them. No one ever said anything about handing them over for free. Emry then got all y and called me names and wanted True for her spells. Really, someone get mages. So during the whole trip she was making me bad and calling me names. She even started to annoy Julius at some point. But no, she wanted it her way and I was about to pierce my rapier through her throat for the sake of the whole group so she would shut up. G’ork would have already chopped off her head. I should have done it as well but I played all nice. Ah well she was so proud about countering spells of the shamans that she forgot the others were going to hurt us as well and besides that I told her that I already took care of the shaman and in no way any of those could cast a single spell while I know them down to the sand. She called me names again and I simply ignored her. Seeing she took care about the shamans I thought I should worry more about the other giants while we were invading one of their caves. Therefore the shaman was all hers. Honestly, I did not care much as I can easily dodge any of their spells. Well most of us were burned during the fight and I simply said that I though Emry took care of it. She then had to admit she could not counter their spells every times while I would have been able to “countering” like all of their spells. I made a suggestion about how to proceed with the shamans but she simply ignored it for now. Later she had to admit it was a great idea and was all nice to me again. I frankly told her I do not dislike her or hold any grudge against her but for the sake of the group she should stop her antics and work together. Well, needless to say we all died when we were attacked by another group of giants. It was not our fault but all of our blessings ran out just after we charged ahead and started the fight. Every one of us died and we all returned to Highpass Fort where our journey started. Maran decided to stay in the inn and enjoy the good beds but Julius, Emry and I made our long and exhausting way back to the desert where we got our revenge. Emry can be either a pain or you get along just fine with her and that I do now. Well Maran and Julius thank me for it. I did not start it at all but seeing Emry was in no way going to change anything I stepped forward and did so. It only shows I am better than her anyway. I can behave and play by the rules. Well she did not even notice I slipped the three scrolls into her bag.
On my travels I continued practicing around with the technique I want to master. It still takes me quite some effort to time of leaping towards my opponent, hold the balance in midair and finally knock my opponent down. I only make slow progress there but in the end it will pay off, I am sure. Maran is already impressed by the tricks I do. He just tells me to be careful and not break an ankle or the like but hey, it is me and I love the thrill. I just hope I won’t break anything before I finally master this technique but I will be fine but then there is still so much to learn and it will surely help me if I become more agile and limber. But this also takes some huge effort. Besides that I am waiting for my new blade G’ork is going to craft for me and I am also looking around for a necklace that makes my movements even more graceful.
Some other things also occurred lately in my life. This is also why I should have written at least one new entry a few months ago but then I was too focused on my training and screw-ups so I completely forgot about my journal. However, I bought a license so I could use all the tools in the Crafting Halls. I decided to focus mainly on two things. For one I now make my own poisons. I already told Storold earlier that I don’t shun the use of poison in battle and one can pretty much take advantage of using such tricks. Wizards use the Al’Noth and I use poison and everyone is pleased the way it is, simple as that! Making the poison is actually not that easy and I have to be very careful as I don’t want to poison myself when I extract the poison from venom sacks of some spiders. I don’t craft the poison openly though as it is frowned upon by some others and seeing I already have quite some reputation it won’t benefit me in any way. Really, I sometimes ask myself what is wrong with those Toranites and why they don’t like me at all, especially those Road Wardens I almost reported to their authorities. All I can say is, I make good progress with making those poisons, although I hate getting my ingredients from those cursed spiders. It is tough but I will manage. I always did.
The other thing I started is some tinkering. Mainly I started it so I can make my own tools and traps. Not many craft them and it is also frowned upon by some others, seeing one could break into their houses and steal something. I am no thief after all though. I know some of their tricks and actually I could make my living by stealing things and being a thief but I decided not to. I am a nice girl after all. I don’t steal for a living but sometimes you have to pick a lock or set a trap. However, I thought it was very hard but apparently it is not, seeing I have dexterous fingers and having a smart mind certainly helps as well. Well I told Maran I started tinkering and he was all happy and asked me if I can make him some ring molds as he practices in making rings and jewelry in general. I naturally agreed to and already received a very fine ring which will aid me in hiding from others when I to sneak my way past them. Maran also asked me about some crystal rods as he is becoming more and more skilled in the way of an enchanter. I agreed to that as well, seeing it will aid me with my traps and tools later as well. Besides given both of us become more skilled we could sell the better ones later as enhancements and earn quite some coin with it. I just need some glass and coal so I can try my luck with those crystal rods. Glass is pretty easy for me to make, but then I still need coal for those rods and I cannot mine on my own. Maran already offered his help in making me stronger so I could chop the one or other chunk of coal and then make his rods. It sounds like a great plan and I could really become a merchant after all. A creepy thought but then I am already G’ork’s salesperson.
On another day I found myself traveling in the desert together with Julius. Julius is going to be married to Emry and I already found out that Maran is going to be his best man and he will make everyone laugh. Julius thinks he might slip on his way to hold his speech or so. Anyway, it seems Emry is pregnant already and Julius now has to go through like 2 years of hell caused by a moody Emry. According to my sources she is even more moody these days; poor Julius, really. However, while we travelled along he asked me why I was not bound to anyone and I told him that most men are scared of me or think I am too self-dependant, according to Storold. I cannot help it but I prefer to be independent and do whatever I have to do and I don’t need a man who tells me what to do and obey him. And then I am looking for someone hot. Just most I travel around with are not really pretty. Well most of them are mercenaries or the like so go figure. Just like one day later I agreed to go on a date with Snagnor. I don’t know how it happened but I said yes. Well he had to answer me two questions first. First was about if he is already in a relation. The second was if he is looking for something serious or just having his fun and then saying good-bye. He is not bound to anyone at the moment and looking for something serious. Good for him and he is hot, no doubt about that. I just don’t know if I am ready for a relationship just yet. Trouble’s death was just a few years ago and I still have feelings for him. So well, so much for my misery. Sometimes I ask myself why my life is screwed up most of the time and I don’t really find an answer. It cannot be only my fault, can it? However, there are already rumors about us being a couple and the like and as much as I enjoy rumors, I hate any rumors about me! Well, I bought a new dress already and I am all curious about what locations he chooses for our first date. I just hope I don’t throw everything up. After all Snagnor was there for me when Trouble died but then it was his own fault. Why did he have to tell me about his passing? So well, I don’t know what to expect and right now I am unsure about my feelings towards him. Only future will tell and love always is very unpredictable.
For now I should focus more on my training. I already screwed up too much lately and I don’t want to destroy anything between me and any of my friends. Anyway, we will see.
*Phyress stretches as she drops her quill and ink back into her back and looks at the entry a few more moments before she stuffs it back into her bag and gets ready to leave for Fort Vehl.*
-
*Phyress enters her room with some wine and bread in the Flaming Phoenix in Audira. With a slight smile she opens her journal which already lies on her table and after sipping on the wine she takes out her quill and ink and starts writing a new entry.*
-Mulnari, Decilar 9, 1443-
My tinkering comes along just fine. A month ago I headed into the desert on Mistone to dig up some sand. I need quite an amount of sand for what I have in my mind. Maran gets better and better in enhancing and I can supply him with crystal rods. What I need for those rods though is a lot of sand and some coal. Actually the sand is easy to dig up, but some scorpion actually had a firebomb and they attacked us. I survived, yet my ox had to die with several bags of sand on it already. I decided I could not simply leave without the bags I already filled with sand, seeing I worked several hours for it already. I just had to get out of this desert first. So while I headed out of the desert and towards Haven, Snagnor showed up around the Gulf of Bagira. Together with his help I made it safely to Haven and from there we took the portal to Fort Wayfare. First of all I had to purchase a new ox and after some debating he sold me one for 80 True. Relieved to put the burden back on an ox I went to the craft hall while Snagnor met some friends in Port Hempstead. Knowing the recipe I figured it out pretty fast how to melt the sand to glass. The next thing I needed was coal though. There’s a cave on Alindor where one can find some of it, but it is heavily guarded by some elementals and I did not know if I could head there all alone. Snagnor asked me what my plans were and I told him about a mining trip for coal and he agreed to assist me. Together we easily fought the elementals. When we first faced them I was a little afraid. You don’t see such colossal things every day and I was not too sure if I could even hurt it with my blade. It might have been easier with an axe or some hammer but I only had my rapier and while I am trained with many weapons I still prefer my rapier, my beloved blade. I cannot help it but without me knocking it down I wouldn’t live any longer. The things hit me with a sheer enormity of strength. Together with Snagnor, who encouraged me while I fought, I defeated them though and we were able to start mining. So when we finished we headed for Leringard. Apparently Snagnor is about to open an inn there and therefore he showed me the rooms. It is quite nice but it still needs some women’s touch. I am sure it will become a nice place though. We sat down at one of the fireplaces and we chatted a little and I have to admit he asked me some embarrassing questions like what I thought when he asked me out and the like. Anyway, after our long talk we headed back to Port Hempstead where I made two crystal rods for Maran. At some point he showed up in Port Hempstead and I delivered him the two rods among another box full of molds for his rings. While I waited for him Snagnor already left. He had business to attend to or something similar.
The other day I helped Julius getting some fire opals. I actually met him around Vale and he needed a hand and I happily offered him my help. After all he is hot and a good friend of me. I never headed down into the cave alone but then I love the thrill and I still had Julius with me who could heal and aid me. Besides this is a good way to show him some techniques he might want to learn and maybe it will also help him to improve his technique to knock these giants down. Watching him fighting reminds me a little of myself when I was still young and rather inexperienced with my blade. He misses them a lot when he goes to knock them down, seeing it takes more effort than to simply attack them. But it is worth all the effort because when they are knocked down they are at my height and it is easy for me to reach their weak or softer spots which make it easier to actually defeat them. However, we fared very good and fought the battles easily. I have to admit it took us more than when we travel with Maran as well but we still managed just fine. After we just defeated some giants farther inside the cave, Richelle showed up. Yeah I really mean Richelle, leader of the small band of mercenaries and mentor of me. We hugged each other and were all happy. Of course we were making fun of each other like we usually do and Julius just had to watch us chatting, probably not having a clue what was going on. While we talked we were actually disturbed by a giant but I quickly took care about him. Richelle also admitted that Julius is hot and he really is. So we started teasing him as well and apparently Richelle thought us as a couple. I told her that he was already taken. Richelle did not show up without any reason. She was actually looking for me and there was something she was concerned about. Richelle got word of Tyrith who seems to be around Nel right now. She was in Nel, the town in the northern parts of Alindor where I grew up and spent the first 16 years of my life before I left home together with Celes. Richelle either has no clue what Tyrith is doing there but she asked Richelle for help and when Tyrith asks for help then she is really in deep trouble. She’s tough but she cannot take the world on her own. Maybe she simply got drunk and did something stupid, you never know with her. Right now Richelle is sending word to everyone in our small mercenary group and soon we will head out and see what is going on in Nel. If time permits I am also going to visit my parents if they are still alive and kicking. My father will probably not be around, earning True as a merchant somewhere on Alindor, but my mother should be still around. Anyway, I promised Richelle to be around when we head out to Nel and she told me to bring the cute elf with me as well. She obviously meant Julius and of course I asked him to come along and I know he will help me in this matter even though no one of us has any clue what is going on at all. Richelle will let me know when we head out and I still have to prepare something before I am all set to go. I still need to ask some friends for their help. But just who?
Anyway, I travelled around with G’ork again. The trip was quite interesting again and I certainly learned a lot from him. While we travelled and fought together I tried to leap an attack at my opponent from time to time. Needless to say I failed but I made good progress down there and G’ork was pleased with me. Before we headed down he actually had something for me, covered in cloth. I curiously looked at it but I did not see a thing which was quite annoying as I wanted to know what was hidden in there. He then loosened the cloth on a certain part and guided my hand around it. What I felt was cold metal and leather. I beamed when I realized it had to be the hilt of a blade. Then G’ork unwrapped the something from its cover and now I saw it in all its beauty. It was a rapier made out of adamantium and I thankfully hugged G’ork for making me such a well defined blade. All happy I made some swings and you bet it was a great feeling to wield and even more to swing it around a little, testing the balance and handling of the blade. G’ork truly did a great job on my new rapier and I really owe him now. So while we travelled along I asked him what I owe him for the blade and he simply grinned at me and told me I owe him a favor now. While we fought some bandits in their misted village he told me that he will actually go to the trial for killing that dwarf who threatened him. He only does so because Ami told him to. G’ork also told me that he might need the favor if everything goes bad for him. I nodded and he grunted. I would even help him without the favor, knowing he would do the same for me. I just hope they won’t lock him up or the like. The thing is though while G’ork actually only killed one they made a scene out of it and it now says he killed several. I just hope everything turns out good for G’ork. It not, well then it will be on me to do him a favor and bail him out somehow. Maybe I can request some help from a new “ally”, but more about that later. G’ork also knows about my encounter with Richelle now and he asked me many questions about it. If Tyrith asks us for help then she really got deep into trouble and I am going to help her after all the times we fought together in the small band of mercenaries we are. G’ork offered his help and I said I will let him know when we will leave. Richelle is tough and if G’ork joins us as well nothing can go wrong. At least that’s what I hope. But then Tyrith is pretty strong and she will live until we arrive in Nel.
The other day I travelled around with Maran and Julius again. I actually met them while I was strolling through the desert on Dregar. Of course Maran started teasing me about my upcoming date again and I simply ignored most of it and told him to shut up already. The trip itself went very good and I trained hard to finally manage the new technique but I still had to figure certain things out. I knew I almost had it and only a little piece was missing there. I actually found out that I will succeed in learning such a technique when I don’t focus on knocking them down at the same time. It only made things more and more complicated. Therefore I tried it with the alternations in the desert after Maran and Julius had to attend their own business and I was on my own again. I cannot really recall but I leapt an attack at like five giants and then I finally got it. Actually it was quite easy and had to do with how I wield my blade and leap to my opponent. When I leap at my opponents I am now pretty much defenseless, seeing I can hardly dodge anything in midair and am an easy target that way. But well, mastering that technique is worth all this effort it took me to eventually figure out how to do it right. Even if I cannot knock them down at the same time, I have still an advantage.
Proud with myself I headed back to Mistone. I still had a ring on me G’ork wanted to drop me in his house in Haven. I did as I was told to and went for a walk around Haven afterwards. Usually I don’t see that many adventurers gathering around Haven. Just sometimes when someone plans an expedition into the mines and apparently it was time for another expedition again. Among them was Snagnor. He told me they were heading down for some iron and asked me if I was going to join them as well and of course I wanted to. I just figured out an acrobatic attack and I still have to practice it a lot so I eventually become better and more used to it. Being midair still gives me creeps. If I land I could break an ankle or someone could easily hit me with an axe or the like. One participant of the group was an elf called Razeriem. He also uses a rapier and is very skilled with it, yet he does not know as many tricks as I do and he asked me for some lessons and I told him that I could give him some lessons. Well I saw him fighting later. It is not all too bad but he certainly lacks something. He did not go for their weak spots and got hit many times, although he is very accurate with his aiming but it certainly lacks going for their weak spots. This way he could also defeat his opponents more easily and seeing gnolls are tough and hard to knock down he should have better learned to. I am just glad Lydia taught me such things when she still was my mentor and before she got her knee injured. But then everyone prefers its own way of battle and apparently Razeriem and I fight our battles differently. He seems to be smart so he will probably be more about defense if he learns to foresee their movements and dodge under their blows. It would surely lengthen his lifespan and would save him many bandages. However, he started hitting on me and therefore Snagnor glared over to him from time to time, obviously not liking the situation. Why does everyone think I am hot? I am just your average girl. I am not really good looking but maybe they like me because I differ from your usual girl? But then I scare most men away because I can stand on my own and don’t really need their protection and I am quite capable with my rapier which might add to it. Snagnor is not scared of me though and he actually loves me for being how I am. I only know I won’t change my behavior so others like me more. It simply wouldn’t be me anymore. The trip went just fine and I was able to practice my new technique several times, always ending with the death of my opponents, in this case gnolls.
However, the trip was fine and we made good progress. No one besides Razeriem got hurt a lot and therefore we made our way up to the surface again. Now begins the interesting part about the whole trip. While we ascended we met a stranger. His face was hidden behind a mask and he wielded a greatsword. All in all he did not look like your holy warrior and he was capable of casting powerful spells. If he really wanted to then we would be dead. However, he said something about him using the gnolls for something so they could give him something but now where he saw us he was about to ask us instead. He whole manipulating gnolls and his look made some of us attack him, judging him as evil and whatsoever. I simply stood there and watch them running into his spells which immediately knocked them down. Seeing they could not best him they wanted to listen to him. Apparently he was looking for some crystal which wielded something to ease the pain his master suffered. Needless to say the word master got Daniella and some others again as they thought only evil guys served a master. I tend to disagree there, but then it is just me. Anyway, the crystal was somewhere in the mines and he wanted us to retrieve it. He promised us 5000 True each for its retrieval. Well, I am a mercenary and I did not have anything against helping him. After all 5000 True might be worth a shot. I could still turn around and let it be. Well, like everyone of our group was against helping him had a bad feeling about him and had doubts about his goals. Daniella convinced most of us who still had in mind helping him to let it be. Seeing as I did not say much in the argumentation no one really knew what I was about to do and I simply followed them out. I waited for us to disband and then I sneaked down into the mines again. I knew the gnolls were though so I simply stayed in the shadows and headed to the bottom of the mines. There I had to face the gnolls, seeing they hid it somewhere. It took me quite some effort to take them out as I was hardly able to knock any of them down. In the end I defeated them though and searched for the crystal. I finally found it on a little pedestal and made sure it was not trapped. It was not so I carefully tugged it away and made my way out again.
It did not take him long and the stranger showed up when I reached the surface again. He had a name but I already forgot about it again and I am not too sure it was even his real name. He probably made it up after all. Anyway, he asked me for the crystal and I told him that I found it of course. I handed the crystal over to him and he gave me my reward in return. He also told me that they might consider me for more tasks in the future but then I have no idea who they are and what their motives are. I only know they offered me a job and I fulfilled my contract and retrieved the crystal and I somehow doubt that I will see him ever again. He was about to leave and told me that when I want to get rid of those Toranites then I should simply contact them or if I have another problem. They’d help me but I don’t even want to know what they want in return; probably retrieving something else for the sake of his master. Not that I really care anyway, seeing he won’t show up again. However, I asked him how to even contact me and he handed my over a ring. I was told that I simply need to wear it and they could hear me. It is kind of creepy so for now I don’t wear it but keep it in a small pouch. I am not going to make use of it. Maybe I will need their help though when G’ork’s trial goes bad but that’s another story. Maran knows about my creepy encounter but I did not tell him all the details. He simply told me to stay away from dubious people but hey, it was just a job, wasn’t it? End of story, really! It is not like I have a contract with them and have to take another job from them.
Anyway, right now I am looking for a new dress I can wear on my date with Snagnor or wear it in public, I don’t know yet. Black and red suit me just great but for the date I wanted to try something completely different. I hope such a dress even exists. Reminds me I need to seek Snagnor out again. I asked him if I could purchase some things from him and he made me a good price. I need a necklace which makes me even more limber and an enhancement for the lovely blade G’ork made for me. Also I will attach a new visual to it so it fits my armor. I just hope he is alright and doesn’t ask me about this dubious stranger we met in Haven. I’d hate to lie to him.
*With a slight sigh Phyress leans back into her chair and stretches her arms. She takes another sip from the wine and stuffs her journal back into her back, getting ready for the night.*
-
*Phyress sits at her desk in her old room back in her parent’s house, sipping on her wine Essa made her earlier. With a slight smile she looks around, seeing not much has changed in her years of absence. Phyress takes another slip of wine and starts writing a new entry into her same old journal.*
-Mulnari, Decilar 16, 1444-
It feels strange to be finally home again, or I better say the place I used to call home when I was still young and lived together with my parents. Now it just feels odd to be home again and not much has changed during all these years. My father has to leave in a bit again and my mother is still taking care of the household. Just like me they got older but still restless as always. It is lovely to be back at home but I wish the circumstances would have been better but one cannot always walk the easy way and usually something screws up when I try to. And seeing my father was affected in this trouble around Nel as well it hurts me even more.
But alas, I better start from the beginning. Richelle finally contacted me a few months ago and told me to grab some friends and meet her and Lywn in the inn in Mariner’s Hold. Naturally I asked some of my closest friends to accompany me, seeing Tyrith has a thing for getting herself into deep trouble. Therefore I asked G’ork, Snagnor, Galatea, Iellwen and Julius for their assistance. Well Maran was hiding somewhere in the woods and Julius had to take care of Emry who was still pregnant. So well, the five of us met in the inn and waited for Lywn and Richelle to show up. Actually I did not know Lywn would show up but in the end she did and started hitting on Snagnor as soon as I introduced everyone. I cannot blame her for that as he is hot and quite a temptation. Anyway, a few moments later Richelle showed up and the two of them told us what they got to know in the past few weeks and Lywn did not want to dig too deep into the mud. She probably did something in Nel already and was afraid of landing in a cell next to Tyrith. However, I am quite familiar with Nel and therefore it was on me to find out more about why she was locked up and bail her out, somehow.
As soon as we got to Nel we were questioned by a guard about our desire to enter Nel. Apparently there have been a lot of assaults on incoming and outgoing caravans so people are careful. The attacks seemed to be very well organized and planned, just like all mercenaries and thieves in the surrounding areas teamed up under a leader. From the guard we also got to know that they caught one of the bandits and I am pretty sure that one bandit is actually Tyrith. I have no idea how she could team up with them or if she only was at the wrong place in the wrong time. But they were all happy that they caught her. Being not suspicious in any way we headed straight to the inn, well after Galatea bought some pie from a local farmer. I think I remember her face but I am not all too sure. As soon as we were in the inn I started to listen to all the gossip and rumors which was passed by and it seems like everyone was talking about Tyrith. It has to be Tyrith! What makes things more interesting is that we got to know that Tyrith did not flee with the rest of the bandits but defended a little girl from town from the thieves. So I have no idea what exactly is going on. All I know is that even if Tyrith acts a little headless from time to time, she won’t get herself in such a struggle. All I know is that I came here to bail her out. It does not matter what it might take but we are comrades and Richelle, Lywn and I won’t leave her rot in prison, even less when I heard that she will be moved over to Fort Homestead.
Walking in and talking to her was considered as a bad idea, seeing we just arrived and would have simply attracted others and I did not want that either. So as much as I wanted to get in touch with Tyrith and hear the story from her, it had to wait, unfortunately. I wanted to bail her out and even more only wanted to see her but the others were right; Talking with her would have been too suspicious and the guards could have locked us in as well, think of us as her comrades with the intent to bail her out.
We thought about another option and soon we were thinking about a fake caravan. It is pretty simple actually. We spread rumors about something precious and an outgoing caravan and they will sure jump on us and take our belongings. Snagnor happily started rumors about him as a wealthy man travelling around with an emerald. To be honest, I added that it is my wedding ring, seeing such a thing might be better than a raw emerald. Why else do you show an emerald around? A ring is less suspicious. So well, we were pretty much were topic of the day and soon one of the local merchant company showed up and asked if we were nuts. Maybe we were a little but I was not able to bail Tyrith out at that point so we could at least get rid of the bandits and maybe prove Tyrith’s innocence that way. I wouldn’t know. What made things interesting is that the merchant offered us a caravan for our task, seeing as if we get rid of the bandits we also help him and his business. I added that we need some lesser goods as well as else they will call it a trap and don’t go straight to their hideout but guide is into certain death.
Soon the caravan was set and we made our way out of town. G’ork and I stayed in the shadows while the rest of us guarded the caravan. Guards made sense at that time as like all the caravans were attacked and merchants certainly try not to get their belongings stolen. Galatea, Ell and Snagnor were instructed to fake death after they tried to defend the caravan. It did not take them long and some bandits showed up. The three of them did a great job and I fear Snagnor overdid it. And it hurt to watch him die. It was not a fake death, even though Snagnor is certainly a great actor. There was too much blood around him and he looked way too pale for a fake, not to mention it did not seem like he was breathing anymore. However, G’ork and I followed the remaining mercenaries to their hideout; The other three were right behind us, just in a safe distance as they were not as good as G’ork and I in sneaking after them and if they heard us they’d know they’re being followed and won’t head right back to their hideout. To reach their hideout we had to pass several giants and finally found their hideout, following the river upstream. I tell you we almost got spotted by the giants which would have ended badly for us. They were huge in numbers and we would have attracted too much attention anyway. Anyway, we followed their raft and eventually found an entrance somewhere at the edge of the Wolfswood Forest which let us into a cave.
The cave was dark and filled with traps and locks, just the way I like it. Actually some locks were behind my skills but Galatea did just fine and picked them open. I am just glad that no one had a pixie with them. They might come in handy but think about us who learned such a thing the hard way and by summoning one to pick a lock you give us the feeling we are not needed and not worth the time, especially when they simply summon it and don’t coordinate it with the group. And it is a pity that it did not happen only once. It seems be a mage-thing. I don’t care about their oh-so-useful pixies when someone is around who can pick a lock as well. If I cannot lock it then fine, any help is appreciated but just summoning it if they actually know there is someone skilled in the group is just wrong, at least to me. Anyway, we explored the cave and made our way through several traps and locks until we found the first bandits. I think they felt pretty safe in their hideout, seeing there were not many guards around, just like two at the entrance. Well, at some point Richelle and Lywn showed up and took care of our backs so we could precede our task. I listened to one door and after making sure it would not shriek when we open it I heard some kind of roaring coming from behind it. First I thought there might be some nasty behind it so I told everyone to get ready and made my way in. What I saw in front of me though was nothing the like. It was a wall of fire and behind it we could see a lever. The thing was how to get past it? While the others were discussing use of magic I took a closer look at the wall of fire. It was lighted by oil and the level behind it probably stopped the oil from flowing into the rim. While the others discussed how to get past the fire to the lever and the two doors in the wall behind it I moved back a little, waited for the right moment and ran towards the fire. I know it was a crazy idea but I could manage! At least I hoped so. With all my effort I leaped towards the fire, jumping up into the air, performing a somersault which did not make it any easier and tried to jump high over the burning fire. Under me was certain death but I made it past the wall! Yeah I know it was a crazy idea but I had a lot of practice with such things. Of course I got some burning marks but I did just fine. With pulling the lever the flames slowly faded and the way was free for my comrades. I cannot help it but I love the thrill and then I made it alive. I live and everything is fine. I got past the fire and that’s what was important in this situation, not to mention I could show-off in front of Snagnor. I bet he was clearly impressed. My agility also impressed Maran after all.
However, we now had to face several guards and among them were some mages as well who made it all even trickier with all their spells and I was not able to dodge all of them. But then we managed just fine and defeated our opponents. By the time we did so I tried to figure out how to cause them even more pain with just one hit by landing a precise strike. It is pretty hard but I already know the basics. I just have to try to find a better balance and concentration to land more and even more precise strikes on my opponents. The more we defeated the closer we got to who was behind it all. From one of the bandits we got to know that a so-called Sashka is going to kill us all and what not. Most of what we got was just senseless blabber as he was clearly afraid of death as he had to face us and seeing it was on us whether he lived or died. Well, he died in the end as G’ork took care of him.
Then we headed into a large hall where we finally saw the woman they called Sashka. I did a quick check with Richelle and she never heard about her before. So she pretty much got into this position somehow and was not a well known bandit. Well she might be later. But for now we had to face her and her elite guards. It took us quite some effort to take them down and still heavily breathing we turned to face Sashka who clearly underestimated us and did not think we would make it that far. Well, her mistake. Never underestimate your opponent, even if your opponent is called Phyress Sylphide! It was a tough battle but I learned a lot from her movements. Just like Richelle or me she is some sort of dancer, dodging every single blow, just way better than I am. After some moments we finally managed to take her down and tied her up. Well she broke free when Galatea tried to hold her and went for me but I easily jumped out of her way, spun around and got her in her back.
It turned out that Sashka had nothing to offer in exchange for her freedom so we simply took her with us. Well she offered us her hideout but Richelle and Lywn were already making plans about it. However, together with a tied up Sashka we made our way back to Nel. While we were going for a rest most of our group disbanded. There were only Richelle, Lywn, Sashka and I left. Naturally Sashka was slime and tried to buy her freedom out of our situation, seeing we wanted to bail Tyrith out of jail somehow. Her idea was to let her be taken over to Fort Homestead and assault them on the one bridge they have to pass to get over from Nel to Fort Homestead. She also wanted to show us the best way to leave the Sun Kingdom and the bridge itself. I was tempted to consider her offer but then all of us would be wanted around Nel and I wouldn’t be able to see my parents again and some day they would catch and lock us up. No, thank you. I am not interested to rot some years in jail. There had to be another way, plus Sashka only wanted her own freedom again. If she was free she would harass my family or my friends just to show me she was smarter than I was; and of course as revenge for tracking her down and tying her up. It was an idea if every other plan failed but I was not going to release Sashka to freedom again. Not after the entire struggle we had to get a hold on her. I had an idea but it highly depended on some others as well. I did not have the influence, or contacts to bribe the Rofireinites.
Therefore I told Richelle and Lywn to wait with our prisoner around town and wait for me to show up again. I would manage somehow; I had to. My plan was about to ask the leader of the Purple Moon, the merchant guild which helped us with the fake caravan, for a small favor. But first of all I had to talk with Tyrith. I had to know what exactly she had done and the reasons for her being in jail. But then try to get in touch with Tyrith! They first did not want to go into jail, asking me for my business and the like. I told them kind of the truth, telling them that those bandits hurts one of my dear friends, which was true, seeing as what they did with Snagnor, and I wanted to find out who was behind it at all. That part was a blatant lie but I did not know how else to get past the guard and talk with Tyrith.
It seems she got talked into something silly and they lied to her about their true reasons. Tyrith simply thought it was an exchange of goods but then they attacked the caravan. I have to admit Tyrith is not the brightest but she should have smelled the lie all over it. However, as she saw what was going on she defended a little girl which was going to be hurt by some of the bandits. When reinforcements showed up they left Tyrith alone and fled to their hideout. That’s it. I told Tyrith that I was going to get her out somehow and she had to play along. I told her that she might have to lie about being an investigator for the Purple Moon and she was sent to find out about their leader and location of their hideout. She agreed to that and wished me luck before I had to leave again. It was already late afternoon and she was going to be taken over to Fort Homestead in the next morning so I hurried over to the inn where the guild is located and I quickly found the one in charge. As I met him he was talking with the owner of the inn and asked about how it fared. I told him that I found out about their hideout and also headed inside which made him all curious about whether the mission was successful or not. I frankly told him that it might have been successful and I might have caught the one who was responsible for the attacks on his caravans. He knew I was going for a deal of some sorts and therefore dismissed the other man so we were able to talk in private. The hard thing was to let him benefit from all this. Plan was to trade Tyrith for Sashka, more or less. I was going to hand her over to the guards and he told them that Tyrith worked for him as an investigator. Of course he did not make it easy for me but in the end I persuaded him that he would only benefit from it as everything was well planned. He did not tell the guards about Tyrith earlier as it would have only alarmed the bandits and it would have been hard to track down their hideout and leader. As exchange for his word, seeing he had to lie to authorities, he wanted some kind of contract. Seeing I had no other choice to bail Tyrith out without any struggle we settled down for a contract. Tyrith and I are going to walk as his guards for his caravans or himself for like four to five years.
It was the best thing I could pull out of this situation and he took his time to consider my offer. After moments of waiting we finally settled for the deal. If I cannot make it Richelle and Lywn will take in my position. If we don’t show up he is free to break the contract and send mercenaries after us. This won’t happen though and I already involved Richelle, Lywn and Tyrith into this contract and everything is settled for now. After all we get to see the world and travel for free with the caravan and I might have to visit a ball together with him. So all in all it is all fine for now. I am just curious when he will actually request our “service”.
Anyway, the past few days have been indeed very eventful and I am glad that my parents still have my own bed. It feels good to be home again, even though it feels odd and I won’t stay here for long. I will leave again in a few days and head back to Mistone. I don’t know when I will return to Nel but I know that I will, sooner or later. What is going to happen with me and the Crimson Lily? Honestly, I don’t know yet and I am too tired to think about it right now. Anyway, we will see...
*Phyress giggles slightly as she drops her quill and stretches on her old chair. Moments later she takes her glass of wine and walks out of her room, heading for her mother who is busy preparing dinner for her family.*
-
*Phyress taps her lower lip thoughtfully before she starts writing a new entry into her journal.*
-Wedlar, Febra 4, 1445-
Sometimes things screw up majorly just to fix itself in the end again. I did not hear anything from Del Alo’rion in a very long time but now I did. Actually the circumstances were rather odd and the outcome is not the best either but still worth a shot. Well, right now I am still in Bilkan Castle on Tilmar and wearing my robes of the old roldemian style just because they fit me nicely and everyone else is running around in a kimono anyway; not to mention I have a thing for their dress code anyway. However, what am I even doing here and how did I get here?
It all started in Hurm. I was looking for an opportunity to earn some True as I heard some rumors about an expedition at the docks. Curious as I am I went there of course and found myself among some friends who wanted to join the expedition as well. Everyone was in hurry and a few moments later I already found myself pushed on the small but fast vessel and we set sails. I asked a bit around and I gathered that we were going to meet up with another ship. Well, at least not your typical journey through the rough sea. We made good pace and soon we caught up with the other ship and were pushed over to it, abandoning our small vessel. I was quite confused and even more so when I saw familiar faces on the boat we were pushed over to. Among them were G’ork, Snagnor, Galatea, Sophia, Oma, Ni, Sophia, Ell and some others who I already forgot. It was quite chaotic on deck like they were persecuted or the like. I moved over to G’ork, seeing the casters among us were busy with blowing wind into our sails. He told me that they freed an old man from Del Alo’rion and that they were after them now or something like that. My memory is a little blurry and it was a little chaotic anyway. However, we yet had to escape the ship that was in hot pursuit of us. Well the man was in a bad constitution but was going to talk to us later. In the meantime we had to somehow fasten our vessel and get rid of our persecutors. Seeing the spellcasters were still busy I made my way up to the lookout by climbing up the mast. With all the rain and wind it was kind of hard to do but in the end I managed to climb up and not to fall down. It was pretty rough and I almost slipped and lost balance several times but then it is me. I don’t fall down all too easily and not even on a rough sea under bad conditions. Despite the weather I was able to see the grey silhouette of our persecutors and they were catching up with us; slow but steady.
However, a few moments later the old man, Ebon, wanted to talk to us, seeing he recovered enough to at least brief us into what is going on. I slid down the mast and we all went under deck to hear what is going on. Ebon was clearly in a bad constitution and was steadied by one of his men. He introduced himself as Ebon and had a task for us after he told his story. It turned out that he now is in charge of Del’s merchant guild and that they worked together in the past, before Del got on his little island. Actually they both stranded on the island as they lost their ship in the rough sea and made it to the island more dead than alive. Not that it really matters. Soon they were found by the natives who were curious about the two of them. And while they worked on a raft to leave the isle again, Del spent more and more time with the natives and learned their language. Nothing all too serious but then Del found out that there were two different kinds of crystals on the island. The one had some sort of healing properties and was able to lengthen one’s life while the other one caused one to age. Seems like the natives were all more than hundred years old and that’s pretty old for human beings.
Del being a mage naturally started his research about these two sources. One half of the island, where the natives lived was affected with the extended lifespan and health while the other half was normal. The second crystal dampened its powers somehow or something like that. Del then destroyed the crystals and tossed the shards away. Obsessed about it he tried to bind himself to the life-giving one. Well his ritual failed which resulted in the women on the island were not fertile anymore and their still unborn babies died as well. Pretty nasty stuff and everyone please thank the mage. They always screw up. I mean I screw up my life as well but not in that way! What he has done is unforgiveable and he now tries to get captured women to his island for more children, seeing the women over there are not fertile anymore. While Ebon finally left the island Del stayed with the natives, after he showed off his magic so they would not touch him, and continued his research and it seems that he is now after the shards of the crystal he once smashed. He tracked Ebon down because he had another shard on him. We got to know that Del sent one shard into the Deep and the other one somewhere around the Brech Mountains. He then wanted us to descend into the Great Rift and retrieve the one shard he gave to the dark elves. The Great Rift, I have never been there before and while some of us bargained for a reward I told G’ork that Del will probably pay us more for the shard. I never had the intention to actually hand it over to Del, but to get in touch with him and kick him in his behind. What I find still amusing is that even though Ebon and Del are around the same age, Ebon looks old and grumpy while Del looks like in his twenties. Neat little crystal, really.
We prepared ourselves and soon reached the shore just to ascend to the Darkland Mountains, only to descend into the Great Rift; a creepy place filled with filthy dark elves and other creatures of the Deep. But naturally we first had to fight our way to the Great Rift, seeing we were still persecuted by Del’s men and they reached the shore shortly after us. Therefore we pressed on and made up our way. His men swarmed out and soon we had then behind and in front of us, a fight was so going to come up. It was just a matter of time. His forces were tough but with combined efforts we took them down. G’ork and I were holding the frontline. Well we were like the only fighters in the group. Of course there were others capable of fighting melee like Galatea, Iellwen and Snagnor, but G’ork and I were especially trained for close combat and don’t rely on spells like others do. Of course I love my blessings Maran and others cast on me and I don’t mind their gift to heal my wounds or get rid of poison, but I can still kick my opponents around even without any blessings. I just need my rapier and I am fine. Del’s men attacked in little groups and pretty much kept us busy until we entered the Great Rift. What makes the Rift even trickier is that no magic at all can be casted down there, hence the name Rift. However, also potions don’t seem to work down there which makes it pretty icky, seeing one has to face spiders on descending deeper into the Great Rift. Did we even have a choice? Not really, seeing we were still being persecuted and we could hardly turn around now and therefore we entered the rift. It was pretty much creepy down there and had to face spiders, giants, beetles, umberhulks, beholders and some squishy creatures. Not to mention the deeper we got the tougher it got.
We pressed on and even had to defeat some of our followed who went after us in the Deep. Past those squishy things we had to face deep dwarves and tried to free some of their slaves, gnomes. They were not the brightest and also alarmed the dwarves so we had to continue fighting our way through their lines. How did we even know the way? Well, seems like the shards are able to communicate or something like that so Sophia knew which direction we had to head. If the deep dwarves were not even enough we had to face some very strange creatures, half spiders, half dark elves. I think someone mentioned the name 'Driders’ but I wouldn’t know. All I know is they were tough and it took me quite some effort to defeat even one. Together with G’ork I made good progress though, seeing I could leap at my opponents from behind his back and take advantage of the moment of surprise. G’ork and I did very well, almost working together as a unit. Well we fought many battles together so we already knew what we were capable of and guarded each other’s back. We soon got to face the dark elves and we defeated them as well until we got to a ferry which was guarded by a dark elf as well. Several gnomish slaves were around him as well. He saw Galatea and me and told us that we were early. It took me a moment to realize that it were my amulet and something that Galatea wore that made them recognize us as one of Del’s men. I wish we could have ended it without a fight but Galatea was all ticked and touchy about those deep gnomes that she more or less killed the ferryman in cold rage. At least that’s how it looked like. Later G’ork and I were the same opinion that we might better tie her up as we had to focus on our task and not to run around like mad in the Deep and seek an open conflict with the dark elves. He did not attack us so well.
We sailed farther and finally got to a shore somewhere down in the Deep where we were able to see a tower. Sophia could already say that the shard would be found up there. She looked pretty much drained and whatnot but she was not willing to share what was wrong with her. In front of the tower were two guards and upon seeing Del Alo’rion’s symbol they recognized us and went in to call their superior, researcher, whatever. However, I was all hoping for a nice chat as we could have gotten quite some information of him, seeing he mentioned something like he wasn’t done with the research yet so Del has to wait a little more with the results of the research. Well, I can see he did not like Galatea’s aggressive stand and long story short, in the end we did not get any information about the research of the shard and were attacked by them and their reinforcements. Personally I’d have preferred to get some information if him and also tried to talk him into but he was too focused on Galatea and G’ork who was standing next to her. Seeing how it would end I got ready to leap forward at the researcher and jump on his head. It was a tough fight but in the end we managed and rushed into the tower, just to face even more dark elves. We searched the tower and I found a journal of some sorts. It is all written in their language so I have no idea what it is about. I assume it is about the research more or less, seeing I had to pick a lock to get it. No one else really cared I found a book so I simply stuffed it into my bag. On top of the tower we then found the shard on some kind of an altar and glyphs and whatever fancy mages like was placed and drawn around the altar. Needless to say we defeated them in a long and exhausting battle. Before everyone could even react Snagnor rushed to the altar and grabbed the shard on it. I bet he heard G’ork and me on the ship and really thought we would hand over the shard to Del.
Having everything we were after we only had to make our way out of the rift again. Easier said than done as they were already waiting for us outside and we had to fight our way through them to ascend to the surface again. And the Deep is deep and huge! It is like a world on its own. Once we were out again we ran right into Del’s men who simply waited at the Entrance to the Great Rift for us. One was a fool if you did not expect them waiting there for us. After all we only knew one way out. G’ork and I approached them and I have to mention we were clearly outnumbered. There was no way we were going to make it past them alive. The only possibility was a deal of some sorts and therefore G’ork and I wanted to trade the shard for our lives and naturally some True. I left the talking to G’ork, seeing he is way more threatening than a fragile, innocent looking woman like me. We settled down for our lives and thirty thousand True. A nice sum, plus we were going to stay alive. It was a win-win situation for us. Like hell we were going to give Del this shard. We only wanted to take an advantage out of it. We would have got double pay and also an advantage if we set up an ambush for them, killed them and got the shard back. Given the mage did not teleport out and right to Del, but then it is useless without knowing how the research fared. Snagnor though mistrusted us and was not going to hand it over. The mage casted something at him and Snagnor passed the shard over to Sophia who ported away with it. As soon as she was gone they attacked us with no mercy. I think I don’t need to mention that we all were pretty much dead. I made it somehow though and stopped bleeding to death. When I opened my eyes again I could see with my blurry vision that others taking care of our successors.
I was so ticked off and mad when I was conscious again, cursing loud and vehemently the whole time. It took us quite some effort not to get slaughtered and safe the shard more or less and then Snagnor passed it over to Sophia and neither G’ork nor I knew if she was even trustable or not. Not to mention that everyone besides Snagnor died. He was the one who should have died for this stupidity, not us. Well I did not die as well but I was just lucky. Maybe we should have involved them but they would have never agreed to our plan. In no way they were going to risk the shard over us but we thought our lives as more important as this silly piece of crystal. It did not matter at the moment anyway as they introduced themselves as Ebon’s men and were here to pick us up. Seeing Sophia had the shard and we left with nothing we followed him and I was cursing a little more here and there. They had their ship somewhere at the coast and we also got to know that we had to rescue a woman of Del. Seems she went against him and her men were going after her. It’s not like we had anything else to do so we went after her. Of course we met some of Del’s forces on the way and G’ork didn’t do anything else than watching us fight and I have to admit, I should have done it as well, seeing they let us fall before, not caring about our lives so why should we? I should have done the same thing but then I was too ticked and had to kick someone’s behind. We eventually found her, although all beaten up and it wasn’t me this time. I untied her and told Ebon’s man to carry her to the ship. Task fulfilled.
We sailed over to Bilkan Castle, over on Tilmar. And guess who was waiting the whole time in Bilkan? Sophia. While we died, she simply teleported herself over to Bilkan and enjoyed her life, more or less. Anyway, we still had to retrieve the shard and have a word with Ebon. We found him in the castle and told him what happened and also handed him the shard over. To my surprise Sophia had some parchments about the research or so it seems, written in dark elfish, naturally. With the knowledge in the parchments the next steps for the Bido and Ebon were clear. With joint forces they were going to launch an attack on his island. I told them that they should send in a second, way smaller group who shall go after the crystal or Del himself. Going right after Del might prove difficult as it seems he managed to bind himself to the shard so he is kind of immortal. So first of all we need to destroy the crystal and then go after him. According to what I got to know it is hidden in a cave on the island and probably heavily guarded. I bet by very strong magic. The crystal itself should be easily breakable, knowing G’ork will be with me and if he won’t be around then I will simply bring a hammer, simple as that! The woman I untied will lead us to the cave and accompany me. I am really curious about how this all will end. Well in the end we all received our payment for retrieving the shard and we will get more if we successfully destroy the crystal and turn in Del Alo’rion, preferably alive and not dead.
So that’s why I am still on Tilmar and stroll through the city, looking for something to do while my mind is pacing restlessly. Snagnor’s choice not to hand the shard over and risk all our lives wasn’t the best thing a man can pull on me and G’ork was about to make him one head shorter already. Maybe it is me being selfish but I choose my life over a silly piece of crystal which can also drain your strength! Right now I am still too ed that for now I won’t head with him on our date. Right now I am clearly not in the mood. But at least now I know how Maran and Fleur must have felt when I abandoned them and chose me being upset over their lives. But hey they have nice dresses here and I might buy myself a new one.
Maybe I should better travel around with G’ork and try to forget what happened as we came out of the Great Rift again. Why did you have to pull such a stunt, Snagnor? Why?
*With a miserable sigh Phyress closes her journal and a single tear rolls down her cheek.*
-
*Phyress sits on a tree while she looks at the distant horizon into a warm evening. With a slight smile she takes out her journal and stars writing a new entry into it, whilst sitting in the treetop.*
-Tunar, Apreal 17, 1445-
Sometimes I ask myself whether life loves or hates me. Maybe I only survive all these incidents so life can torture me again. Well, I wouldn’t know, would I? It has been some time after the incident in the Great Rift and I still did not hear any word from Snagnor. I did not know anything from anyone anyway and I am simply trying to improve my skills so I won’t die on Del Alo’rion’s isle which will be filled with natives and some places probably warded by epic spells and traps. Besides that I had to travel back to Nel for some duties. It was not much. I simply had to dress up and look pretty. I had to accompany my business partner of the Purple Moon to some kind of meeting. It was boring and they talked about the recent events which I took care of. He ensured the other merchant that the routes around Nel were safe for now again. Don’t even ask me how I hid my dagger. I’d be embarrassed myself and I am lucky that I did not have to use it. At least I got a drink for free from my most generous business partner. And he only wanted one of us to attend and seeing Tyrith just got out of jail it might not have looked all too good, even though we all lived a lie but we could happily live it and no one cares anyway. Sashka was locked up and I bailed Tyrith out of jail.
After the meeting I headed back to Haven. I still had to check on G’ork’s house and check if there were any orders. Reminds me Julius wanted an iron full-plate later when he had the funds. I already have one or him and he only needs to pick it up. However, I was only passing through Haven as I was headed for Dalanthar and its surroundings. I had to take a walk and think about some things. I headed up to the crossroads at the Thunder Valley where I sometimes sit with G’ork and talk. Unfortunately I did not see him around and reminds me I did not see him around for quite some time now. Well, not since we left Tilmar. However, I caught some fish with my bare hands and it is pretty easy too, actually. I caught two fishes at all and went over to the campfire and roasted them over the fire. While I was still busy with the fish Maran showed up at the crossroad as well and I could not help but grin at him and offer him a fish. He thankfully took the fish and while both of us were munching fish, Mor showed up as well. Maran then had a plan to explore our surroundings and asked whether we preferred trollorcs or bandits. I gave him to know that the bandits were not all too bad, seeing they helped with the defeat of Essrantor. How do I know? Well G’ork led them and he told me of course. However, Fleur showed up as well and Maran was about to test ourselves on the trollorcs. I never saw them before so I did not know what to expect at all. The bandits we could handle but Maran thought the trollorcs as less threatening and so we headed that way. They are truly odd creatures and look like some kind of a crossbreed to me, hence the name trollorcs. All I know is that they hit hard. It was amusing to watch them try to hit Maran who now can change into elementals which quite surprised me, before it saddened me. Trouble used to change into an elemental as well and I miss him so dearly. I know years have passed already but I really should seek Iellwen and her about his death. I think I am ready to hear it, eventually. Anyway, we did fine, despite their brute force and tough skin. Together with Maran I can take almost every opponent, as long as they focus on him and I can sneak up on them. We soon had to head back to the crossroads though, seeing they threw some things at us, like firebombs and some acid stuff. I did not really care as I easily evaded the grenade but the others got hit badly.
I never went without G’ork to the Misted Village. I don’t head here much anyway as they are pretty tough, especially their rogues who go after your tendons and muscles. The dwarves I don’t really mind as they are easy to knock down and then it is going to be easy. The four of us fought well together, even if Mor wasn’t here before and I doubt Fleur was here before either. Maybe with Maran but I somehow doubt it, seeing she is stripped off her magic in the mountains and therefore can only bandage ones wounds and shoot her bolts. We did not head into their hideout so we were only on the surface. It would have been suicide anyway with their masses and narrow places. If they set up a trap and attack you from both sides then well, say your last prayer and tonight. I can hold a few of them but they will slowly get me. Only one has to slip past me and attack me from behind or go after those I guard. Not something I want to think about but it happens from time to time. Anyway, we did fine so far but then one of these cursed rogues got me bad. I lost a lot of blood and my leg hurt badly. I couldn’t really use it anymore and was an easy target for them and of course they got to know it and flanked me. I defeated them though, even though I was bleeding heavily afterwards as they gave me a hard time. I was cursing heavily and it did not help that in a few battles later they got my leg again. I so needed a rest, seeing I was hardly able to walk anymore. I stood upright though and continued fighting even though it took me a lot of discipline. I finally got my rest and I managed to bandage the deep wound properly. I felt better after the rest already and we headed back to the crossroads.
Maran then told us about a place he heard about, called Ruins of Madness. First I laughed about the name but then I did not know what to expect there yet. We only knew the Ruins were somewhere located in the Singing Woods and while we passed through Willows Weep I tried to gather information about the exact location. The only thing I got to know was that we had to make our way past some fairies or the like and then descend somewhere. We saw the fairies and pressed on, looking around for the ruins which we eventually found, too. It is a strange place and all of a sudden we saw the Minotaurs which were living down in the ruins. First I thought this was going to be easy as I fought them before and did not even get like a single scratch. These were different though. Maran casted his stonehold and we charged in. To our surprise their shaman was able to cast quite some powerful spells. We managed to take the other minotaurs down. The problem was the spell it then casted. We found ourselves in a storm of vengeance and I ran out of it. It was pretty darn close and I managed to dodge the lighting and was more or less safe. The others were not all too lucky. The spell got Maran and Mor bad and they died. I managed to rescue Fleur though. We ran out and headed back to Willows Weep where we met Maran and Mor again. Mor decided to take some rest so we accompanied Maran back to the ruins so he could pray at his grave.
After this we headed into the mountains. On our way we met someone I did not see in ages. It was Eslar and well, he was his usual self. I cannot really say I really like him. He is somehow odd. But then he is a wizard and that might explain it. I never feel all too good around them for my very own reasons. However, it was a nice and refreshing trip and way better than those icky ruins. While we were there we also gathered some cherries and I suggested to head to Frindahl and see if the orcs were as tough as G’ork described me them. We soon found the way to Frindahl and prepared ourselves. We had to face two of them; an archer and a fighter. The fighter did not seem to care about Maran’s stonehold and charged ahead. The archer was hold by his spell though. They hit really hard and it took is quite some effort to take it down. It was hard to hit and even I had my problems, not to mention I had to focus on evading its attacks as if it hit, then it hit hard and with brute force. We headed a bit farther the way and faced some more, but in the end we had to turn around and leave. No one of us had a death-wish. Well at least not just yet. To face these we will have to practice way more. These were just the guards. I don’t want to know what to expect in their fortress!
We then decided to head through the Sinister Forest to the old mine which is guarded by trolls, seeing Fleur was in need of some gems. I never was in this cavern before so it was thrilling and exciting. The trolls were not much of a problem for a team like us, but we had to take care of their shamans, seeing they knew some nasty spells and freely wished to hit us hard with these. We did fine though and headed out again. While we were about to rest Eslar killed a boar right in front of Maran’s eyes and you bet, he was not pleased about it at all. They were arguing about it and I did not really care, I’d side with Maran regardless and I have to agree, the death of the boar was senseless in this case. We all were stocked up with food for weeks and the boar was still young and in no way injured or the like.
So well, here I am and reflect the past weeks of my life which were really eventful. I have seen many new places, like the Ruins of Madness or Frindahl and the cave at the river with its vampires, snakes and spiders. The snakes still give me creeps though and I cannot look into their eyes for a long time; it drives me crazy and makes me all confused. But from all these failed expeditions I got to know that I still have a lot to learn. Maybe I should ask Richelle about mentoring me a little so I finally figure out how to improve my precise strikes. If I do it on my own it will be pretty tough and would take too long. I know I am on a good way already but there is still something missing and I don’t know what!
Anyway, we will see. For now I should get off this tree and head into an inn or the like. Oh well, think I will simply rest under the tree. It is warm already and I brought my fur with me. And about Snagnor? I still have no idea, seeing I was interrupted in my thinking at the crossroads. Maybe he wants to talk about it. I will see if he says anything about it the next time we see each other again. Reminds me to seek out Ni. G’ork told me he could help me with translating the journal I found in the Deep into common. What I wonder now though is whether he is a Dark Elf himself or only learned their language. Not that it really matters. We fought together down in the Deep so I can at least trust him enough not to backstab me and G’ork would get to know about it and then he’d be dead anyway.
That’s it! I am done for today. I just hope the next days will be uneventful. I need to stretch my legs a little.
*With a smile on her lips Phyress shuts her journal and looks into the set of the sun from her seat high up in the canopy of the tree.*
-
*Phyress frowns slightly as she opens her journal again, clearly thinking about something. A few moments later she shrugs slightly, opens the journal in her lap and starts writing a new entry.*
-Tunar, Jular 17, 1445-
There are four major things worth mentioning this time. A few things might be good, but then at least one of the news certainly is not. To be honest, it is the only one as two are about latest explorations and adventures while one is about my rapier and ways of battle. Therefore there is only one left and this of course deals with Snagnor.
I just came back from an expedition with Maran from the spider invested cave in the Silkwood Forest. While we headed out Maran had to leave and faded into a tree. Packed with some venom sacks I made my way to Port Hempstead so I could make them into useful poison. I am still trying hard to learn from it but it is not an easy job after all and I have to be very careful not to poison myself. Besides lately I screw the poison up a lot of times when I try to extract it from the venom sacks. I am just glad I am not working with acidic stuff as my tools plus clothing would be so damaged already. Anyway, I entered Port Hempstead and I found Snagnor and some others standing nearby it, chatting. I simply nodded and went inside. Soon Snagnor came in as well and went crafting something. After he was finished, and only then he paid any attention to me. He asked me how I was and I told him I was fine in general. Well in general. Actually after we finished talking my mood turned sour. Snagnor thought that we could pretty much handle them and I gave him to know that we just got out of the Great Rift, were exhausted, and had no magical protection from the Al’Noth, it was very unlikely we could stand them. And I know one thing for sure. If G’ork and I bargain for our lives then a fight is pretty much useless. To us it was a win-win situation. We’d have gotten some money and the crystal back at some point as well. But no, Snagnor had to sacrifice all our very lives for that silly crystal! However, he did not see my point and told me that he died as well, well it was in Nel actually and his only task was to play dead there, not to be dead actually and he was aware of the risk. This time was different though. I don’t know how he sees it but to me it feels like betrayal and that’s something I cannot stand. What he did was silly and overestimating G’ork and me might be charming but silly. I don’t know, but lately a lot people are overestimating me. I am not that good with my blade, really.
This already leads me to the other thing being worth mentioning here in my journal. I finally managed to improve my already precise strikes and therefore hurt my enemies even more. It took me quite some time to figure out how to, but in the end all my training and also Richelle helped me a lot. She did not hesitate to kick me around in the arena for my own sake. I am just glad she did not launch such precise attacks at me directly. We more or less had some dummies. Mind you, our arena is actually the Wolfswood Forest and our dummies just some giants which roam within these woods. Anyway, Richelle showed me more or less my own mistakes I made and told me to practice and improve these so I’d figure out how to land even more precise strikes at my opponents. This being said be disbanded again and I headed out to the Misted Village together with Dan, Fleur and Maran. Everything went quite alright and we made good progress. Maran, Dan and I work just great in the front, as long as Maran stays in his air-elemental form and Dan goes over to hold his stance against the bandits. But hey, I am quite fragile and therefore I prefer to dodge under their attacks. If I get hit then well, it hurts a lot. I simply prefer not to get hit at all and focus more on attacking them while the others keep them occupied. The thing is though that I always pull their attention with the hits I land on them. I cannot help it but my technique is pretty good even though I am not strong, but then I am limber and aim for their weak spots. And this combined with some precise strikes. I think I don’t have to elaborate it even more.
Anyway, we soon left the place again as Dan had business to attend elsewhere and therefore we three of us decided to try the trollorcs yet again. This time we worked a little different. I had to play bait so they’d tossed their little grenades at me. At first it was easy and we managed to take several of them out. They are easy to knock down, mind you. We got in trouble though when we had to face one with long claws attached to it. It was harder to knock down, not to mention tough and it hit us bad. We managed to defeat it though, me still focusing on my precise strikes. Fully bandaged we proceeded and soon found ourselves in deep trouble. And if I say deep trouble then I really mean it! The thing was that we had to face one more of these trollorcs with claws, but when we attacked it, two other helped it. It was a tough battle and in the end we had to flee. Only one we could handle. Two, well maybe if we are lucky but three of them were just suicide! With joined forces we managed them to get loose of our tails and leave that place for now. I am just glad they were not the fastest. One was after me and one after Maran. Maran did not make it though and I was nowhere close to help him. I only got to know from Fleur he did not make it. It took me quite some time and effort to get rid of my persecutor but a few well placed knockdowns did the trick in the end and it gave up. We gathered ourselves and roamed across Dregar and then I finally figured out how to improve my precise strikes. I am just glad I did in the end and after we got to Orcs Watch I fell into a bed in the local inn. I probably slept for more than a full day but it was worth it. While I recovered all my wounds and exhaustion I trained my precise strikes a little more so I don’t do it wrong and I think I mastered it now.
Two more things I have to mention here in my journal. Let me start with an exploration into the Forest of Fogs. Some of us were gathered around Corax Lake and planned our next trip when a druid came out of the woods and asked for our help. Even though there was no payment involved we could keep what we found on our mission so I did not mind at all. It reminds me of the old days with Lydia when we were hunting for treasure on Alindor. However, the druid led us deep into the woods to a hidden grove. In this grove was a huge tree, covered in mists. He told us that it was cursed, seeing a mage once performed a ritual and took a piece of it. Fleur and Mor almost got lulled into sleep by the cursed tree. Our task now was to retrieve the missing branch so the druids could reverse the curse. They could heal those lulled by the tree, but could not lift the curse itself, at least not without the missing branch. He told us that the mage used to live in a keep somewhere in the woods and we headed for it. For the lock we needed a specific key and I never got to see it. Somewhere around the keep we had to face constructs. I might add that the mage was experimenting with constructs and golems and wanted the shard for a living construct or so. While the others were looking for the key, Unther and I headed for the keep itself. Well, one had to get over to it first, seeing one had to cross a deep and wide river first. I jumped over it and almost made it. I jumped too short, got wet but pulled myself to the other side in the end. Unther though fell like a rock into the river, while Dan jumped over easily. Well, Snagnor and I dived after Unther but I somehow lost orientation in the wild waters and was pulled away, until I managed to get up again. Snagnor though did not have it that easy and was later pulled out of the water by Dan, unconscious. Despite a suggestion to wake him up with dwarven farts we managed to get him back to the living without such immense methods and made our way into the keep, which was filled with the remaining guardians of the mage, constructs and golems. Deep inside the keep we found the keep, along with some other things, like a scale of a dragon. Back at the tree we handed the branch over to the druid and he lifted the curse, thanking and blessing us naturally. All in all it was a nice trip and not all too dangerous. Well it actually once was for me, when some golems were firing at us from a lower level and we were up on the wall and no easy way down. I know it was insane but I jumped off the wall and onto the closest golem to dampen my fall. It worked, but then I was surrounded by several constructs and it took me quite some effort to defeat them.
This leads me straightly to my other more creepy expedition. There have been some murders recently in Mariners Hold and Ashley was looking for some help. We had no clue what was going on but we did not have to wait long to hear some a scream from a back alley. The odd thing about these murders was that the inner organs always went missing. Well if it was not odd enough already, some of our group were odd as well, like Marko or justice. Actually I like him though. Seems like a Rofireinite half-giant and not the brightest one but that only adds to his cuteness-factor. I cannot help it but sometimes I am a strange cat. However, we found ring under the body of the working girl which seemed to belong to a local gang here in Mariner’s Hold. Before we actually found the ring we were thinking about how to get more information about the murderers and who is behind it. Seeing all were female I suggested one of us to dress up as a working girl and make some contacts. Bad idea, really bad idea, seeing I was the only woman around, besides Ashley and Argali. Argali is a dwarven lass and Ashley is a local guard so it pretty much left me as the only available woman around and I know some already saw me in a skimpy dress, flirting the hell out of me. It would have been hilarious if I had Justice talked into it but he was sniffing about something and not with us at that time. However, due to the ring we asked around and we soon found one at the docks who of course tried to flee. Our two halflings got him though and from him we got the location of their hideout. I have to admit, I somehow liked their camp or at least they way they guarded it and they attacked us all at once which made things really interesting. They did not make it all too hard for me and I managed to defeat those who faced me easily. Well, Marko died while we attacked them but I don’t really like him anyway. He seems very odd. I bet he’s a Corathite. What was odd about one of the corpses is the simple fact that even though we certainly killed it, it was still living, somehow. At least Ni said so and I trust him enough. Anyway, after a long discussion we burned their camp and took the living corpse with us and handed it over to Ashley who paled at the sight of the body and mumbled something about a cult. Well, we offered our help and she will let us know when she is in need of our help, regarding the cult. Must be some kind of undead or vampire cult I guess. I have no idea what it is all about though. Only time will tell, that’s for sure.
Now where I just mentioned Ni. Earlier I helped him and a friend down in the cave in the Forest of Fogs because his friend died down there. With their help it was easy to reach the location where he fell and they thanked me for it. I also got a fine sapphire which I gave to Maran who will hand it over to Fleur in the end. However, I managed to poke Ni about translating the journal for G’ork and me and he promised me to do so. Later he wanted to talk to me in private. Our talk was about him being a dark elf and I keeping my mouth shut about it. Well, I don’t care about his heritage as long he translates the journal for us. And I also know he won’t backstab me, seeing as G’ork would behead him then and I somehow doubt he is willing to lose his head. We fought together in the Deep already and that is enough trust for now. You never know with dark elves though so I have to keep an eye out on him.
This being said, I still don’t have my copy and now have to leave again to meet the others. We’re going to leave soon to Del Alo’rion’s isle and I still have to arrange some preparations before I head there. This might be my last entry though, depending on how the mission fares. If the next page is blood smeared, well, then happy reading, lucky finder of this note!
*Phyress snickers before she stuffs her journal back into her bag, pats lovingly the hilt of her blades and leaves for Dalanthar to meet up with the others.*
-
*With a slight smile Phyress opens her journal after years again and flips through the old, darkened pages. Every here and then she reads a section. Sometimes she looks rather amused and stifles giggles, sometimes she sighs about what she reads in her old notes. Finally she takes out her same old quill and fresh ink again and starts writing another entry into her journal.*
-Mulnari, Junar 23, 1448-
First off, no, I am not dead. I still feel very alive and can still kick the one or other around in the arena or on a battlefield somewhere on Layonara. I really wanted to write down my thoughts right after I came back from Alo’rion’s hideout. Unfortunately I got more or less busy and a lot of things happened worth being written down as well. Some of them are thrilling, some worrisome, some just nice and sometimes even screwed up, as typical for my life. Let me start though from where I stopped writing into my note last time. And well, no pages are smeared with blood. I still live.
Anyway, we all gathered and planned the final assault on Del Alo’rion’s isle. The mad wizard thought he was safe on it, but nonetheless gathered all his troops of natives. While we were preparing and planning the upcoming battle, Sophia revealed some notes, similar to mine which Ni translated for G’ork and me. The journal pretty much dealt about the research on the crystal which was hidden somewhere on Del’s little island, in a cave, heavily guarded by his men. The journal also mentions that it was also guarded as some natives tried to destroy the crystal several times, seeing it did them no good after what Del did to them for his research, may it have been an accident or not. What he did was unforgiveable. His silly experiments with the crystal caused all women on the isle go infertile. However, the Dark Elves at the tower were trying to focus their shard into some form of weapon. There were positive and negative crystals and they were researching the negative one which caused one to drain life. From what I got they were trying to expand the spell so a huge area was affected and not a single victim. Seeing we killed them when we got the shard, I doubt they will go on with their researches. Not that it was really important anymore, but the journal also revealed some information about the crystal on Del’s little island. The note more or less said that Del Alo’rion managed to bind its powers to him and became almost immortal that way. Wounds heal within seconds and one does not age at all. Explains why Del was still hot looking and Ebon looking like my granddad. If one bound the powers to another person, then Del was going to be bound to it anymore and vulnerable again, although the crystal itself will probably warded against the Al’Noth. The native woman we freed the other day although told us that it will be breakable to physical attacks, like if a dwarf swings his or her axe. Just we needed to get to it first. But well, that’s why we all were gathered. Plan was to land on the island with reinforcement from the bilkanese force and Ebon. While the others hold the line and try to make their way to the center of the isle, it was on us to seek the cave and the crystal within. If we got time we were free to find possible slaves as well and free them. It might give us a little backup and a resistance moving against Del and his men. Oh and then of course to get rid of Del himself, silly me.
We then set sails and sailed to his island. As soon as we got on the island, we were already attacked by some of his troops. We only had to push through their lines and let our allies deal with the rest. Our task was simply to head in, regroup at the center of the isle, at the settlement, find the cave, destroy the crystal by any means and defeat Del Alo’rion. We were not all too many good fighters, but G’ork and I did just fine in the front. G’ork held most of them, but it gave me time to sneak up behind them and take advantage of their less armored spots, like their armpits or knees. We made good progress and I was more or less in charge of our small band. I did not trust some of us, like Balthazar, Sophia’s pet and of course Sophia as well. Galathea might be wise, but sometimes I don’t really agree with her and she loves to rush ahead from time to time. Well, not to mention some don’t want to step up and bear the responsibility about life and death of one’s comrades. I don’t mind though. I can live with it.
At the horizon we saw the tower which was located in the settlement and built upon the cave, but there was also a small path, leading into the mountains and we had to decide which way to take; either straight ahead or trying to find a way around. Well, Del was already expecting us and would have sensed us anyway, but I decided we should head into the mountains first. In the mountains we had to defeat more of his men, but then we spotted a little camp with some imprisoned natives, looking miserable. We charged ahead and defeated their guards. Free of Del’s men, I sent some of the natives, who were going to form a resistance against Del back to the ships with the women. Some were going to join us on our way to the settlement.
I am going to skip all the battles as they are not worth mentioning. We defeated his troops on our way to the settlement and headed into the cave, which was pretty guarded as well and made our way to the crystal. The hall with the crystal was huge, interesting, and deadly. After we killed the guards, the mages started to study the crystal. It clearly was the crystal; even I was able to feel its powers. What made it more or less deadly was the fact that golems were summoned into the hall, constantly. I am just glad we had some time to patch up between the fights. They were rather tough and hard to get through their skin, but leaping at them did the trick. I also managed to kill the one or other with just one single strike. I have to admit, I really grew stronger with my blade and especially with leaping into my opponent. However, while Galathea and Fleur were trying to take care of the wards that prevented us from destroying the crystal, Sophia had her own business in mind and I bluntly asked her what she was doing as she was clearly not working together with us and she told me she was going to bind the crystal to someone else, namely her pet. I told her we were going to destroy the crystal and not binding it to anyone. Well, I did not tell her that I didn’t like to see her pet bound to the stone. She more or less controlled Balthazar and probably would have done anything she wanted him to do. I have to admit I thought about what it would feel like to be almost immortal, but shrugged the thought off again. I don’t know, but it is somehow missing the thrill. Maybe it is because I am slightly addicted to dangerous situations and love when I had a hard battle and stand there almost dead but still alive, my opponent defeated. Not to mention the journal said it would kill someone if the binding went wrong. I pretty much ignored Sophia and focused on protecting those who were going to lift the wards. As soon as we got rid of the wards, we started smashing it to pieces and as far as I noticed, Sophia managed to bind Balthazar to the crystal before we lifted the wards. Every time we hit the crystal, I heard Balthazar whimpering. Not that I really cared about him. He submitted himself to Sophia and has to live with his consequences. No one asked him to be bound to it. I think he also cried when we finally broke the crystal.
However, once the crystal was broken, Del was without its protection and vulnerable again, after all those years of his almost-immortality. We did not have to wait long for him, once we got out and had to face him. He showed up and clearly was not in his best mood. Well go figure, we just destroyed his essence of life and we now had to expect a tough battle. Del was never weak and knew a lot of spells. While the others surrounded him and attacked, I backed off a little and got ready to leap into him, concentrating to kill him with a single attack. I leaped though the air and hit him bad. I hit him really bad! It was like my best attack I ever made but no, Mister Del Alo’rion did not think about dying yet! I only managed to wound him badly. Seeing he was almost dead I wanted the others to stop the insanity and knock him down and tie him up. In the end he was killed though, even though I wanted to spare his life. I don’t really know why I wanted it though, as I felt no sympathy for him. Maybe I simply wanted to see all the natives dancing around him and making funny faces at him. I bet that would really tick him off. However, G’ork landed the final strike on him and he was dead. The battle was over and as soon as his men saw him dead they stopped fighting as well and either retreated or surrendered.
Together with Ebon we made sure he was really dead and started to discuss about what would happen to the island now. After Del was dead chaos might break out and we yet had to find a new leader and I thought about one of the resistance movement, like the woman we freed. She was nice enough and probably made a good leader. Well, not that it really mattered as a native showed up and told us their elder wanted to see us. It turned out they had their leader for the whole time, just hiding on some cliff top, well hidden within a small grove in the mountains. He wanted to know what we were going to do with the island, now where we freed the isle. He was afraid we were going to claim it as ours and first did not believe us we were going to leave the island and leave all their affairs to themselves. Del Alo’rion was dead and my job was done here. As amusing as it sounds, I don’t want a bunch of natives worshipping me as their all great leader. I am not that bad. Before we departed though, the elder handed each of us a shard of the crystal and told us it still had a little of its original powers left and might aid us on our further travels across Layonara. I thankfully accepted the shard and after a few more moments of saying farewell we sailed back to Bilkan. It did not surprise me Sophia kept herself silent after we were out of the cave again and did not really say a single word. After all her little plan with Balthazar failed. Only the gods know what she was after and I somehow doubt we’d have benefited from her goals. I only know I cannot trust Sophia. I did not before, but now I mistrust her even more. However, I am just glad I can close the chapter about Del Alo’rion now. I would have loved to find a little more out about him, but it is too late now and not really that important. I really have more urgent things to worry about.
Well, just a little later I already found myself in another adventure, yet again. This time it was at least a little warmer, as it dealt in the desert on Mistone, the Spirit Dunes. It all started in Spellgard, where I had to do some errands and met some other adventurers as well. Apparently the Aragenites sent someone to Spellgard to recruits some brave adventurers to retrieve a book for them. It was somewhere hidden in the desert and some archeologists were already trying to recover it and made camp for some excavations. After we all agreed on a little payment for our services, those who were willing to come along, headed out into the desert with me. I had the map so I was in charge again. I cannot help it, but some other adventurers don’t mind me leading or being in charge and chose me over others. Well, maybe not those Road Wardens and I am glad I did not see them around in ages. Anyway, after an exhausting trip we finally made it to their camp and were introduced to the archeologists. They found two interesting places and we were shown around. The first one was rather odd. It was a chamber with some strange portal of some sorts, or better say barrier. We did not know what it did, but it felt strange and we were told not to touch it. Well, someone tried to throw something into it and it exploded above our heads.
The other place they wanted to show us was not accessible yet. It was after an hour though and together with the archeologists we entered into this chamber as well. In it we had to take care some rats and right before the final chamber we had to defeat a tough bug. As far as I got to know they are called scarabs. All I can say is they hit hard and it is hard to pierce though their shell. The best way to defeat those is to parry its blows while your comrades try hitting it in the meantime. I am just glad I had exceptional training in parrying incoming blows so I was most suited for the task. But well, don’t listen to me. I told them about the dangers and they still did not let that bug focus on me. If they love pain then sure, let them all try to hit it. Those things are fierce and not to be taken easily. We got to a sarcophagus and we got to know Pen’Phall was buried here. Perfect, the one who had the book we were after somewhere with him. Just too bad all the things were locked and trapped and they did not want us to touch it. Speaking of not touching anything. They told us not to touch anything before they did not take a look at it first. And no, this was not about traps or locks, but about what was inside. We were the first in this chambers since they were sealed and therefore the archeologists wanted to document everything. Still did not stop some, like Galathea, to open the one or other sarcophagus and take what they found. I honestly expected them to be cursed by doing so, but sadly nothing happened and she got pretty much upset about me telling her not to open anything, as we were told so. The archeologists hired us and we have to meet their conditions. They could have simply dismissed Galathea or so, really. I don’t know, but lately she behaves more or less y and I don’t get all too good together with her these days. I have no idea why though. I did not change, but she did. But well, if she loves digging around in the rotten remains of others I won’t stop her. It just does not make a good leader or a honorable mercenary. Yeah I know, a honorable mercenary is like saying a shaved dwarf is the only real dwarf around, but they exist, like Richelle, Lydia and Arngrim.
Anyway, we decided not to open his sarcophagus for now and rest first. In the morning we were going to find out more. Something did not feel right about the archeologists though, or some of them and Caerwyn and I were discussing things while the others rested. We came to the conclusion we had to find out more about them and their intentions. Therefore I had to talk Raz into making out with the woman who contracted us and was in the camp as well. I only had to flirt a little with him and he was all ears. I only had to promise him a date and a real kiss. Well I don’t think I will keep my word. As nice as he is, I am not interested in someone who is hitting on almost every woman, although I have to admit he got a cute behind. It did not take him long and he came back to Caerwyn and me. Seems like the girl had no clue about anything. While we three were still talking about their motives something happened and we all could feel the shift in the air and it was like a sandstorm was about to start forming. Everyone was at the camp, except for Costello. Having a bad feeling about this we headed into Pen’Phall’s chamber and to our surprise we had to face some mummies and other undead creatures. We pressed on and soon found Costello flat on the ground, dead. And you wonder what caused this? Well, he felt like freeing Pen’Phall who showed up as well and we clearly now knew what to do. Somehow we had to put him back to rest. I don’t know where we found it, or who or how, but we had a special necklace he seemed to be interested in. We found that out later but I don’t really recall every single detail. All I knew is we had to get out of here and destroy what Costello set free before anyone was going to suffer of it. The thing was though, he was not destroyable. When he was killed he turned to sand, just to form somewhere else again.
An idea was to lure him into the barrier. Well it was Galathea’s idea, more or less. I was not too keen on the idea and was all for destroying the necklace as he seemed to be in dire need for it. Just toss it in into the portal and then go after him. I bet you he was somehow bound to it. However, Pen showed up in the chamber and Galathea tossed me a rope. Not telling us any plan but simply commanding me to pull the rope if she says so. I told her I simply won’t do it, which ticked her a little off again. I don’t mind obeying, but please involve me into a plan, right? If someone asks you to jump off a cliff you ask 'what for?’ as well, right? If you don’t, well then it is your own fault if you find yourself dead a few moments after you actually jump down the cliff into your doom. Obviously her plan failed as no one wanted to pull it without knowing what she was going to do. It turned out she wanted to grab Pen’Phall behind the barrier, then we had to pull the robe so they both would get into the barrier. I still think it was a bad and not well thought of plan. As soon as the rope would have touched the barrier it would have faded. How to pull anything without a rope? Besides I think Pen probably set it up himself and was kind of immune to its effects. He was undead after all. We only tried objects, no undead or living things. I think for the rest of the adventure I more or less ignored Galathea and her silly plans. My plans work at least. At least they usually do. No one complained so far.
Long story short, we all finally agreed on destroying the amulet and oh wonder, it worked wonders and could have saved us a lot of trouble. This all happened after we chased Pen through a whole crypt with masses of undead which we killed on the way and with every passed moment Pen’Phall grew stronger. Once out we destroyed the necklace and we all saw a nice, but huge dark cloud forming somewhere over the desert. It was an easy guess Pen was hiding there and gathering his forces. So we headed there and defeated anyone who wanted to mess with us and gladly they were now listening to my tactics. Well, most times and I screwed up one time as well, I have to admit. All of a sudden there were two constructs in front of us and I leapt into the first one, killing it in one strike. After I landed on its head I aimed straight for the second one. Sadly Raz moved right into my way as I already had my blade aimed at the construct and pierced right through his very heart. The moment I saw my blade covered with his blood he was dead and I felt miserable. It was all too quick and no one really noticed he fell to my blade. He did not even realize he fell to my very own blade which should have killed the construct. Razeriem fell three times on the exploration. The first was to some undead in the chamber. The second was my fault and shortly after he fell to one of those tricky scarabs I all warned them about. With the right tactic one can defeat them more or less easily, but if you are not good at dodging or blocking their blows, well then you are dead already and Raz has an affinity to die fast. After the third time he did not come back and we had to move on without him and I still felt sorry for him.
But in the end we had to face Pen’Phall and some of his minions who were going to suffer. Raz already suffered enough and now it was time to stop a mad mummy who was probably going to reanimate his legions to rule and conquer the world. While I took care it focused on me, the others hit it with fire and whatever came in handy. In the end Pen’Phall fell and did not turn to dust, just everything around us was to collapse and we had to make our way of this place again, as fast as possible. At least we managed to retrieve the book and were got our reward handed out. As much as I like Galathea, she was really ticking me off on this exploration. It almost felt like she thought she was better than all us together and we needed her. We might have needed her, but not her silly plans. At least that’s how I think about it. She just needs to think a little more from time to time before acting or at least involve others to her plans.
This leads my directly to a rather unpleasant event. Out of curiosity I headed to Audira on Dregar and I was curious about the Mercy Seat. Well, or let’s say the prisoner had a last plea but no one took care about it and I and some others went to listen to him. Whether the story he told us was true or not is not really that much of a matter here. He did several crimes Audira and was finally caught and was going to die on the Mercy Seat. It is pretty simple. One gets tied up on a seat made of stone and thrown into the water from a boat. A nice, drowning death and good for the masses. It was like market day over in Audira. Everyone around wanted to witness this act, as the Mercy Seat was reserved for only the most wanted and most evil bandits, such as the man who was going to die now. And well, such a thing does not happen all too often.
Seems like not everyone wanted to see him dead though, as an impact shocked everyone around. And it only just started. There was going to be a series of impacts, like five or six and we only just got to know about them. The things looked like gems, get hot and then explode and leave a real mess. Actually some of us received notes and had the opportunity to prevent those impacts. And yes, I say we had and we’d have managed better if people stopped trying to play hero and get down and share their information with us. We’d have been way more effective that way but no, they wanted to have it their way and then I was also accused of being a killer. A mercenary called 'Steel’ called G’ork, Ni and me killers. Really, how nice is that? He does not know a thing about me and calls me a killer? Really, I thought better of him. Maybe it is just those evil Toranites or Rofireinites spreading false rumors about me and he actually believed them. I am just a mercenary after all and no killer at all. What’s next? Me being accused of impacts or murder on citizens? Really. Well what to say? Because they all felt better like us not so well known adventurers we failed. We were only able to prevent half of the impacts and the condemned one managed to escape in the chaos, just as I and some others assumed right after the first impact but no, don’t listen to us. Really.
At least the other expedition I went to went better. I was just standing around at Corax Lake with some other adventurers, planning on where to head next as two citizens showed up. Apparently they hailed from Thorn. Well not really Thorn as that was taken by giants, but they used to live there. I can tell as I was there when we were not able to hold the town against all those furious giants a few years ago because some of the citizens murdered some giant offspring. Being there I knew what it all was about and rubbed that fact in a little just to let them know I was very aware about what dangers we’d have to face if we agreed on their conditions. They did not offer us much True but in fact the remaining citizens lost almost everything when they had to flee. I don’t know why but I agreed on helping them out, yet again. Seeing I knew where Thorn was located and was very well aware about its history and the giants itself I once already had to fight back in Thorn, I was more or less on charge of the group. I rather take the opportunity and lead a group and following senseless commands of a wannabe-commander who leads his troops to certain death. Well, we made good progress and found ourselves soon deep within the Forest of Fogs and close to Thorn itself, when we saw a ranger guarding the woods. He told us to be careful and also gave us some insight about how it looked around Thorn right now. Apparently there were two tribes and more or less hostile to each other. The one moved into the town itself while the other one lived in a grove close to Thorn. We now only had to face one tribe, but two. The thing was, even so they were not at the best terms, according to the ranger, they’d still aid each other in case of an assault on one of them, all being giants after all. So the trick was how to make sure they don’t attack us if we attack them let them do all the work. While some of us already rushed into town, a few of us remained and discussed how to proceed. We came to an agreement that one of us has to go to the giants in the grove, accept a major beat down and then try to bargain with them so they won’t attack us, or even help us. Even though I’d have liked to head there on my own, I sent Essa. I trusted her enough and I know I could count on her. And I wanted her to face them alone. There more we were the more we were considered as a threat and that would be counter-productive.
However, I left Essa after wishing her luck and joined the others to launch an attack at the town while she kept the other tribe busy. The town was really invested with giants and it took us some time to get through their lines. I focused on the archers and leaped into them, taking them down as fast as possible. We then fought our way to the center where we faced more and more powerful giants and we all of a sudden heard a loud roar echoing through the whole town. It was about time their leader showed up. To my disappointment it was a rather short fight and their shaman went down within a few seconds. Maybe due to the fact that I successfully leaped into it and caused a serious cut. As soon as the other giants were away we defeated their leader they disbanded again and left to the forest. In all the chaos we met Essa again who was going to collect the head of the leader and hand it over to the other tribe. It was the right decision to send her in, She surely did a great job and I still doubt we were able to stand two tribes attacking us at the same time. We therefore left towards Corax Lake again to meet the couple from Thorn again who first did not believe us Thorn was now a giant-free-zone again. We got paid and disbanded again.
I am just glad that I managed to survive all these trips and did not screw up my life even more. I know I used to do it a lot more often in the past and I still do from time to time, but I somehow improved. I still miss Snagnor badly and I think I want him back. He still owes me a date after all. The last time I met him around Port Hempstead though, he was more or less ignoring me. Maybe I hurt him as much as he hurt me, I wouldn’t know.
However, I know got my very own apprentice. At first I had my doubts about him and even more him being my apprentice in the arts of the rapier, but he managed to surprise me a little. I was merely sitting at the Crossroads between Port Hempstead and Fort Vehl when a cloaked man showed up and asked me if I would be the Phyress he heard about from a friend. Apparently his friend was impressed by my skill with the blade and recommended me to him. I never heard the name of his friend but well, I think there are several rumors about me anyway. He asked me if I’d agree on teaching him the way of a duelist and I accepted. I do this for various reasons. He is a Tiefling and therefore I might have some contacts to some more dubious people through him. Not that I’d make any use of it just yet, but it is always good to know the right people when you are in trouble and I won’t beg to any Toranite to help me out of a screwed up situation. The other thing is he pays me in pies and what he does not know yet; he is going to owe me a favor. Besides that I feel proud of someone recommending me as a mentor due to my skill with the blade. I still have to keep an eye out on him though. As I did not know if I could trust him, I told him we will start our training another time. He nodded and left again after saying farewell.
We soon met again in the arena where I first wanted to see what he was already able to do with his blade and asked for a fight with him. Just him against me and I chose my Silver Foil for this battle. The duel began and he threw a darkness spell after me, as predicted. He was a thief and knew his way around. Most Tieflings earn their True as rogues as they are stealthy and very agile on their feet. However, my senses are still very keen and don’t have to rely on my eyes when I am blinded. I trained hard enough to be able to even fight blindfolded and he clearly was not aware of it. The darkness did him no good but me. I was able to sense where he was, which way he was going to take to get into my back so I patiently waited till he was right behind me. I spun around and knocked him down. He got up to his feet again and ran. But it was too late. I already had my blade in his spine and he flat on the ground. I know how to fight in the darkness and use ones weaknesses as my advantage. Lydia showed me around and I learned a lot from her when I was still young and naïve.
Well, after a little rest to recover and reflect the duel we started our first lesson. It was more or less about showing him what a duelist is going to be capable of, given he or she spends a lot of effort, sweat and blood into training. It is not an easy way; at least it was never to me. I let him fight on a dummy and while he did not do badly, he clearly did not fight as a duelist. His movements were too slow and did not pay attention on counter moves and to dodge any incoming blows. A fight is like a dance to me. It is elegant and one has to be nimble. If I don’t make graceful movements everyone will laugh about me and I could trip! Do I want that? I somehow doubt it. Do I want to get beaten down in a battle? I doubt it either so go figure.
While I was still showing him the basics of what it meant to become a duelist when a man showed up in the arena and was looking for some trouble. He asked the hostess if there were some fighter around and she pointed to me. I stood at the entrance to the dueling arena, hip cocked. He simply laughed at me and let us know woman were only good at keeping the fire going and cooking while fighting was reserved to the man of his tribe. He looked rather brutish and wielded a greataxe. I told him that if he did not want to fight me, he could still fight my apprentice and Nimo was about to faint. Nimo was just starting to become a fighter and now I tossed him to a tough fighter with a big axe. Well it gave me at least some time to study his movements and reactions when he had to dodge his swings. The fight did not last long though and Nimo did not land a single hit on him. I have to mention he managed to dodge the one or other blow though, even though he still fell in the end. The man clearly blamed it all on me and I told him he should fight against me then and he simply laughed at me again. I provoked him a little by calling him chicken and he was afraid of facing a woman as he could not beat one in a duel and finally he agreed on having a nice little duel with me. Having studied him before I knew he was skilled with his axe and if he hit me it would cause quite some wounds. To prevent it I focused on parrying his incoming blows and performing riposte attacks. It was a thrilling battle and I felt adrenaline rushing me. It was the best duel in ages and he managed to hit me a few times when he got through my defense. While he worked on an offensive tactic, I worked passive and let him show me his weak spots, where I then aimed for. In the end I took him down with just some minor scratches and a cut on my left flank.
First he did not realize what happened when I stood above him, my rapier at his throat. He learned his lesson though. Women are not only good for cooking, but fighting as well. While we are not that strong, at least I am not and I am thankful for that, we are usually nimble on our feet and know our ways around. A little later Ni showed up as well and I still promised him to test his golem. It was a thrilling fight as the golem was too fast for me and I was hardly able to pierce through its armor. A rapier just does not work that good against constructs. Point taken. However, Nimo and I agreed to meet son again for his second lesson. Oddly though, he did not send word to me about another session yet though.
I also had time for my own training during all these years and managed to improve my acrobatic attack. As I wrote earlier I was never able to know them down and my attacks were never really that precise. Well, I do better now, even though I don’t cut as deep with a single hit than before. But now I can knock them down more effectively if I successfully leap at an opponent and it is very potent as they have to try to get out of my way and not holding up against my attack which is lovely. A good fighter has a good discipline and is hard to knock down, but they are not very quick on their feet and therefore there reflexes to evade something more or less miserable. I use this as an advantage when leaping into them. I perform such an acrobatic attack faster now and therefore harder to hit, although I am still an easy target as I cannot dodge any incoming blows in midair, still. As a sidenote, my own reflexes improved much and now can evade almost anything. At least this goes for most elemental spells. I still cannot dodge a blizzard but I never saw anyone managing it. I used to travel a lot around on Belinara, fighting giants, kobolds, and some humans in Sharawood. All in all I did fine and improved my skill with the blade. I am getting better and better. No way I can face such opponents on my own, but I have friends who I accompany every here and there, like when I headed with Sein to Sadinia. We worked great together and made our way through the lines of some orcs while we explored a cave we never saw before. To be honest, it was the first time for me on elven territory and it looked lovely. Maybe I should retire there when I am old and grumpy.
Well, I finally settled down for names for two of my blades. My usual blade is now called 'Wrath of the Maiden’ and my Silver Foil now bears the name 'Maiden’s Favor’. I really love my blades and given them a blade only shows how much I really love them. I mean really, would you give your favorite dress a name? The names suit them just fine and I like them.
What I liked too was the prank Jaelle and I pulled on Maran. Maran was eager to show me those firegiants up in the mountains around Fort Gorge on Belinara. In Fort Gorge we met Jaelle who warned us about the giants as they’d be very strong and hard to take down. I did not see Jaelle in ages and apparently we had a lot to talk about and Maran headed back to Miritrix already. Jaelle and I talked about Trouble, my old wound and news in general. Somehow she and Maran don’t get along all too well for whatever reason. I think Maran told me about it but I am afraid I already forgot about it again. I think it was a minor thing anyway and not of importance. However, Jaelle had the idea to act like she and I were a couple and show it off in front of Maran. I have to admit I loved the idea. Before we headed back to Fort Miritrix she asked me how much I was going to endure. If it was just saying, hugging or even kissing. Acting so was not really a problem. Hugging? Well I hug Richelle and Lywn as well so that was no problem at all but kissing? I never kissed another woman before and I first had my doubts I would be able to make it but without showing affection by kissing Maran probably would have called the whole thing a fake. In fact it was. Well, back in Fort Miritrix we had to kiss in front of Maran and Fleur. All I can say is Jaelle is a great kisser and to my surprise I enjoyed it. Jaelle is an adorable person and I get along with her just fine and no, I am still not interested in woman, even though there were rumors about it shortly after and Maran teasing me about it. All in all it was great fun and a good laugh, now where I think about it. I just wonder what Alatriel now thinks about me. She seems not to be all too keen on Jaelle but that’s something between them and none of my business at all.
I earlier already mentioned some see me as a leader of some sorts. Well, the other day I was sitting around the memorial in Port Hempstead when the Bird Lord of Katia, Plenarius, sat down next to me. Apparently he was waiting for some Halfling to show up and while he waited the two of us chatted a little and yes, he still remembered my name from the one meeting in Haven where all these brave adventurers discussed the upcoming war. Plenarius and I talked about many things and a lot of them were around the past and Layonara itself and I also asked him some questions about godhood, seeing Katia once was walking the lands, as well as some others did, apparently. He surely knows a lot and we also talked about more ancient lore, like the To’eflor and the Lumbral. I only heard rumors about them but Plenarius enlightened me a little about them.
As much as enjoying all this talking with Plenarius was, we soon got to talk about the upcoming war and it won’t be easy. Right now it seems they are waiting for some sort of sign on the night sky, much like a certain constellation but he was not too sure about it. It could be anything, really. We also got to know about leadership during the upcoming war and it seems like they are still lacking some people to command their troops and well, he asked me if I was interested. As lovely as such an offer might sound; one has to think about it as you hold a lot of responsibility and then life of others depends on your decisions. It is tough but I think I can do it and said yes. If I get to know more about the war I will have to tell him. Thinking about it, he never sent me word again about the leadership. I wonder if the offer still stands or if he got doubts about me leading troops in the upcoming war. My reputation can’t be that bad and he said it himself; he heard I was a good leader! So right now I have no idea about the whole leadership. I talked to Maran about it and he told me he wouldn’t do it. Well, he wouldn’t aid in this war, unless they reach the woods but then he is going to help me as good as he can. He does not want me to fail either. If Plenarius still wants to see me as a leader in the war, then I will head his call and kick some behinds around. I really think, no, I know I can do it.
The other day I was organizing a little exploration up in the mountains close to Fort Vehl. I always forget the name as I don’t travel there all too often. Together with Storold and Amanda I was heading to the giant fortress very up in said mountains. As the trip was very exhausting we stopped by in Lyn where we also met some other adventurers, like Caerwyn and Ni. There were more but I already forgot their names. Some of them were pretty young and I wonder how they made their way up to Lyn as it can be dangerous with the ogres. Their shamans know some deadly spells. While we were warming up a person hurried into the inn and was babbling something about a murder in Lyn and we promised that person to look at it. The scene was really a mess and I don’t really want to get into details here. All I can say is that a wolf was involved and some others were still missing. While we performed our researches we found a body and a head, I know, not a nice sight either and it seemed like a werecreature, such as a werewolf, was involved in this. Caerwyn and I found out about the whereabouts of a possible suspect who was interested in one of the kidnapped or dead girls and went there together with the others. I stayed outside of the house though. To be more precise, I climbed up on the roof of the house and guarded the frontdoor, in case anything went wrong and that wolf came out of the house about to kill us all. I am nimble and know some tricks. It’d have been an easy one to fall into its back and knock it down so the others could tie it up. I did not have to though. All of a sudden there were shouts and sounds of a battle coming out of the house and were soon gone. The suspect was really the creature and was responsible for all those murders around Lyn. The problems around Lyn were solved, but the main problem still remains. He got infected somewhere and that creature is probably still running around happily. Not that it really matters to me. My job in Lyn was done and I have no interest in chasing after another creature, not to mention try to track it down, find its hideout and the like. I leave that to others. If Caerwyn or someone else is going to need my help, I will happily tag along and help as good as I can. I get along with Caerwyn just fine and we cover each other’s back in critical moments. I am really looking forward to work with him together, yet again.
However, I think this pretty much sums up the most important things which occurred to me in the past three years and I am really curious about what will still happen. I never thought my life was going to be that busy, really. Anyway, we’ll see. Only time can tell.
*With a smile on her lips Phyress closes her very own journal and leans back on her chair, taking a sip of wine, before she stands up and puts her journal back into her bag and leaves her room at the inn.*
-
*With a slight smile on her lips Phyress opens her journal yet again and starts writing a new entry on a yet blank page. From time to time the takes a sip from her wine, while she sits at her old room in her parent’s house. Her rapier and a strange looking cloak lying on her bed.*
-Mulnari, Seplar 2, 1448-
It is quite odd. Every time I head to Nel something bad happens around me or those I know. Well, at least I can now spend a few days in Nel with my parents and don’t worry about anything, for now. Soon I will have to head back to Mistone and will probably be involved in the one or other trouble, yet again. But why am I back in Nel now? Well, long story...
I was merely standing around in Mariner’s Hold with Caerwyn, Fleur and Galathea, catching up on old times as some of us did not see each other for some time, as I received a note, letting me know I have to move my cute behind as soon as possible over to Nel. Apparently there was something going on that required my attendance. Luckily they all wanted to spend me some company on my way to Nel, and so we headed for it. On the way I was guessing around what might be wrong and why they need me. I only knew if the Purple Worm Trading Company requires my presence as fast as possible, then something bad must be going on in town.
And naturally it was that way, lucky me. We entered Nel and seems like a guard awaited me already, letting me know he is sorry for what happened to Jerred. I did not know the guard personally but after I handed Sashka over into their custody and set Tyrith free again, I was more or less known to at least a few of them, plus someone of the Purple Worms could have given them my physical description. However, it seems like Jerred was kidnapped right out of town but he also told me I should head straight to their inn and get briefed about what is going on. It did not stop me from asking a cute merchant lady in town about rumors about Jerred. She could not tell me all too much, but made me good offers for bolts, nails and other wares and I told her I’d recommend her as I was in no need of such things at the moment. I had more important things to do, like getting to know what in the pits was going on here.
Jazza, then innkeeper already awaited me and I introduced him to my friends. As rumors already stated, Jerred was kidnapped right out of town by two men who jumped on him and threw him on a horseback, retreating quickly. At least some guard, Trask, and the farmer Giles saw the kidnapping itself. At least we had some eyewitnesses we were going to ask some questions. Every single detail might be important and we had to hurry. Jerred also told us that the terms of his release were Sashka’s release within a week. The thing was, it took me some time to get here and therefore we only had four days left till they’d kill him! Lovely! The other thing was that no place for an exchange was mentioned. So it was just us releasing Sashka, toss her out of town and hope they will let Jerred free unharmed. But, would they? With Sashka I wouldn’t be too sure on that.
Anyway, we had to hurry. Only four days left and we yet had to think about a plan and get Jerred free, somehow. We therefore left the inn and found Duncan near by it, muttering something about the kidnapping. Duncan was responsible for the ore trades of the guilds and really wanted him back. If Jerred was dead the whole town would suffer from his loss. Their guild is pretty well established in town and without him no one was able to lead the guild and without a leader less trade and without less trade less True and with less True, well, unpleasant citizens and Jerred was well loved by them. And his life depended on us. No one really dared to mess with Sashka’s friends and I thought her safe in jail. And this also emerges another question. Why wasn’t she transported to Fort Homestead yet? Something seemed to be really wrong here. Bribery? Blackmailing? I had no idea.
From Duncan we also got to know where to find the farmer who saw the kidnapping. Or better say he told us that if someone knows where he is, we should ask Amolette, a halfling woman. We found her not too far away from the inn, resting in a field of flowers. She was quite nice and somehow reminded me of a little child. One had to be very carefully about what was said else she felt threatened and suspected we were after something. Well, it was on me to talk to her as Caerwyn more or less made her scared of him. Some soothing words and some pie did the trick and she told us where to find him. We found Giles on a pasture, taking care of his cows and got to know what happened. From what he said the guard, Trask, seemed suspicious as he was all of a sudden there when the kidnapping took place. However, one of the kidnappers had a very dark skin and was tall and bulky and was on a horse. The other one kept himself to the tree-line and rode northwards out of town.
Right, we know had at least the physical appearance of one of the kidnappers. We hurried back to town and asked around whether one saw the man in town or not. Apparently the merchant lady did. He bought some things from her and Duncan. We also got his name, Alan. Unfortunately no one knew where he came from, or what he bought all that stuff for. He did not tell the lady, or Duncan, and they did not ask what he needed it for. So we were kind of stuck here. Seeing the guard would likely tell us the same than Giles I decided to have a little chat with Sashka. Not that she’d really share any information with me. It was rather nice to chat with her though, if you ignore the fact that she wants to see me dead and wanted to rip my head off at least once while I visited her. She seemed to be more than pleased that her men were about to bail her out and Jerred going to be killed. One thing she told me though: “Whilst I breathe life into their friends, no walls or doors will keep me away for long.” And yet I had no idea what she meant and I suspected bribery. Frustrated I left the prison again and Caerwyn, along with Fleur were about to try their luck after we had a little chat with Trask who we did not trust at all and seemed suspicious. We did not really get to know anything knew from him and let him be for now. At least Caerwyn and Fleur did better with Sashka. Fleur somehow dazed him and they got some answers out of her. Obviously she did not know all too much though. I later found out that once she is bailed out she has to pick up a stone and that someone called Thark is behind this all. Probably one of her men I think.
Now we knew what was going on but we only had one day left and still no progress at all. The guards did not want to see Sashka free. Like I like to see her free? Really, but they did not want to cooperate and set her free and someone on her tail to bail her in, once they freed Jerred again. And we couldn’t do an exchange as they never mentioned a place for it. It was free Sashka and they will do the rest. We still did not know if one of the guards was with their men, like Trask so we ignored his attempts to help us out. He could have just tested us and let them know what we know. And we were almost out of time. So while Caerwyn thought that there is not too much sense in what Giles, Amolette and Trask told us, he, Fleur and Galathea decided to ask Amolette a little more about it. There had to be some details missing. I told them I’d stick to prison and arrange something. My idea? Well I wanted to dress up as Sashka, wear a hood and let the guards toss me out of town. They might buy I was Sashka and let Jerred free. It was risky as they could have called it a trap and avoided me. Especially as I had no idea where to head. Where was their hideout? It couldn’t be their old one as it seems Richelle moved in there. At least she was seen buying a lot of things, like furniture in Nel. So while I ordered Trask to bring me Sashka’s armor, the others hurried back with great news. Giles and Amolette are lovers of some sorts. Don’t ask me how intense it is and I did not dare to ask Caerwyn about it, but she saw some constructs in the woods and was kind enough to draw a map for us, which Caerwyn handed over to me. I donned her armor and accompanied by some guards we headed out of town and the guards back to town. We now had a very good hint and followed it.
Deep within the woods we saw some hounds and a trapdoor. After the wolves were silenced we descended into the hideout. A strange place. I looked around and was surrounded by constructs and other things, amidst was a gnome. Probably a slave who had to build this all for Sashka and her oh so nice friends. The constructs did not seem working though and once the gnome spotted me he went back to work. Apparently Sashka did not treat him well. We moved in and soon found a guard who recognized me as Sashka and asked questions. I tried to fake her voice and coughed a lot, like I caught a cold but in the end it did not go all too well. He gave me time to remove my hood and reveal myself. In the meantime Galathea slipped behind him and together we took him out. Now where we had no cover anymore we could at least hurry a bit and don’t bother with the guards but kill them. Well, either they or we and I am not really keen on being dead or fail to rescue Jerred. He had to be here! The guards were quite tough and it took us some effort to defeat them, but we had to and together we were a good team. Galathea and I were up front, while Caerwyn hauled his arrows and Fleur her spells. That way we finally reached another room and someone was cursing something about their hideout being spotted and one of them teleported himself out. No way we were able to stop him in time, but he was nice enough to leave us some company in form of more guards which we quickly took care of as well. I scanned the room and in one corner I spotted Jerred, laying flat on the ground. Gods, we were too late. They never cared to exchange him. They probably killed him as soon as they tossed him into their hideout. Reminds me I yet have to ask him about what really happened or what he got to know when he was locked up in their hideout. And yes, I can still ask him as Galathea was able to resurrect him from the dead. I helped him getting out as he was pretty weak and unstable. He could have passed out any time. On the way back to Nel I told him about the stone. I got to know that only Sashka can use the stone to activate the constructs.
But well, we finally got back to Nel and handed Jerred over who was very thankful for his rescue, as was Nel and most of its citizens. Together with Jerred I took care that Sashka was going to be handed over to some other place than Nel and the citizens also demanded it. Where she is going to be transported? I have no idea. If Jerred knows he will probably tell me, but as for now, there is no need to. Nel is temporarily safe again. I somehow have the feeling that I will have to face Sashka again one day. And maybe this Thark as well. I am pretty sure they try to get in contact somehow. One question still remains: Where is the stone Sashka hid in the woods? As long as the stone is out there, she and her men still remain as a threat. She’s after something, but what? As soon as something is going to happen around Nel, Jerred will contact me. And we yet have to sit down and have a talk in private, just him and me.
But for now I am going to take some days off and enjoy my time here with my family. The good thing is, I am more or less known in Nel now. At least to some, like the Purple Worm Trading Company and to some of the authorities and guards. And I hear rumors about the White Lily helping to end the kidnapping around town. I have to admit, I like it.
*Phyress leans back on her chair and stretches with a smile on her lips. She takes another sip of wine before she stuffs her journal back into her bag and leaves to see her mother.*
-
*Phyress slumps down under a tree in North Point, looking pretty exhausted and drained. She sighs slightly and starts writing a new entry into her journal.*
-Tunar, Jenra 3, 1450-
Well what can I say? Life has been busy, yet again and it is absolutely my own fault this time. Maybe not only this time as I am pretty independent and make my own decisions. So I did this time as well. Ages ago I started to make some crystal rods; Maran could enchant for me or use them for some resistances. I never really mastered it and I have to admit, I very fast got bored of digging sand up in the desert and chop coal in order to make them. It takes ages to gather all the sand, smelt it to glass and then make some rods out of them with coal. Coal was more or less easy to get as I only had to face some earth elementals in a cave in the Wolfswood Forest and sand typically in the desert. But as I already mentioned, I got bored of it pretty fast and I only made very slow progress and did not really become any better. Therefore I gave it up a very long time ago. But I now got some new rapiers and I am also lacking some resistances and what do I need to get them done? Either a lot of True, or some rods and ore for Maran. I just have to supply him the rods and maybe the one or other haul of platinum to get them done. Even though I already spent months into smelting and tinkering, I still have a long way to go to eventually be able to easily make rods of the third or fourth tier, but this is a long term goal. But at least this keeps me busy when no one else is around to head out exploring.
I have to admit, I got to know a lot about ore these days and almost feel like a dwarf sometimes. I already worked with copper, bronze, iron, gold, and silver, platinum and soon I am going to work on adamantium and cobalt. Actually I started straight with iron. Surprisingly I have quite a hand with it and did not have to go the whole way with copper and bronze. Too bad it was rather hard to get a hold on iron though. There are very few places where known veins run through. One of them is deep in Haven Mines. I descend there, sure. But it takes me quite some time and effort and then I can only fight my way to one vein. The other one is too deep within and too well protected by those gnolls. I hate fighting them as they are hard to knock down and they are quite fierce and tough. But at least I got some help from Maran and Ni and was able to mine some iron up in the Iron Hills or Troll Central.
For a nugget of gold I need two nuggets, but it is way easier to gather than iron. I found a cave with a lot of veins somewhere on Alindor. I don’t know what the area itself is called, but Kenkus roam up in the hills. These birdmen are quite nimble and sneaky. Once they see you they turn themselves invisible and try to sneak up on you. But well, my senses are quite keen and I don’t give them a chance to use this as an advantage when they attack me and their invisibility fades. I don’t know how much gold I mined in total, but it was quite an amount over the year and I am glad I moved on and now focus on other materials which I cannot get all too easily. As good as gold was for smelting, I was more or less stuck with it as I cannot make any arrowheads out of it, and even if, no one would buy them, hence the gold. It is too soft and heavy to make a decent arrowhead after all. Therefore I asked Maran if he was interested in some gold and he was in need of some for his ring making. I wasn’t interested in any True, but was interested in some trade. At his house I found some useful things, such as a new rapier and a new belt. The rapier is no good for fencing at all, but it looks nice and if I wield it I feel like I have more knowledge about things and makes it easier for me to say what something unidentified is. Not that I don’t know anything about any lore. I know even more than some wizards which makes me wonder from time to time. They have plenty of time to study the essence of things, don’t they? However, the thing about the belt is that it helps me to resist spells. It is not all too strong but surely is helpful against lesser spells, or even those which are casted on me where I can find some veins of platinum which I needed for arrowheads. I gathered Sallaron was in need of a box of platinum arrowheads and therefore I made him a full box. Getting all the arrowheads together took me quite some effort though as a trip into the Battlehelm Moors is still risky for me due to their shamans. I hate if they throw a Hammer of Gods after me and I stand still, stunned and unable to act. The new belt helps me a little with resisting that spell. It does not always work, but the chance not to get stunned increased a little that way. For a full box of arrowheads I got myself a crystal rod of the fourth tier as I am not able to make them on my own, yet. I will in near future though. I just need to keep on making arrowheads or try myself on some traps. But for traps I need a lot of tin and it is not really worth going after tin and I am not really keen on hiring someone to get it for me. For cold traps I also need sapphire dust, but Ni and Maran already agreed on handing it me over as they have no use for it when they work with their jewelry.
On a recent trip to Firesteep on the Molten Island I managed to mine some cobalt and adamantium together with Fleur, Oma and Maran. The trip was very interesting and I haven’t been before there just yet. To my surprise a lot of trees grow there, like pecans and apples and from what I heard apples from Firesteep are the best ones on Layonara. Maran explained to me that due to the volcanic activities the soil is great around here. You just need to find some soil, that’s all it takes. I did not pick some though as I was too busy fighting off masses of kobolds. Well, I am rather glad I did not have to fight all of them as they have some kind of aura that causes some burns. Not lethal itself, but when you are surrounded by, let’s say 25 kobolds? All trying to rip you to shreds? Not a good idea, really. I am already thinking about trading my crystal rod for a fire resistance which should do me well up in Firesteep when it comes to facing kobolds again. We also had to face some elementals which Fleur named Freddy. Odd choice of a name, really. But well, to Maran and Fleur they are “Freddies” now. I keep on calling them elementals, really. Close to the mining grounds is a house, well secured by a wall and a gate which is trapped and locked. All I can say is that it is a hell of a lock and I was not able to pick it, not even with my tools. Luckily Oma and Fleur both had a pixie so it was an easy one to pick it and disable the trap. I did not even see the trap! I really should focus more on traps and locks after I master the techniques I still study to improve my way as a duelist. I am not too sure, but I am sure I now could face my old mentor, Lydia. Gods, I did not see her in ages. I hope she is still alright. She’s always been strong and even with her bad leg, I am sure she could still kick some behinds around for good. However, Lydia wasn’t with us up on the Molten Island and fighting our way through kobolds and other minions of Fisterion who is rumored to live up there, somewhere.
All these kobolds were nothing compared to what we faced at a sheer. Maran led us the way and told us to be very careful. No wonder, we saw a fierce demon close to the sheer, guarding the way over it. It looked scary, powerful, had wings and a tail. That’s all I can say besides a shudder went down my spine and wanted me to turn around and run, but then I love the thrill and the three of us agreed on facing it. Well, Oma was probably already drunk with the dwarf who lives at the mine. She wanted to ask him about some ale and other drinks after all and was not with us anymore. However, we prepared all our wards and got ready to launch an attack on it. Maran luckily sent a summoned elemental with us into the battle which I was thankful for. I wanted to perform an acrobatic attack to knock it down. I know demons are quite tough when it comes to knocking them down and defeating them but maybe I could surprise it and knock it down. I therefore dodged a blow, hurried behind it while it was facing Maran and his elemental and got ready to leap into it. It turned around in midair and glared furiously at me. No way, it saw me and something in me told me to stop the attack and turn around. Something else in me told me to continue the attack and hit it bad. And so I did. Even though it was now more or less expecting my attack struck my rapier through it and knocked it down. I turned around and continued attacking it while it lay flat on the ground. I did not think hitting it could be that hard, really. First off, my attack almost did nothing except from knocking it down. Secondly, it was hard to hit, even when knocked down. While we had our problems to even scratch us, it wildly through fire at us. While I managed to dodge its attacks most effectively and did not get burned by it, I saw Fleur and the elemental badly wounded and burnt though. Time for a retreat! That thing was way too much for us. No way could we have defeated it. While another elemental was keeping it busy we ran for to get some distance between us, then covered ourselves with invisibility and escaped back to the house to take an extended rest.
Well, after the rest we headed back to Willows Weep where we split what we found on our exploration and departed. Personally I moved over to North Point where I am going to smelt all this cobalt and adamantium and hopefully into many ingots without a lot of failures. Once they are ingots it is rather easy to make arrowheads out of them, I hope. I think I will save to cobalt for now though until I got more experience with smelting. I don’t want to ruin most of my attempts due to bad luck, yet again. But before I am going to smelt them I will take a rest as I am still very exhausted and drained from the adventure up in Firesteep. The demon was quite strong and it made me felt oh-so-weak in comparison. Even though my skill with the blade slightly improved, I still have a lot to improve. My aim got a little better over the last year but that’s pretty much about it, besides being even more nimble these days. But still, when I faced that demon I was nothing. Even if I was able to hit it a few times, it simply laughed about what might have hurt other creatures and I bet you it could eat my blade if it wanted to, just to annoy me. This is surely an opponent I am eager to face again with some more training. What is essentially when facing it is not getting hit. If it hits me I am history. For my future training I have to focus on foreseeing ones movements even more and dodge right under it. Of course I need to have good sight on my opponent so even if I eventually figure it out after a long and exhausting training, it won’t do me any good when knocked down, being flanked or attacked from behind. But as long as I have it up front, I should be all fine. I should also invest more time with performing acrobatic attacks. I know there is still a lot to learn but I know that at some point I will manage these techniques and laugh about my stupidity why I did not figure it out earlier.
Talking about my acrobatic attack also reminds me of an exploration in the Deep with some other adventurers. Apparently someone found an entrance to the Deep somewhere up in the mountains close to Miritrix where the giants roam. I have to admit, the Deep is a very interesting place, yet deadly how I had to find out the hard way. As we descended everything went smoothly and not much was able to stop us, until we had to faces odd creatures: Half dark elf, half spider. All I can say is they had hawk-like eyes and spotted us miles away already and shot deadly arrows at us and we had to cover from their hails and let them come after us. Else it was suicide. However, we managed to defeat them though and at some point we had to turn around as things got really nasty and some of us wanted to see the surface again as soon as possible. Therefore we headed up again and this time we did not have that much problems with these odd creatures. What caused us more problems were those spiders though and it was also where I met my death and naturally, the Soul Mother and I really hate her! Somehow I was prevented from performing any acrobatic attack where we faced that one strong spider and left me flatfooted and I realized it too late all the time, well three times to be exact as it only took the spider three hits to take me down. I was pretty ed after that, you bet. Not only that I died to a silly spider, but also the Soul Mother spent me a visit and I tell you, it was not a pleasant one! I swear. I am so going to improve my skill with the rapier and pierce it right through such a spider and get my revenge.
At least it gave me some satisfaction when I defeated some friend of Eslar. Oddly Eslar showed up again in Port Hempstead and was poking me about some kind of date. Like I ever agreed on going out fishing with him. He always claims he loves his wife and would never betray her, but personally he was getting too close in the past and was hitting too much on me and I bet if I did not really ignore him when I had to see him again the other day he would have started all over about it again. In no way I am going out on a date with him, even though he claims it a platonically one. Doesn’t his wife go out on dates with him? Not that I really care about him, but I cannot help it; I have a curious nature. But seeing Maran now had business to talk with one of his friend, I was all alone with him and his friend who seemed to be a fighter and we agreed on having a duel in the arena and therefore headed over to Fort Vehl. The fight was rather long and it took me quite some effort to defeat him, but eventually he fell and I was breathing heavily. He did not give me enough room to perform an acrobatic attack on him and he was fighting in a defensive stance, too. Therefore I had a hard one to get through his defense and land a good hit, while he had it slightly easier to hit me and all of my attempts to knock him down missed too. Gladly all of his missed, too. Well, I look forward to dueling with him again as he will improve his way of battle and I have to come forward with another technique by then.
I simply love it when a team does not work as a team at all. There were two other adventurers in the arena as well and after their unspectacular duel we decided on fighting two versus three. So him, his friend and Eslar’s friend against Eslar and me. Eslar said he’d screw up the balance no matter in what team he was. I think he think too much about himself. A pierce right through him with a blade and he will pretty much fall down dead. Well, might do him good for one. I did not even need him in this fight, really. One of them used darkness on themselves and therefore were shrouded in darkness and blinded. Stupidity! Their archer ran out of it and right into an acrobatic attack and fell dead to ground. I think I killed the one who caused the darkness with a single attack as well. Then there was only one still running about and that was Eslar’s friend. I think I don’t have to mention he was still blinded by the darkness and helplessly fell to my blade. Without his defense I knocked him down and aimed for his weak spots. He was dead within seconds and probably before he realized what was even going on. Well, not my fault at all.
The last thing I am going to mention is about a trip into the Spirit Dunes, the big desert on Mistone. Ni mentioned something about a Halfling settlement and together with Caerwyn we headed there. We explored the area and I wonder why we did not see it before already. Especially the canyon. However, it took us quite some time to find a way over a chasm and I finally found it, well hidden and we moved to the other side where our real adventure started. It was very thrilling. We soon had to face snakes and ghosts and also some big whirling winds. I think those were some kind of elementals as well. However, Caerwyn had to leave again and therefore we soon had to make our way back to the Halflings again, promising to see each other again and explore this canyon even more. We were not far in anyway.
It did not take long and I found myself back in the canyon again. I met with Fleur, Maran, Jil and Markus another day and they were clueless about where to head and I still wanted to explore the canyon and therefore decided to head there for a change. It did not take us long and we got to the point where Caerwyn, Ni and I had to turn around and head back. It was us women who led the way as Maran and Markus had some problems to climb their way around all those cliffs and chasms. I did not see Jil fighting yet, but she is hell of an archer! She shoots faster than I can swing my blade and for one snake she needed like 4 arrows, while I needed like 7 swings for one at least. I am pretty impressed by her skill with the bow and got reminded about Jacchri hitting me years ago on Belinara. These archers can be one of your worst enemies if you don’t reach them in time and knock them down. I better don’t mess with them. I rather have them covering my back than shooting my front. I would be ugly. I like piercing holes in my opponents but hate seeing things piercing right through me.
However, we soon found an entrance leading us to some ruins, by the look of it dwarves once lived in this place and I am sure a woman back in the Halfling camp mentioned something about dwarves. Anyway, the place was haunted by more ghosts who we were able to defeat easily, as long as our minds were protected. To my advantage I was able to knock them down which made things easier for us. Especially for Jil when the ghosts decided to chase after her. As good as she is with her bow, her defense is rather weak and she had to run a lot to get out of their reach. I knocking them down saved her quite some potions. All was going to be rather smoothly, until we got into one chamber which was also filled with more ghosts. But there was something else lurking in there. Something made like out of stone, yet living. It looked like a statue of a dwarf, a life-size statue of it though, so not all too big and it looked rather angry. Figures, we were intruders and this was their place. It aimed for Markus and it hit hard from what I was able to see and it was hard to damage it. I had no choice but leap into it and hope for the best. With enough force I might be able to knock it down. I leaped. And hit. It fell to the ground and I started to attack it together with the others. With joint force we were able to defeat it easily, but this was just one. When we descended even further into the ruins, we soon found ourselves in a huge hall with four bridges. On the other side we spotted a huge statue of a gigantic, weeping dragon statue. It looked all interesting and I so wanted to head over there, but there was a slight problem in form of a small army of those dwarven statues. Luckily they did not stand close to each other, more like two guarding each bridge on the other side and we could fight them on the bridge without being surrounded by them. It’d have been our certain death. Every one of us had to give his or her best as no one of us wanted to die in these ruins beneath the sands. I did my very best to keep them knocked down on the ground and I tell you, it was a hard, rough, long, thrilling but exhausting fight. I had several scratches and some deep wounds, as the others. I had slight problems to even leap into their direction as the bridge was small and under us was nothing but deep darkness. No way I wanted to fall down here. And then it was done, they were finally defeated and we went over to explore the area. Besides the statue there was nothing all too spectacular but I am still all curious about the story of this place. Due to my time with Lydia and Arngrim I learned a lot about the lore of some places we went and also learned to respect it. I will find out the story of these ruins sooner or later, or take a look at the Great Library or do some researches in an Aragenite Library.
However, we had to leave this interesting place again for our own safety. Once we were out I also spotted another entrance into the canyon. Maybe that place will lead us to a conclusion about the history of this place, but unfortunately Jil had some errands to do and therefore we all left this place. We left it for now. I know I will come back in time and try to find out if the other opening is leading somewhere or if it is a dead end. But then I promised to head here again with Ni and Caerwyn so eventually I’ll get my chance to explore this place even more. But I am in no big hurry.
And I wonder what Sashka is up to...
*Phyress taps her lower lip thoughtfully and her thoughts drift off to Sashka, her parents and Nel. She sighs slightly, stuffs her belongings back into her back and heads to the craft hall.*
-
*With a heavy sigh Phyress sits down at the docks in Arnax, takes out her journal and starts writing a new entry into her journal.*
-Wedlar, Jenra 11, 1450-
Sometimes things just don’t go as planned. Today I was sitting in Port Hempstead with Razeriem and Oma, when I received a letter from Maran. Apparently he was about to visit the one place with the untamable Al’Noth again, up on Corsain. For this he gathered quite a group. Those who were willing to head down with us were Beli, Chakar, Razeriem, Oma, Maran himself and of course me. Maran and I already were there twice but we never really made it deep into that cave so it was still a whole new place which we could explore. A place full of adventures, thrilling battles, and well, death.
It all started very smoothly back at the surface where we had to face some of those outlaw monks. They were easily defeated and we got ready to head down into the wild Al’Noth territory again. I think Storold once mentioned it was unnatural. But maybe it was this way before Lucinda came up and “tamed” it? Anyway, once we descended we had to face masses of giants again. And if I say masses then I really mean masses. They showed up in groups of like twelve and all shooting at us. I am just glad I did not run in first, else my whole body would have been pierced. Actually I was more worried about the traps. These were no normal traps at all. Even if you manage to avoid them, you still suffer from their effects and I pretty much learned it the hard way. I did not die though, but it took me quite some skill to bandage me up properly again as I was bleeding everywhere. Along facing the giants we had to face those moss covered things again. I rather face two giants than one of those things. Somehow they are quite resistant to my bladework and don’t really do them any noticeable damage. However, everything went more or less smoothly and we soon found an exit and a way back to the surface again.
But where were we? Not where we started, that’s for sure. We were surrounded by trees and really looked like we were in a forest of some sorts. Just that we saw some odd creatures and Chakar called them Pit Dwellers. They did not seem very strong though. At least not as strong as the two or three spiders we had to face as well. Knocking them down helped me a lot to aim for their weak spots though. We moved on and soon had to face some more guards, protecting some entrance to somewhere. Also here it was useful that I was able to knock them down and therefore were also defeated easily. After we took care of every creature that blocked our way we decided to descend into the ruins they were guarding.
The place smelled of death and we soon found us surrounded by vampires. Those vampires were strong, powerful and in no way comparable to those I have fought on Mistone and Dregar. Not that they even had priests who casted spells like Cloudkill on us, we also triggered darkness upon us when we hit them with our blades and had to fight in complete darkness. Alright, it did not have that much of a problem with it as I am used to fight in complete darkness and can rely on a low vision and on my other keen senses. It was good we were well warded and our casters knew some spells as well which were very effective against these undeads. While their fighters were kind of capable with their blades, I was more worried about their casters though as our resistance from any spells wasn’t as good as to block all of their spells and Cloudkill can be a killer.
All went fine and we pushed deep forward into the heart of these ruins, or crypts. Whatever it was we were into. But then things really screwed up. Chakar pushed on and soon found himself surrounded by vampires while some of us were still descending. It was a hard, rough and exhausting battle and it seemed like vampires were coming to us from all sides, swarming around and likely were about to kill us if we did not stop them before they got a chance to do so. Well I mean either us or them. During the battle I fell to their blades and spells as well, but I luckily stabilized and was able to be healed. Every help was too late for Chakar though who fell in this madness. With saddened hearts we decided to move on and soon found ourselves in a large hall with dozens of vampires, all prepared to wipe us out. There were like six casters I think and all threw Cloudkills on Maran who ran into them to cast a Sunburst like he did on other vampires before. Sadly that many spells were too much for him to take and he fell during the battle as well. I was heavily breathing when the fight was over and we decided to get the hell out of here as fast as possible. No one of us wanted to die down here.
Weakened and left without Maran’s and Chakar’s protections we made our way up again by covering ourselves invisible. It would have worked, but like all vampires were able to pierce through it. I managed to survive the first battle, but not the second encounter with those vampires on our way up. I had no choice; I was stunned by one of their spells and killed by more Cloudkills. Luckily the Soul Mother did not care to visit me though and I found myself back in Arnax, where I write this entry into my journal. As good as I might have been with my blade on this exploration; I still fell easily to their spells. I just hope the others made it out alive, especially Razeriem. It’s funny to tease around with him and he still has to go out with me, shopping. It will be very amusing; I have no doubt about it.
*Phyress smiles faintly as she closes her journal and looks around, eyeing her surroundings before she takes a boat and sails back to Lor on Dregar.*
-
*With a heavy sigh Phyress lies down on her bed, reflection the past days in Nel before she grabs her journal, quill and ink and starts writing a new entry into it.*
-Threas, Seplar 19, 1450-
Sometimes things come fast, especially the latest event and no, I did not screw it up, at least not completely. I know I did something wrong but then I had to do it. I just don’t know whether things will improve now or become worse. But well, let me start in the beginning of this crisis.
It all started back in Mariner’s Hold, when I was requested in Nel as fast as possible as Sashka was causing some trouble and her men kidnapped a friend and leader of the Purple Worm Trading Company, Jerred. As I already mentioned in another entry, I managed to rescue Jerred right in time and let Sashka rot in a cell still in Nel. Together with Jerred I requested Sashka to me moved over to another location as it was not safe with her around any longer. As long as her men know where she’s rotting in a cell, they will try anything to set her free again and trust me, they don’t care walking about corpses to bail her out. She’s the only one who knows about the Heartstone and they need it to activate all the remaining constructs. What for? I did not know up to this time, but I yet had to find it out; naturally the hard way.
However, I was requested at the court in Nel for an interview. The mayor and some others had some questions about what happened and therefore I headed to the courthouse together with Caerwyn and Fleur. We were already expected and were escorted by a guard. The mayor himself seemed kind enough and I also saw Jerred standing a little farther away. After some small talk I had to explain what really happened and what I found out on my task to save Jerred from certain death. From time to time Jerred added something every here and there as he could eavesdrop them when he was imprisoned. I told the mayor about the factory and that there were more and that Sashka was obviously a key to their success. What made me curious from Jerred’s report was that they were working for someone else. Someone they only entitled as “him”, or “he” for that matter and they also spoke of him in fear. Jerred also mentioned they were about to take Nel and retrieve something which is supposed to be in Nel, somewhere and he cannot go there, or get it himself. First I thought it might be Thark. Nonsense. He’s human and could have got it while we did not know about his league with Sashka. Well, I did a little investigation while I had to wait for my report. It seems like Thark and Sashka were working together so figures why she told me that Thark is in charge when I questioned her. It also explains why Sashka was not moved over to Fort Homestead as Thark was in charge of the prison or so over in Homestead. He was at least in a position to say Sashka was too dangerous to be imprisoned there and therefore she stayed in Nel and caused all the problems with the kidnapping and threat to kill Jerred if she was not released.
The mayor was clearly concerned when I mentioned the factories, constructs and Sashka’s connection to Thark. Well he knew about the connection as I had to ask the authorities in Nel after someone called Thark and they knew him. To make things even more complicated and worse I got word that Sashka was moved over to Hlint and escaped from there when the transport was attacked and caused quite some trouble in Hlint. So Sashka was on the loose again. Anyway, soon a guard rushed in and told the mayor that Nel was under attack. Constructs, and lots of them. Clearly someone was happy Sashka was released and on her way to pick up the stone she hid somewhere in the woods. The mayor did not know what to do. He probably never was in charge under these conditions and was too afraid to do anything. Swell, someone had to do something. And because no one else spoke up I gave orders to the guard who brought the message to us. There were two gates: One in the north and one in the south. I gave orders to sent guard to both gates and told them to let them attack and use the advantage of Nel’s fortifications and to use iron tipped arrows as they proved worth the struggle to make them in the past. Also I was hoping for some help of the White Lily. Lywn, Tyrith and Richelle had to be somewhere in or around town. And knowing Tyrith she’d smell the upcoming battle miles away. Also they had to take care of any scouts as they were still after something in Nel. Something was here that “he” could not lay his hands on personally. Something was keeping him from it and therefore he sent his men to take Nel. This way they could easily look for whatever he is after and retrieve it. This was not my main concern right now though. I had to coordinate the little troops we had to hold Nel and not let them take it. His men could be already in town and look after it or might already found it and just waiting for the doors to open for them again.
Once most things were settled, and hey, the mayor gave me the responsibility for Nel’s defense; more or less. When I gave commands to the one guard who brought these great news to us he looked a little irritated over to the mayor but he simply nodded like I was in charge now. Together with Caerwyn and Fleur I hurried over to the north gate to help with the defenses. The three of us are well trained and fighting a few constructs won’t be all too hard, or so I thought. These constructs were tough and not easily defeated. I was glad that Tyrith and Lywn were with me. Oddly I mostly only see them when things are totally screwed up. Do I seek trouble or does it seek me? However, Richelle was not seen in Nel and she was probably in our hideout, still decorating. The thing was though; Sashka most likely hid the Heartstone in her old hideout which was now the base of the White Lily, or going to be at last. Richelle was in dire danger. So while I was still discussing things with Lywn, a messenger hurried over and gave me to know that adventurers arrived at the southern gate and helped defending it against those masses of constructs. Even though I knew my place was here I had to save Richelle. Without Richelle I wouldn’t be who I am these days and I really owe her a lot. Besides I still had to settle something with Sashka. I therefore ordered the messenger to send some of the guards from the south gate over to the north and told Lywn that she was in charge now. I knew the guards were not as strong as Lywn, Tyrith and the others, but screw it. Richelle was important and I had to stop Sashka anyway. I knew Lywn could hold the gate together with the others. She’s a good woman and knows what she wants. I grabbed Caerwyn and together we ran to Sashka’s old hideout. When we got there we found the interior all destroyed and naturally, also some constructs were left as guards. Swell. Richelle’s life depended on me as I knew Sashka would kill her just to tick me off so we had to make pace.
Caerwyn and I fought the constructs as best as we could, not to mention some more of Sashka’s men. I knew I had to stop her to stop this madness. My blade tasted a lot of blood and I was bathed in it. There were a lot of guards and we sometimes had a hard time to defeat them all. Luckily Caerwyn is well trained with his bow and I had some exquisite training already, thanks to Lydia and to Richelle. I dodged their blows, moved quickly behind them and aimed for their less protected areas. We pressed on and we soon got to the main hall where we were heavily attacked and I was breathing heavily, not to mention all my wounds and bruised. It was hard to say if it was my blood or from my enemies I already killed on my way to get here. The fight was long and exhausting but we finally made it. Sashka had to be here somewhere and Richelle, too. I so hoped she was still alive.
It was quiet and I was catching my breath, as was Caerwyn. The former battles certainly took its toll. I called her name while I slowly headed inside the hall. She had to be here. I called her name several times and then I spotted her, eyeing my mockingly. She really loved me as much as I loved her. So after some chit-chat we talked business. She wanted me to let her pass and don’t bother about it anymore. It’d be the healthiest thing for me right now. I told her to screw it. No way she’d walk past me. I told her to drop it as she was just a tool for him as well and she was worthless without the stone. He’d drop her once he got what he wanted. Somehow she knew, or at least I got the impression of it. She gave me to know I should be afraid of him and don’t continue making jokes about him. Well, I told her he was probably a small brat and guess; she did not really like me calling him such names. She ordered me once more to let her pass and I shot back that I won’t pass her while I am still alive. It had to come to an end and she did not want to hand me the stone over either. We both cursed and went for a duel. Winner takes all. Well it means the winner takes the other one’s life, along with the stone.
Sashka charged in and opened the duel. I calmly waited for her to come in range of my rapier. I waited and got ready, trying to get a good balance on my blade. I struck, aiming for her mid. She fell, knocked down. I had advantage of the duel, leaped behind her and launched attack after attack, not letting her any time to get up again. A shot in the back while I was back dueling her and she fell down. Breathing flatly while blood flooded out of her body and coughed up some more blood. With her last breath she cursed me. It was over. Sashka was no more. I am just a little annoyed she fell to Caerwyn’s arrow and not to a precise strike with my rapier. I searched her body and picked the Heartstone from her. But well, and thus the story ends, or so I thought.
I searched around for Richelle but did not spot her on sight. And then the earth started rumbling and I had to hold my balance. I turned around and saw something appearing right in front of us and close to Sashka. It looked terrifying, like something right out of the pits. Something I did not want to face at all. It was big and had black smoking wings. Its skin was blood-red and its eyes glowing evilly. It just stared at us, doing nothing. Caerwyn tried to shroud us but it kept staring right through it, eyeing every single motion of us. It did not attack which I was glad for. I somehow got the feeling that that thing was “him”. And it was probably watching the whole time. Well, according to Sashka it could hear me mocking the whole time, even when I called it names. I felt so little all of a sudden. I knew I could face quite some opponents, but such a creature? No way! To my surprise it just continued to stare at us before it picked up the lifeless Sashka and vanished again. Why it picked up her? I have no idea. I may have defeated Sashka, but I also summoned a way bigger threat and probably ed it off royally, too. Sometimes I just love how I screw up my life.
When we were on our way to head back out, Richelle showed up, all healthy. Richelle hid herself somewhere in the hideout and waiting for its end. I am glad she survived and together the three of us headed back to Nel, where the fights just came to an end and I got a report from Lywn. Many fell due to our absence but I could not help it, I had to save Richelle from certain death and I knew they would not take the town while some members of the White Lily were still defending it. Naturally I feel bad for everyone who fell under my command, but Plenarius already told me that this is the burden of a leader in a war. But at least the battle was over for now and the mayor shocked about the losses. I offered him to help with recruiting more, but he wanted to celebrate our victory with all those who participated in Nel. So the authorities, the adventurers who took care of the southern gate, the guards, and the White Lily. It was nice to see many faces again but I was elsewhere with my thoughts. I was already reflecting the fights, Sashka, the Heartstone and the fiend. I have no idea what is going to happen, but we have to be well prepared. “He” is still after something which is well hidden somewhere here in Nel and it simply won’t give up. I only wonder why he cannot get to it himself.
What a day. Nel was attacked by hundreds of constructs. I abandoned the defenses and went after Sashka to Lywn’s dislike, killed Sashka, saved Richelle, retrieved the Heartstone which is now in my little pouch together with the strange ring the shady mage handed me over for retrieving something out of the Haven mines, summoned an even bigger threat, might as well ed it off already, lost a lot of good guards in Nel and our hideout is now ruined and needs a lot of effort to repair the mess Sashka produced. But on the bright side I got free wine.
Oh well, let’s see how this is going to end...
*Phyress sighs again and puts everything aside before she falls into deep slumber.*
-
*With a slight smile Phyress takes a sip from her red wine before she sits down on her bed. She only sits there shortly, enjoying the one or other sip of wine before she stands up, paces around and finally settles down cross-legged on her bed, her journal in her lap.*
-Sunra, Junar 1, 1453-
I know I did not write for quite some time for. Checking my last entry I see I was deep in trouble with the recent happenings around Nel but at least nothing happened, yet so I was able to focus on other things, luckily. I really had to take some time off and so I did. Well I did not stay at home for the whole time, but it was nice enough not to think about “him” again. A lot of things happened in the past three years and I probably forgot most of the details already. I know a lot of things happened but I am trying to focus on the most important things.
Where do I start? I best start with the easy parts which include the one or other adventure. Actually there are two trips quite worth mentioning. Maran and I have been planning for quite some time to reach the emeralds deposit which run somewhere deep within the Deep. All I can say is, well, we failed two times and only got them when we headed there a third time. The trip was very interesting and I have seen a lot of strange creatures. I am just glad we had an excellent party with us, like Maran, Fleur, G’ork, Chakar, Oma and Galathea. All went smoothly and way better than the first two times and we naturally learned from our mistakes we did at the final area where, according to Maran’s map, the veins should run. I tell you, I rather fight vampires than one of these bone yards we had to face and were the reason we had to turn around the first time. It looks like a huge golem made out of bones and it was pretty darn tough. I had no chance to hurt it with my rapier. I know it is a piercing weapon but even then I can kill skeletons. But for this one I had to try an old mace I found at some point and Oma enchanted it for me. Hitting was not the problem but it seemed like I could not really harm it with a blunt weapon either. As I always tell everyone: I am not strong and fragile. And well, I really am. I don’t have a lot of strength, but I take advantage of my opponent’s weaknesses and I am quite agile and trained with light finesse weapons, especially my beloved rapiers. However, with G’ork and Maran it was no problem at all. They killed a few bone yards while I just examined the situation and paid attention to the ongoing battle. Unfortunately I was not able to spot any weak points. Hard to as they don’t feel any pain, being animated and all. We pressed on and soon found ourselves close to the veins and now we had to be extremely careful and we hopeful learned from the mistakes we did last time. This time we stuck together and attacked them one by one and it was almost too easy, you bet. Even though all of the vampires and elementals fell to our blades and magic, the vampires know how to fight with the rapier and I fear I would not survive a duel against one. They are very quick on their feet and know to aim for ones weak and less armored parts. I only survived as we all fought them off as an unit, as it should be. Once they were all defeated we went for the deposits and mined as much emeralds as we were able to find. Once we chiseled all we were able to spot we made our way back out without any problems. We finally did it and in the end every one of us got two raw emeralds!
The other expedition worth being mentioned was rather spontaneous. One day I went to the Crossroads in the Thunderpeaks where I found some adventures who were just preparing for an expedition to the Spikes. I did not know what to expect but when I was asked to join them I could not deny the offer and besides I was looking for an adventure anyway. I recognized some of the areas as we walked towards our set destination. We had to make our way through the cave filled with Werewolves or wolves in general. I don’t really know. All I know is that they once killed me already when I headed this way together with G’ork and Shamur. This time we were more adventurers and I also learned from my mistakes and knew when to engage or when to fall back. Also I was doing better with my rapier than before, hence my training during all these years. Once we defeated all the wolves we left the cave again and found ourselves back on the mountains where we had to face some spiders to make our way past them. Compared to the wolves the spiders were a rather easy kill. I leaped into them and knocked them down easily, not to mention I was immune to their poison. And finally I got to see Arcs. I heard a lot about the Arcs and still wanted to see them with my own eyes and even wanted to test my blade on them. It is said they are quite tough and fierce. They are as tall as the ones I used to face in the Great Forest, but those are nothing compared to the Arcs. We had to be very careful. One alone still gave us a hell of a fight but we worked well together as a team and we manages to take out some guards and make it into their fortress, apparently where it is said their King Essrantor reigns. Well we were smart enough and not storm into his throne room. Even though I like the thrill, I prefer to survive a deadly encounter and I was not all too keen on facing a king of giants just yet. Not to mention that he will only be gone for some time and then return. From what I heard it has to do with some pillars. As long as they exist and are not destroyed he will continue on living. Oddly this reminds me somehow of Del Alo’rion, just that he had some crystal and not some pillars on his island. Well, Del Alo’rion is long gone by now and I still have a shiver of it on me I don’t dare to use. Anyway, as we all were not all too keen on facing Essrantor and his guards we went out again and G’ork continued to lead us deep into the mountains and we soon found ourselves in the mountains again.
This time it looked like some ancient dwarfish ruins. It was breathtaking. Runes were everywhere and sometimes I was not able to see the ground under me as they mined that deep! But the whole thing was a bloody maze! Can’t they build straight bridges? Sometimes I felt like I was running in circles and sometimes I did not know if I was here already or not. Finding the way through the maze was one thing, facing the remains of the dwarfish culture which once resided here was a whole different thing. We mostly met some of their spirits, elementals, odd dwarves who seemed to burn and naturally, oh wonder, constructs. Really, I have seen enough constructs on the defense of Nel already. I don’t need to fight them anymore, really! I was glad there were enough others around to keep me alive. I must have been a real burden to them as I got hit several times. The problem was that I leaped into the dwarves and other odd creatures several times and naturally end up being surrounded by them. Anyway, at some point we finally found the way and soon found ourselves in a huge hall, written all over with runes. The view was lovely if you did not mind the company we got there. Somehow the hall was filled with guards, mostly constructs and only there to prevent adventurers like us to intrude. I soon found out why: Mithril veins run through this hall, among titanium ones. But there was just one slight problem. The mithril was on one side and we were on the other and in between all these guards we had to face to reach the veins. As I did not do a good job on harming those golems which is a result of me using a rapier and no hammer, I focused on knocking them down which worked wonders. So while they damaged those things I helped by knocking them down. Was good for our health and we finally made it to the veins, whereas we mined it quickly as we did not really want to face the guards again. So once we finished our work we hurried out again. Well, we wanted to as there were already guards coming from anywhere. They could have simply asked us to leave but instead they attacked and chaos broke out and things went crazy. Chakar and G’ork gave us all instructions to not rush through the door and out of the hall. Seems two were not able to listen well. At some point they were simply gone but I had to focus on the battle anyway and helped with knocking them down so the others could defeat the guards. Once we finished them off we found the remains of the two who tried to flee. They were dead. Really it was their own fault and they played with our lives, too. I did not really know them anyway so it did not really matter to me. It is quite odd what all this killing can do to one. You almost kill someone or something on your daily basis and don’t even arch a brow. A comrade you hardly know gets killed and you don’t really care but if someone close to you is in danger or dies hell breaks loose and you give everything to save or avenge one. However, even without the two the rest of us made it out alive and we divided what we found and mined and I managed to get a hold of two mithril nuggets on my own. I just need more nuggets so I can get a new set of reinforced clothing made out of it. I rather invest it into some clothing than a blade. An ingot takes 4 nuggets and for a rapier one needs around four or five ingots after all. And try to get to such an amount if everyone wants a share of mithril as well. So I rather head there another day and try to get three more nuggets for my clothing. Well, I still got some time left anyway as one needs to be rather skilled to make use of such lovely clothing and I am afraid I am not that good, yet. I just need to keep up my training, even though I only make slow progress. Right now it is rather hard to focus on it but I want to improve my acrobatic attack. That’s why I use it often these days, like back in the dwarfish ruins.
Lately I have been hanging around with Caerwyn a lot. I don’t know, but we get quite well together and everyone respects the other. He certainly did not have an easy time with all this love affairs and I am rather glad I am not really interested in starting anything after Snagnor pulled that stunt on me and betrayed and almost killed me. While our friendship grew stronger I got to know that he once was engaged with Amanda. Somehow Razeriem interfered and they broke up or something. I did not really ask about the reasons and I don’t think I want to know about it at all. It is something between them after all. All I know is he cannot stand Razeriem for that reason but is still in good terms with Amanda who is now Storold’s wife. I also got to know he once was Jaelle’s love-toy, just like Trouble. It seems like every male adventurer had something going on with her already. Could be my sources are wrong on it though, but I had some experience with her as well and all I will say is she has soft lips and knows how to kiss. And I am so not into her! Even though most men only know how to hurt my feeling I won’t turn all homosexual. That would not be me. On that note I notice many female adventurers are not straight and you only see that trend with female ones. The men are always looking for women and most women are looking after women, too. Adventurers can be quite an odd bunch. However, the other day Caerwyn and I moved as close to the realm of Milara as possible. Even though the contract between Milara and Plenarius is no longer valid the border still gives me creeps and I don’t really want to know what I would find on his land. Bet you he still got some remaining troops of Blood’s forces and after my encounter back at the White Lily’s hideout I am trying to avoid them. I don’t feel all warm and fuzzy with one on my tail already. Maybe at some point I will try to enter his territory just to see what he is up to. No one really knows what he is about to do and everyone is still afraid he will strike at us one day. Besides that I helped Caerwyn with coal for his crystal rods. Somehow he cannot face the elementals in the Wolfswood which guard the coal on his own. I also had to swing the pick with brute force as he is not that strong as I imagined. He is a great and skilled archer, but if he has to swing a pick, he loses. But well, then he got me to help, didn’t he?
Something also happened that made cheer and cry at the same time. Trouble returned. No, not trouble in general, but Trouble Tempest! The one I once loved and I thought I did not love him anymore and in no way I liked the way he showed himself up when I met him at Castle Mask. First he did not want to be recognized by me, then he was trying to avoid me and then he was trying to stun me with his magic. Well, just to check if it was not a ghost or illusion I kicked him where it really hurts; between his thighs. Well, not to mention I was pretty ed by him trying to stun me. The way he screamed and curled up on the ground though left no doubts it was really him and you bet, he felt it for days. I took care of it. Days later I met him in the tavern in Lor and a rather pleasant talk turned into us shouting at each other. To be blunt here, I told him I once loved him and his appearance confused me slightly and some feelings stirred up again. Our fight was about that he just slept with any women and did not give love a chance at all. That’s why I did not start anything with him and clearly he did not change at all regarding that matter. Well, his choice. I am only going to give myself to someone who truly loves me. At least we now know where we stand and can talk to each other again and it cleared quite some things up: I don’t love him anymore. Thinking about it now it is probably the best for both of us. We are merely friends so we can tease and shout at each other as much as we like without risking all too much. I know I cannot pull every stunt on him but well, most he will survive and our friendship won’t break that easily.
Now to mention something way more positive. I got a new blade from Trouble! It is quite a lovely rapier and it has a special coating on it which makes fighting evil aligned opponents a lot easier. I don’t know how it works in detail but if the coating gets in contacts with such an opponent a flame starts to rise and burns my opponent. If it was not good enough, I still had my two raw emeralds and I once already traded Maran a crystal rod of the fourth tier. So I handed him one of my emeralds and also handed him some platinum as payment so he would make some enchantment for my blade. After a week we had all ingredients and he successfully made it! The original blade was called “Mercykiller” and I adopted its name, kind of. I call my blade “Maiden’s Mercy” now. I already had plenty of opportunities to test it and it is lovely. Balancing wise it is not different from my old adamantium one, just the coating adds something really special to it and I know I will benefit from it in future as well.
However, I think this entry sums up pretty much what I have been doing in the past three years and I really hope for my next entry I will find time soon enough. Trying to write down what you did during three whole years is kind of hard, even to me. I just hope I will make some progress with my training and I really hope I won’t have to face that Pit Dweller again. I know I already cannot stand “him” and what he is after. Why am I always causing trouble?
*Phyress sighs slightly as she closes her journal. She taps her lower lip, eyeing the journal in her lap and after a moment she puts it back into her bag before she leaves her room to talk to her parents.*
-
*Phyress opens the door to her room at her parent’s house, steps into her rums and slams the door behind her. In her hands she holds a pair of new bracers and a smile is seen on her face, even though it seems like something is terribly bugging her. After she carefully puts them on her desk she takes off her formal dress and throws it on her bed. After she takes on some more casual clothes, she sits down cross-legged on her bed, right next to her dress, grabs the journal from under her bed and starts writing a new entry.*
-Mulnari, Seplar 23, 1455-
You don’t see me in a formal dress all too often, although there are occasions where I put such dresses on. Naturally I own several dresses and even more clothes or armor, but then for some things you rather look formal, like I did the other night and it was a very special occasion, at least to me, Richelle, Lywn and Tyrith. But well, before I write down how my night was I should start writing up the recent events from the beginning.
It has been quite some time since I saved Nel from Sashka’s forces, saved the kidnapped Jarred and saved Nel from Sashka again. Even though she seemed to be a tool back in time, controlled by one of the Ash’Khen, I stopped the second assault on Nel as well and also saved Richelle when Sashka was after the Heartstone which she hid in her old hideout where Richelle was doing some decorating. Oh and Ash’Khen? Basically Sashka was the tool of one as for some reason they were not able to enter Nel by themselves and therefore they recruited Sashka to do their work and find whatever they were after. Luckily I was able to stop Sashka back then. A few moments later a pit fiend showed up and took her dead body with it. While doing so the fiend left a scorch mark I did not took interest in at given time. To me it just seemed like the remains of a teleportation spell of some sorts so I did not really think about it, but things changed!
In the past few months rumors were spreading about pit fiends roaming these lands, mostly on Alindor and centered in the Sun Kingdom, especially around Lake Freis and Nel, but there were also sightings of them at the Dun Lake on Belinara, the spider cave close to Miritrix, and also the one or other place over on Dregar or Mistone. Also adventurers were saying that one fiend was seen on Molten Island. According to my sources, hence my sources were also attacked by them, they appeared all of a sudden in front of them, in a haze of fire and heat which was a result of the teleportation spell I guess, asked where they were and then attacked any people nearby, like Lance and Oma. I asked around for information regarding these sightings and soon found out that they looked like the one I and Caerwyn faced in Sashka’s old hideout. As there were only single fiends seen and never in a group I assumed that it was the very same I already knew. Well I don’t know it by name but you know because it did not invite me for tea, but you get the point. Due to the circumstances and them or it attacking innocent bystanders I posted several notes around Layonara, warning everyone about the recent attacks and to avoid these and naturally to report any sightings back to me. Argali helped me a lot in my investigations as several adventurers were telling her the rumors and she also had some ideas about it. For every scorch mark that was reported we pinned it on a map of Layonara. Basically most of them were around Nel, but we could not find any clear structure behind it. It probably had to do with the assault on Nel as one of these wanted to bring down Nel and get in possession of whatever it was after.
Caerwyn was also very helpful as we both heard about a scorch mark on the way from Mariner’s Hold to Fort Homestead. He investigated into this scorch mark and could not find anything about it until he examined it for the Al’Noth. Even though he has not the most knowledge about the Al’Noth he was able to feel the magic surrounding it, but he was not able to determine anything further. I sent a letter to Ell and asked her to do some research at Aragen’s Temple. Enclosed was a sketch of the pit dweller I saw back in the hideout. As the sightings were all over Layonara I called for a meeting of adventurers to discuss the sightings and maybe even find a clue. We knew almost nothing and probably the one knew more than the other regarding a specific sighting and whatsoever. Even before we held the meeting Trouble and I spotted another scorch mark in the spider cave. Trouble did not want to believe my story at first, but then he examined the mark for me once more. All of a sudden he backed off and told me he never wanted to get anywhere close to the mark again. I asked him what the matter was and he told me I was right about the mark. He could not tell me any specific about the mark, but he told me it was terribly out of place and should not belong to this plane. Well, so much for this. We now knew that it was something rather bad and pretty much out of place. And then it was time for the meeting.
We held the meeting in Mariner’s Hold and many adventurers showed up, and to my luck many known and loved faces, like Caerwyn, Fleur, Oma, Argali and even more. There are some people I trust more and some less. And these I can really trust without them blaming me for anything. Anyway, the meeting! We exchanged information regarding the sightings of the fiends and we got to know that they showed up all over Layonara, even though most were centered on Alindor. Well, no surprise if you ask me as I still thought it was only one pit dweller who still wanted to make it into Nel to get its fingers on whatever it was after. Unfortunately Ell did not find anything about the fiend at the library and my research did not go all too well, either. While I searched through the archives about anything that could be of interest for the pit dweller, I only found a note about an ancient project simply called “Project”. I made a copy of it nonetheless but I did not really think it of being valuable information. Anyway, while we were discussing about the nature of the fiends and their intentions and the question if it was just one or many, a guard of Nel approached our group and asked for one Miss Phyress Sylphide. Well, that’s me! He reported that there was a fresh scorch mark in the outskirts of Nel and that it was very fresh. Farmers who lived there reported the sighting to the council in Nel immediately and since I am in charge of the investigations in my home town a messenger was sent to me to inform me about the most recent sighting of a fiend around Nel. Together with those who were gathered he hurried over to said location with the messenger and spotted the scorch mark. While Oma and Fleur were examining the nature of the scorch mark together with other casters, we questioned the farmers who saw this strange occurrence of a fiend being summoned right in front on their land, scaring the hell out of them just with its presence, looking around, groaning and them disappearing again, leaving nothing but a scorch mark. They did not tell us anything new so I focused on those of us who are able to bend the Al’Noth to their will.
I don’t know what they did, but they did something very, very strange and from what I understood they wanted to reach the fiend through the mark and make it summon itself to the mark again. Don’t ask me, I have no idea about these things at all. Then without any warning something reached through the mark and showed up right in front of us. The arrogant little maiden Avariel. No, she isn’t really a maiden at all, not with her attitude, but then she was something like a holy warrior from another plane, like the fiends who showed up all over Layonara recently, seemingly to be in search for something. Well all I can say about her is that her name is Avariel and that she got wings and a fair skin. Besides that she is an arrogant little thing and does not think of us human all too highly. However, she showed up as we were screwing around with her marker. Apparently the scorch marks function as some kind of markers for them. The “maidens” and the pit dwellers are in some kind of war and the fiends fled from their home plane and made it up to our world. From Avariel we know that there are nine fiends in total. She almost wanted to vanish again as we did not have any valuable information for her, besides that she thought we were not worth wasting her time anyway. This changed when I told her I knew what at least one of them was after and gestured towards the direction of Nel which for some reason they cannot enter. Avariel told me there is some kind of barrier around it but she did not really seem to care about it. She did not seem to care about us or our world at all, but then she probably did not know adventurers like us before. It may be her battle and she was sent from her plane to ours to defeat these fiends, but then it is our world and at least I dislike if others take decisions for me which might also be world-altering. Before she finally vanished she performed some kind of ritual which made us her eyes. Yeah I know it is a rather creepy thought that she can see everything I see, even in very private and intimate moments. She told us she could only see through our eyes when one of the nine were around us, sense its presence and then hurry over to defeat it. Not that such a thing is really new to me as I am already the eyes of some cult, although only if I wear the ring one of the servants gave to me for recovering some crystal for his master back in Haven when I was still young and inexperienced. Oh well, looks like next I am going to be someone’s nose or mouth, or skin or whatever. Anyway, before Avariel faded away we told her that we would do our own investigations as this was our world after all. She simply shrugged at us as we were nothing more than pesky insects to her after all and wouldn’t be of any help to her, other than being her eyes and we were not allowed to mess around with her marks again.
Now knowing the name of my “enemy” I did some researched about them again, but neither I nor Ell were successful in our researches. It was like there was no knowledge accessible about the Ash’Khen at all. We did not know any of their weaknesses, the pit they came from, nor their conflict with the “maidens”. All I knew was that at least one of them wanted to take over Nel and search for whatever it was after. That could be a place, a weapon or a powerful artifact. I thought of the latter and I now knew for sure that there was something worth looking for in Nel and that this something is probably the key for an easy solution in this affair. Knowing Nel was still in danger I had to find a way to secure the city somehow. But how? The White Lily still consisted in its three members plus me and the guards were still weakened from the last attack and could probably not stand another assault on its own. I thought about it for days and then I got a brilliant idea! Why not fight them back with their own weapons? I knew there were at least three factories where they built all those powerful constructs and I still had the Heartstone I picked up from Sashka’s body before the fiend took her with it. There had to be a way to reprogram the still inactive constructs and let them defend Nel from any attackers. I did a little research and I thought it as best to contact the Goranites about it. If it is about technique and constructs they are your best bet. Therefore I sent a letter to the Windmill Academy which is located by the Rusty River here on Alindor. Ah well, here is the copy of the letter I sent, and their response:
Dear followers of the Father Invention,
Recently there have been some strange sightings around the city of Nel and the Lake Freis within the Sun Kingdom. Also there have been more Pit Dwellers reported on Belinara and I bet even on other continents as well. The Fiends are actually not the main reason I write this letter to you. You receive this letter as I need your wisdom and experience with some constructs
A few years ago Nel has been under assault of some bandits, as well as constructs who worked for one of the Pit Dwellers which now roam around in these lands. These constructs can, from what I know, be activated with a certain device, called the Heartstone, which is currently in my possession.
I fear Nel will be under attack shortly again as the Fiend was looking for something which is located somewhere within the city walls. Just no one knows what it really is. We only know it cannot get to it itself and therefore Nel was already attacked once. As the lines of the guards are still weakened and not strong enough to hold the city once more, I am asking you to examine one still intact, yet deactivated, construct. My plan is to make them guard the city, instead of attacking it and I need your help to "re-program" them.
I know you are blessed with the knowledge about constructs and golems and I would really appreciate if you could send one of your engineers to Nel. Also I could arrange an escort if you prefer. Naturally I would donate to your academy and pay for anything you need, given you answer my call and aid me in this matter. For your help I will also make sure you receive at least one still intact construct for your academy. I don't know if they are of good quality but I bet they are fine enough for engineering and studying.
I write you this letter on behalf of the council of Nel and the White Lily.
I look forward to hearing from you.
Yours sincerely,
Phyress Sylphide
Dear Miss Phyress,
It is with some intrigue I reply to this. We did of course hear of the recent attack by said golems and constructs, and had intended on sending a representative to investigate, however word soon reached us the attack was over swiftly.
We will be sending one of our students to you, a Brimwattle Buller, to investigate.
He will advise once he reaches Nel, and if you could please give him access to said constructs, and if possible, any remains of those also destroyed for reverse-engineering purposes, and also any tools and equipment he may need.
Reprogramming is always a possibility, although it does depend on the form of programming used and how it was inserted.
Our representative will of course endeavor to make that a possibility.
For the sparkle of invention,
The Goranite Clergy.
You bet I was very happy to receive such a reply. I therefore contacted Jerred of the Purple Worm Trading Company as he still owes me the one or other favor for first securing the trading routes around Nel and secondly saving him from certain death when he was kidnapped to force the council of Nel to release Sashka in exchange for his life. So I moved with Jerred, Richelle, Tyrith, Lywn and some others to one of the factories and together we transported one still intact and two destroyed constructs to our hideout. It was the safest place available as the citizens are not all too keen on the constructs after the attack, yet. Also very few even knew about the hideout and then it was secured by Richelle, Lywn and Tyrith. Once we finished all the preparations I sent another letter to the Goranite Clergy, stating we had everything prepared and Mister Buller could come over to Nel for his researches. A few weeks later the cute little gnome arrived and we showed him the golems and he immediately started his research. We gave him everything he needed so he was able to make good progress with his examinations about the constructs and their activation by using the Heartstone.
It took him some time but eventually he sent a messenger to me while I was in Mariner’s Hold with Caerwyn, Argali and Fleur. We were currently discussing the scorch marks when the messenger interrupted and handed me a note from Brimwattle. It seemed like he made quite some progress and told me to move over to the hideout so he could show me his results. So together with Argali, Caerwyn and Fleur I hurried over to the hideout where the gnome was pacing around, waiting for us, all eager to let me know about his results. We followed him to the room where I once defeated Sashka in our duel and in front of us we saw a huge activated constructs, seemingly alive and we took a step back when we saw it. It was the very same golem we moved over here a few weeks ago, but now it came alive! Mister Buller told us not to worry as he managed to reprogram and to activate it. He also told me we no longer need the Heartstone to activate the constructs he modified. They would listen to whoever he programmed them for. The constructs looked lovely and this one was modified to obey to his commands. He showed us it worked properly before we started talking business. As part of our deal this construct was going to be property of the Windmill Academy, along with the remains of the destroyed constructs for further studies. So while we were still in the hideout, discussing even more technical details with Brimwattle, an exhausted messenger approached and gave me to know that he had urgent news from Richelle. She was on a scouting mission when she saw something that ought to need my fullest attention. I told the messenger to move it already and together with Argali, Caerwyn and Fleur I followed the man over to Richelle’s position. Even before we saw Richelle all of us could see that there was something terribly wrong around Nel. There was an unnatural darkness covering the back of a mountain close to Nel. Usually there is nothing important about this mountain, but now the backside was shrouded by a darkness that rendered everything pitch-black. Carefully we made our way over to Richelle’s position and she told me what was going on here.
Richelle was just patrolling with some guard outside of Nel when she saw that unnatural darkness and headed for it. She told us that she saw some movements into the mountain. Inside the mountain? Well as far as I knew there was no entrance I was aware of, but then I stood corrected by Richelle. The ones who made it inside used some Hulks and dug some sort of tunnel into the mountain. We did not know why they were doing it. We only knew that on the other side of the mountain was Nel and seeing the troops were armed we were not all too positive about their intentions. Some of them were undead, too! Richelle wanted to let me know before we started taking any actions. We agreed on attacking this threat. Richelle and the guards took the right flank, Argali, Fleur, Caerwyn and I took the left. We sneaked up upon them, using the shadows and got them by surprise. It was a clean and fast battle and most of them did not realize until it was over for them. Sadly a few of our guards died, too. Their deaths should not have happened but they will be honored for their deeds, because of what they died for, and trust me, their deaths probably saved a lot of other lives. Still it should not have happened. But then we had to fight off dwarves, some undead creatures, mercenaries and some constructs as well. I am glad we had Argali with us as she was able to stand the ground easily and made it possible for me to leap attacks into the constructs that were by far the biggest threat. Once the battle was over Richelle took care of the wounded and dead guards of Nel, while my team entered the tunnel the dug into the mountain. We headed down the tunnel for what seems like days and soon found ourselves in a rather large cave-system which was also guarded by constructs and other mercenaries. The mercenaries somehow looked like Sashka’s former allies, but then she was long dead already. I am just glad I had a trained group with me so we made it easily through all the guards and pressed on. On our way deeper into the mountain we found some dead guards and also some destroyed constructs. It seemed like they either did not have their Hulks under control, or they met some sort of resistance down here as well. Not that I really cared about their fate at all.
We made our way through the different caves and soon found us in front of another tunnel again which we naturally followed down. The deeper we moved in, the creepier and more unnatural it became. The solid rock turned soon into man-made walls. This one looked like an almost forgotten realm and was pretty much out of place if you ask me. The whole place had an eerie feeling about it and it looked ancient. Naturally to sum the eerie feeling up we had to put some undead creatures back to rest who were also roaming about. Among these creatures it was like a shadow was watching us and luring us farther in. When we passed the ruins of what was once a tower of some sorts, we found a closed door which was trapped. While Argali, Caerwyn and Fleur were securing me I picked the lock with some effort and opened the door. Just when I opened it the shadow showed itself in front of the ruins! It gestured me to fully open the door and to follow the hallway behind it. It really tried to lure me in, like it wanted us to move through that door, for whatever reason and purpose. But do I trust a shadow easily? I tried to talk to it, but it only replied “Come .... Seeeee” while it gestured towards the door. Fleur slowly approached me from behind and whispered into my ear that this is not a shadow, but someone else. I nodded to her and she backed up a little again. I tried to get to know more about the shadow but it was not very talkative at all. And then it showed itself. It either dropped its illusion or Fleur caused this by dispelling the illusion. But what I now saw made me gasp. Sashka! Someone must really hate me for having me to face her again! It was Sashka in flesh! Well, more or less as she did not look all too alive any longer. As I already said, after she died one of the Ash’Khen took her lifeless body with it to wherever they are hiding and it seems like they reanimated her, not resurrected her. She looked a bit different now, but she was still the same old, blaming me for what happened to her. It seems like the Ash’Khen only have power over the dead and not the living so they were only able to bring her back as an undead creature and not as a human being as she was before. But her attitude did not change at all. She was still working for those fiends and she apparently knew a lot more about this place than all of us four knew together. She thanked me for opening the one door as in her form she was not able to do it as it was warded against undead creatures or so and she needed me to open it for her. And now it was on her to lift the second ward. Second ward? Well we followed her to the second door through the hallway and stopped in front of it. She told us to open the door and so we did. I opened the door and peeked through the opening and got almost blinded by what I saw.
In front of me I saw a huge chamber with some sort of a magical ward, enclosing the center of it in a perfect circle. A platform with some sort of a teleport was located in the middle of the chamber. To my left there also was a rather large crystal located, also inside the protected circle. Sashka told us that no one alive is able to break the circle. Only undead creatures or constructs may be able to break it and she needed us to break the first one so she could break this. She told us that once she takes a step into it the protection will fall and the Ash’Khen will show up and step through the portal. The Ash’Khen built this chamber centuries ago as some sort of an escape route and therefore is a one-way-only portal. Once they all stepped through it they would close it from the other side which would result in the destruction of Nel. Swell. From what she told us I got to know that the citizens of Nel were not all too happy with a portal set up by fiends right under their beloved city. Therefore their most powerful spellcasters set up a protecting-circle that prevented them to enter it. The portal itself draws its power from the crystal which is also enclosed by the ward. So once Sashka lets the still remaining ward fall down hell will break loose and the Ash’Khen will destroy Nel by closing the portal behind them. Lovely. I think Sashka loves to torture others and see their helpless faces when she confronts them with such news. To tease us even more she gave us an hour to think of our next steps wisely before she would finally lift the last remaining spell.
Fleur and Caerwyn started studying the nature of the spell but they could not really find out anything about it that Sashka already told us. She also seemed way too sure about our failure and was only waiting for us to make a mistake which would be our certain death and would also mean the end of Nel and all its innocent citizens. But how to proceed from here? We thought about a way to disable the portal without bringing the protection against the Ash’Khen down. We thought about a precise placed arrow on the crystal but it was deemed to fail or bring down the barrier which was a big no-no. Also we thought about bringing it down for a few seconds so we could run to the crystal, destroy it and then activate the barrier again. She had a lot of ideas but they were connected with too many risk und simply not doable. Even if we did not do anything it would put Nel into great danger as she fiends want to use this portal direly as the maidens cut their way off to leave this plane on their own. I don’t know how they did it but the portal they set up centuries ago seemed to be their only way to safety again. We were still discussing when our time was over and we heard Sashka slowly making her way towards all, snickering the whole time. She asked me if we came up with a decision, knowing we did not have a clue about what do at all. She loved to see us this way and you bet she enjoyed it. It was like the sweet essence of life to her. She was the last one I wanted to ask for assistance to strike a deal with her masters by breaking the ward for her, letting them use the portal and to leave the closing of the portal to us, but she simply laughed at my proposal and reminded us about us being Avariel’s eyes. She also was kind enough to let us know that the Ash’Khen will soon find a way to get rid of her. Not that I really like Avariel, but being her eyes rendered us more or less safe of them. They were not all too keen on facing Avariel just yet. And she also was kind enough to remind me about me being responsible for her death so she would not help me saving Nel at all. She just wanted to see me desperate, trying to find a way out.
She made some gestures and all of a sudden we were surrounded by several of her undead minions which attacked us immediately, while she slowly walked toward the barrier. I saw her grinning at me while she passed me slowly, fully aware I was busy staying alive and fighting off her minion. Luckily Argali stepped up and focused on my opponent, too, so I leaped an attack into Sashka. It was a powerful attack, but Sashka did not seem to be bothered at all and simply arched a brow at me with a mischievous grin on her lips. She still stood there, likely unharmed and not even knocked down to her behind! I knock Primals down with such an attack! But what does she do? She just kept in grinning at me, like I was no threat to her at all. And then she engaged. I fought her before, but it was nothing compared to our previous fight before! She was darn strong and I had problems to block her attacks, not to mention being able to find a weak spot in her defense and take advantage of it. I know I am not bad with my rapier, but the elegance which what she wanted to end my life, making it slow and painful though, was impressive and shocking at the same time. She gave me a hard time and slowly she wounded me more and more. When I was already bleeding heavily she just stood in front of me, grinning while I fought for my very life. No, I could not die! Not in this moment and never to her! I was her successor in the past and I would not allow her to kill me! Not now! Not her! I felt weak due to my lack of blood and with every heartbeat more of it was pouring out of my veins. There I was, kneeling in front of her more dead than alive and her over me, hardly even scratched. I was no match to her, not alone. All of a sudden I felt power surge through me, renewing my whole body and I leaped another attack into her. This time I got her by surprise and almost managed to knock her down. Caerwyn threw a potion at me and saved my life, while Fleur and Argali fought off her remaining servants and now they were focusing Sashka as well. Even with combined forces she gave us a very hard time and I did not bleed that much for a good time and to be honest, it is nothing I’d wish my worst enemies and that should mean a lot! We fought her off for what seemed like ages until we finally pierced through her. With a look of surprise and something that almost looked like peace she ended up on my blade before she turned to dust and fell to ground. I picked up some of the dust before the wind blew it away and it was creepy when her remains seemed to linger around me for a short moment before it finally got carried away. She was gone forever now.
Sashka. I will never forget her. As much as I hated her, I respected her. I know some would frown up upon this, seeing all the trouble she caused in her life, especially around Nel with her attacks on caravans, the kidnapping of Jerred, the assault on Nel and probably some more unknown deeds I don’t even want to think about. I think I don’t have to explain how much I hated her for what she did. But why do I respect her? Well I mainly respect her for who she was if you don’t look on all the crimes she did in her whole life. She was skilled with the rapier like I am and always had a set goal in mind. Unfortunately it differed from my goals so we did not go along all too well. She knew what she wanted and took every necessary step to reach it. She was ambitious like I am. She once told me we were like sisters and not all too different. Both of us know what we want and if we really want something bad, we try everything to reach it. We were much alike. Our only big difference was that she was on the one side of the blade, I am on the other. If things were different it might have ended up the other way. I wish ending her life was a pleasure for me, but in fact it was not. I felt pity for her. Being an undead creature is nothing you really want, unless you are a crazy mage and want to enter lich-hood. I am not all too certain she wished to live the life the Ash’Khen chose for her. By killing her I released her and I think she did not mind. We are much alike and I am rather dead than being a living dead. It is a horrible thought. Rest in peace, Sashka. I respected you and will never forget what trouble you caused.
Once Sashka was dead we decided on leaving this place for now. We still had no idea what to do next as without Sashka we had no connection to the Ash’Khen and at some point they would simply try to burn down Nel or send some stupid lackey to break the barrier for them. Well that unlucky person won’t survive it and the ward will rip said person apart, but it will also disable the barrier which means the Ash’Khen will set up a nice firework all over Nel. Alright, we now had some answers, but even more unanswered questions now. Oh joy. Before we departed we agreed on meeting again soon enough to discuss about how to proceed in this matter later on.
We agreed on meeting again in a week. That gave me enough time to hurry over to Nel and settle some things, as well as to sleep about some. I really had no clue about how to proceed from here. Every solution seemed to be a dead end and like all of our ideas ended up in a worst-case-scenario which means the destruction of Nel and I wanted to prevent that at any cost. One thing I took care of once I was back in Nel. As the entrance to the ancient chamber was now left without any protections it would be an easy thing for the Ash’Khen to send in a poor soul to bring down the last remaining protection that prevents the fiends to bring death over all Nel by stepping through the portal. I am glad Brimwattle managed to reprogram one of the constructs and he told me he could easily fix more for me, given the payment was alright. Furthermore it should not take him as long as last time as he now knew exactly how to proceed in reprogramming the constructs. This being said I asked Jerred for his help with the transport of two more constructs and he agreed on it. So together with the Purple Wyrm we transported two more constructs to our hideout where Brimwattle was already awaiting us with a gleam in his eyes. He probably is a devoted follower of Goran and loves to fix things for his life. I told him the constructs should only obey to Richelle, Lywn, Tyrith and me. Well naturally they should listen to him for the time being as well as I needed him to transport them over to the chamber after all. I instructed him to place one guardian at the first door and the second construct at the second door. They were also instructed to let no one dead or alive or undead for that matter walk past them and secure the place at any cost. Only members of the White Lily were allowed to pass. With these instructions I was able to sleep more easily at nights as the place was well guarded again and only a fool would try to sneak past them.
Other news about Connor also reached my ears. Rumors were going around that he was investigating in this matter as well. From what I heard he is an expert about portals and teleportation so he was a safe bet on the scorch marks. It did not take long and I received a letter from Connor to meet and exchange information about what was going on. He had some valuable information and so did I. Try to settle for a date with him though! Both of us are usually very busy so we did not find a suitable time just yet. Well fine with me as it gave me more time for further investigations and the meeting with Caerwyn, Fleur and Argali came up in a few days anyway. We send out word that we needed any help on a specific matter. We did not spread word about what we found as I did not want to have fools heading into the chamber and exploring it on their own. Well also I set up two guards of Nel in front of the entrance into the mountain. I had to prevent anyone from intruding and screwing things up big time. And then it was time for the second meeting.
Almost the same people showed up as last time and offered their help to investigate into this matter. There were a lot of questions and most of them I could answer easily about the maiden, the Ash’Khen and the portal. I also got to know that a group around Fleur managed to kill one of them so that left us with only eight Ash’Khen. From what I heard the fight was pretty touch and they only managed to defeat one single Ash’Khen with Avariel’s help. I don’t want to imagine how this group would stand against the unleashed force of eight Ash’Khen right in front of their goal, the ancient chamber. I somehow doubt Avariel would make the difference in such a battle. They would simply kill us all, reanimate one of us again, lead that someone through the barrier which causes it to fall and clear the path for the pit dwellers to use their portal to safety while hell breaks loose over Nel. A lovely thought, really. I told them they could best see it for themselves and together we made our way to the outskirts of Nel where we were stopped by two guards who were more or less paying attention and looked rather bored. Bet you behaved when I was threatening them with some combat training with Tyrith. You can say about Tyrith what you want, but you don’t want to face her in combat with her greatsword, like with Arngrim. The two would have made a cute couple and sometimes I think they are related in some kind of way. I never asked Arngrim about if he had any family or a daughter for that matter. However, they reported that Richelle came by earlier in company of a little fellow as well as two golems. According to the guards the little fellow was sitting on top of one golem and it pretty much suited Brimwattle. Lovely, so Richelle and Brimwattle fixed two golems in time and managed to position them down in the ancient halls. After Oma finished teasing the guards I eventually managed to lead the lot of us down into the caves.
I was rather glad when I saw the caves were populated by those Hulks again. It just made things harder for anyone trying to get to the ancient halls. Well alright we had to defeat them in order to descend further down but it was still good to have them secure the place, even if they were not aware of it.
Once down we saw something lurking in front of the first door with glowing eyes which pierced right through the eerie darkness surrounding this place. As we carefully moved closer to the thing I saw the outline of a huge construct. Lovely! It looked threatening and detected our presence like a hundred meter ahead of it. I told them to hold it for a moment and moved right under the massive construct. I knew it was one of our golems else I would not have moved that close to it, knowing it could tear me apart without any struggle. I ordered the construct to let only those currently present with me pass. It opened the door for us and I gestured everything to get through the door. Once they were on the other side I followed them and the construct closed the door behind us again. Bet you at least half of them were impressed by the construct and I was proud about what I reached so far. Sashka and I differ on that matter though. While she used the constructs to try to take over Nel, I use them to secure Nel. I know the guards at the entrance were not all too keen on them and after what happened a few years ago it really is understandable. However, we moved over to the second construct and I told it not to attack us and to protect the first door from the other side, so no one was able to leave or enter this hallway. This way we were able to do all the necessary researches without being be disturbed or interrupted by treasure hunters who made it past the probably sleeping guards at the entrance to the tunnel.
Once we were at the second door I told everyone not to make it past the doorwell. I did not want to risk anyone accidentally bringing down the barrier and death upon us. Well the one who brings it down won’t have to worry about it as the massive energy in the ward will rip him or her apart before he realizes what happens to him. And so the spellcasters started examining the ward and the portal itself. Long story short, we were unsuccessful and they came up with the same ideas as we had and did not find out all too many about the nature of the ward or portal either. The circle was probably set up by several mages and it was not easy to bring it down, yet doable. The trick was to bring it down long enough to destroy the portal and make it out alive. And if the Ash’Khen are aware of the destruction of the portal then death will reign over Nel anyway as they have nothing to lose and will use this plane as their fortress. What we did not notice last time though was a paining that shows the Ash’Khen forcing humans to build up the chamber for them. They have been on this plane centuries ago, but why? Did they expect the war with the maidens or have they been in conflict with them for centuries now? I honestly don’t know and I doubt Avariel will give me any hints. Besides, can she be trusted either? It seems like she is not telling the whole truth at all. There are too many things she knows and is not willing to share.
However, a few days later I was just in Nel at the Purple Wyrm Trading Company discussing the recent happenings with the fiends around Nel when the door to our room opened and a man entered who introduced himself as Connor. I think I saw him on the one or other occasion, like when Plenarius gathered those around him to the small pond above Haven to talk about the upcoming war and our preparations. Well I told him everything I found out in the past few weeks. I told him about our encounter with Avariel, but more important the hall which held the portal. Connor asked me if it was a room with four pillars, some steps to a podium and a portal on top of it. I was surprised he already knew about how the room looked like and I asked him whether he has been there or not. He told me he was, but was not at the same time. Someone try to understand mages, really. It actually made sense when he got into more details about it. Connor is an expert if it comes to portals and spells related to it and is probably the one with most knowledge about them. He told me that he was examining all those scorch marks on Layonara and that he was able to look through them. When he did so he always saw a glimpse of the room, before he was redirected elsewhere. All pointed to this one chamber and he thinks the ward I mentioned is the cause of their problems. It looks like the Ash’Khen tried to portal right into this ancient hall, but did not manage to get through the barrier that prevents them from entering it. This also explains why they always seemed lost when they showed up somewhere else on Layonara and asked where it was. It all makes sense now. They tried to make their way into the chamber by a teleportation spell, but it reflected and ended up somewhere else. Connor also asked me about my relation to Avariel and I told him I don’t really like her with her she is so almighty and us mortals being just lesser forms of life in this world. I am glad Connor thinks about her the same way as I do. He also told me she seemed to be frustrated she could not locate the place and Connor got the impression that she wanted to direly find that place. This also leads to another question. Does Avariel wish the place for themselves? Right now it seems like both sides wish the portal for themselves, just Avariel does not know about its location yet which I am glad for and the Ash’Khen already seem to know about its location, but did not find a way to get past the barrier, but keep on trying. Anyway, Connor and I agreed on doing a little more research before we head down to the chamber so he can get a full look on it and study the nature of the portal and the ward. Connor wanted to contact a few of his old friends and the Reaching. I wanted to search in the archives again for more valuable information, other than plans for working shifts and the like. Well I already did my research and I did not find anything more about its history, unfortunately. It is like no one besides the Ash’Khen know about this place. No name on the documents rang a bell either and as the project took place centuries ago I somehow doubt one of them is still alive. So all my hopes are one Connor for now. Maybe I should contact him again and ask if he found out anything about the place at all. And then we still have to settle for a date to descend into the heart of Nel and find out as much as we can about the portal. I am positive Connor is able to find out some more than the mages did last time. But alas, only time will tell.
Bet you, there is even something that happened worth being mentioned that is not related to Nel and the Ash’Khen at all! You know I love good duels and I usually have a hard time finding someone who either has time or is not afraid of me. I don’t know but some adventurers think I am like a madman, well madwoman in my case with my blade and they could not defeat me so they rather avoid being in a duel with me. So I thought it was nice to have a recurring event, like every two years or so, to meet with those interested at the arena in Fort Vehl to fight various duels. I therefore invented the Night of Duels, an event where those skilled with a blade fight duels to find out who is the best among us and announce him or her as our champion. It was rather tricky to come up with a ruleset as I know some people try to find a way to bypass these rules. Most of the rules were about forbidding any use of magic and bet you, next time I stuff everyone in a copper plate or simple clothing, hand them their favorite weapon made out of copper and then let them fight their duels and make sure they hand me all their equipment for the time being. Well I asked a little around and someone was kind enough to set up some strange device that absorbs any spells being cast so it prevents casters to cast their spells. I think some did not like the rules and therefore did not show up but hey, I don’t force people to come, I just give them a in my opinion good opportunity to test their skill with the blade. It was not a duel among mages who throw spells at each other or archers who shoot little holes in their opponent, but about bladework. To round the event up I asked Steel of the Leringard Arms & Inn for their services in catering and he agreed on supplying the Night of Duels with food and drinks. It really was a lovely event and in the end G’ork won and was announced as our champion for this Night of Duels. G’ork was without any doubt the best of those who showed up. I came right behind him and only lost my duel against G’ork. It was nice to see how different fighters use different tactics to win a duel. Duchess was always running around, trying to get her opponent on the wrong feet and take an advantage of the resulting attacks of opportunity. She pretty much kicked Tyra around in the arena who used a more defensive stance and therefore gave her a lot of opportunities to hit her as she was not mobile enough to dodge under Duchess’ blades. A few duels later Duchess was my opponent and it should be an interesting battle. Between us were like 20 meter and once the referee opened the duel she raced towards me, trying to get my back. She was probably not aware of my keen senses in a fight and I wouldn’t give her a chance to catch me flatfooted or give her any opportunity to attack me while racing past me. She quickly came closer and tightened the grip on my blade and got ready to strike her back. Just when she was about to pass me I engaged and she ran into my blade. Continuing with her run and hit tactic she ran away from me, but I cut in her way and attacked her while running. We both were quick on our feet and she dodged a lot of my attacks, but I think she was surprised that I mastered her technique and therefore made the hunter the hunted. Already wounded she ran towards the one of the pillars and hid behind it. I backed away to the wall so she could not attack me from behind. She was hiding out there somewhere and I was not able to spot her. It was just a matter of time till she attacked and I had to pay attention to any noise. The first strike was deemed to be hers, but I know I can rely on my reflexes. And then it happened. As she attacked me she lost her cover and it seemed like we were doing things simultaneously. She leaped into me while I aimed my blade at her and tried to get out of the way of her blade. Neither one of us managed to dodge the other’s attack, but I also got her by surprise and ended the duel. It was a lovely duel and we both can learn from each other. If the practices her skill with the weapon even more it will be an awesome duel! I should rather continue my training, but figuring out the techniques I am after is rather though in this moment. Anyway, it was a lovely night and all who participated are looking forward to being around for the next Night of Duels.
I think there is one more thing worth being mentioned and this one thing is related to my formal dress and me coming home late. I was just sitting around in Port Hempstead and was talking to Fleur about various things as a guard of Nel approached us and asked for my attention as he had an important message for me. I first thought the Ash’Khen tried to take over Nel again or simply destroyed it or whatever, but judging his expression it was neither of the above. He seemed to be quite cheery and in a good mood. So together with Fleur we sailed over to Alindor and escorted us to the Council Hall in Nel. There we had to wait a little longer before we were greeted by another guard who told us to follow the hallway and enter the large hall. Having no idea why I was summoned here I carefully peeked through the door and saw several citizens of Nel standing around in their lovely suits and dresses, chatting to each other while they were obviously waiting for something to happen, or for someone. I entered the room in my dress and everyone fell silent and gazed towards me. In this moment I felt so small and vulnerable. Flushing by all the attention I carefully moved on and saw Richelle, Tyrith and Lywn standing in front of the mayor and some members of the council I hardly know and gestured me over. I asked Tyrith what was going on here but she simply shrugged at me. Obviously she had no idea either. She was pouting anyway as I was the last one of them who showed up and those usually get the most attention and Tyrith wanted to be the one who was late. The mayor asked for everyone’s attention and everyone fell silent again. I could hear myself swallow. The mayor and the council thanked the White Lily for all their help over all these years, beginning with securing the trade routes around Nel again, to the recent dealings with the fiends. His speech was lovely and I found myself blushing the one or other time. To show us the gratitude of the town we all were announced as Shields of Nel. Shield of Nel is a title they don’t give to just anyone and they did not name anyone a Shield of Nel for quite some time now. Furthermore they declared this day as the White Lily day, a day which now functions as a holiday in and around Nel. Once she cheering stopped a woman of the council stepped up and removed all our bracers, before she went on to replace them with new ones. The bracers are lovely and of good quality. They are like my old bracers that improved my agility. These also make me a little smarter and strengthen my will to easier overcome my fears. And this was not everything! While the lady donned my new bracers the mayor also announced me as Advisor to the War and Defense Council of Nel. It does not happen very often you see me speechless, but this was definitely one of these rate moments! I did not know what to say at all and Richelle, Tyrith and Lywn were also stunned. We made it! We all put so many efforts into establishing Richelle’s band of merchants here in Nel and we finally made a name within the Sun Kingdom and especially Nel. After the ceremony we partied all night with the crowd and the whole night was breathtaking. It is just sad Caerwyn was not able to make it. I would have loved to dance with him in this night.
It is not over yet, though. Nel might be safe for now, but the Ash’Khen are still roaming around freely while Avariel tries to hunt them down and then there is still the portal right in the heart of Nel. Just like no one in Nel knows about it and I am glad for it. If someone spreads word about the portal and the real nature of the attacks on Nel chaos will break out which neither the guards, nor the White Lily is able to manage. Even if we enjoy a good reputation these days we don’t have numbers to be a big help to Nel or the Sun Kingdom in general. I should discuss this matter with Richelle though, as it is her band of mercenaries and she is their leader after all. But the bigger the band becomes, the more effective they will become. Right now there are three members and two constructs. It should be more. But as I already said, it is Richelle’s decision. I am just a friend who helped her out establishing the White Lily in Nel as I owed her for the time I travelled around with them and also for her showing me various techniques with my blade. If Richelle needs my help regarding the Lily, may it be about expanding it or just helping them out, well then she can count on me. My work is not quite done here after all, yet.
But well, we’ll see what happens next... [/i]
*Phyress just manages to close her journal before she curls up on her bed and falls into a deep slumber.*
-
*Phyress sits down at the small camp in Fort Gorge and warily eyes Angela and Alantha for a moment before she takes a bite off an apple and takes out her journal, ink and quill. After making sure they are busy otherwise she opens her journal, flips through it to find a blank page and starts writing a new entry.*
-Sunra, Novlar 1, 1456-
The past few months really have been rather eventful, just like the exploration into the Shadow Temple last night. I actually did not expect much to happen when I followed Trouble’s note to Fort Gorge. The note simply said meet in Fort Gorge as soon as possible and so I hurried there. Well I really had to hurry to make it in time as I was still around Prantz. Why I was in Prantz recently I am going to explain a little later. First I want to focus on my latest exploration into the Shadow Temple in the Orsgaunt Mountains. Even though I hurried I did not find anyone in Fort Gorge. I asked a little around and got to know that a group of adventurers left like a few hours before I arrived. Taking my bet on they headed farther into the mountains past all these fire giants, I waited at the campfire for their return. At least that way I was able to hear the story of their latest adventure. Oddly I only waited there for an hour before Storold, Amanda, Trouble, Ell, Alantha and Angela returned to the campfire. Sadly Amanda fell to some pit dwellers and therefore they headed back for Amanda to recover at the secure spot in Fort Gorge. Naturally Angela started teasing Trouble and me about me being his lover and whatsoever. But hey I know Angela, she is just making fun and you don’t have to take her all too serious. I don’t really take serious what she usually is babbling about as it is mostly teasing and making fun anyway, but her skill with the rapier is impressive. She is the most skilled person I ever met with a rapier and she can beat the hell out of me. I really mean it. If I listen to what people say then I am skilled in comparison to others, but if I compare myself to her then I am a wimp and the most unskilled person on whole Layonara. I know I am exaggerating, but the truth is that I see her as the most skilled person with the blade and I still have a lot to learn to ever reach such a skill with my blade. Also I am curious about what kind of rapier she uses at all. I use a blade originally called “Mercykiller”, but I call it “Maiden’s Mercy” which is also enhanced with the strongest acid enhancement around. Bet you hers is way better than mine though, but I love my blade as it is right now, especially due to its special coating. I don’t really need a rapier made out of mithril at the moment anyway, besides it is a long exhausting journey to reach it far down in the Deep anyway. But well, back to my original topic, the adventure!
While Amanda recovered from her recent death and Angela was teasing Trouble and me, Aerimor passed by as well and we teamed up, once Amanda was fully herself again. We all prepared and then headed into the Shadow Temple, once we took care of some fire giants, as well as some monks, until we reached their monastery. Is it a real monastery? I don’t know for sure, but I will call it a monastery anyway. They are monks and they usually belong to a monastery of some kind. It was not like with Trouble, Ell, Amanda and Drexia when we headed there last time. At some point we had to turn around and leave the monastery for our own sake. However, we dispatched those who tried to stop us quickly and we soon found ourselves in the lower levels of the monastery, a place I’ve never been before and I have to say it is a very interesting place and I should do some researches about its origin. Pretty much as with the one tomb down in the cave on Tilmar where the Al’Noth is all upside-down. Well, down in the monastery we had to fight strange elemental fogs. They looked like shadows of themselves and rather empty. Due to their consistence it was hard to harm them as they had no body at all and therefore I was not able to harm them physically. It was like fighting fog. You can see exactly the small particles swirling around where your blade cut through the air, but nothing else ever happens. To my luck they were not immune to elemental damage though, so I was able to defeat them with the enhancement and enchantment on my blade, luckily. I tried my very best do foresee their movements and dodge right under their attacks, but sometimes I was just too slow, even now where my anticipation improved a great deal. More about my training later though. However, if the shadows hit, then they hit hard and I fear that without all those protections casted by the mages and Ell I’d be long dead already. They seemed to try draining the life out of us. Luckily we were protected against such attempts though. The whole exploration was very interesting, yet scary with all those shadows lurking about and we also met some other sorts of elementals, along with more monks who were no thread compared to the shadows though. Without Angela and the Ravens it would have looked way different though. I don’t know if we fully explored the lower levels of the monastery, but what I saw was enough for now. It is very thrilling without doubt, but not that much suited for me, at least not yet. I will probably return there as some point though. But not for the next few months, I think. On our trip we also found a lovely book and Alantha told us it can improve one’s physical strength. Every one of us was interested but in the end Ell won it. I am sure she can put it to use though so I am not worried about it there and I don’t mind her having it. If Drachus won that book it looked very different though. Ever since he “cheated” himself to the headband that improves ones smartness he pretty much lost a lot of points of reputation if you ask me. But then I at least got a healing potion before we all departed. I also asked Alantha if she can enchant my new robe with a Shadow Shield, a very useful spell and both Amanda and Trouble told me to go for a Shadow Shield. I don’t know how the robes work, but there has to be some very strong magic going on. As far as I understood it stores a spell casted on it and the wearer can trigger the spell effect. This may be a blessing, a Stoneskin, Shadow Shield or whatever comes in handy.
I think many envy me for actually having such a robe. I think they are called Sequencer’s Robes. To my knowledge there are not many robes around and due to one can store a spell in it and use it every once a day, it is rather useful. I know G’ork has one as well, but other than that, no idea, really. Amanda, Drexia, Ell and I found it on an exploration to the Skullcrasher Cave. The cave is located in the Cloven Mountains where giants roam and caused Maran and me quite some trouble in our younger days when we were still a bit more inexperienced than we are now. The cave was full of earth genasi and more giants. Luckily Amanda knows a spell to banish them quickly. I think she said the banished them or so. Powerful magic anyway. Well, that left the rest of us to deal with the giants though which was no big threat at all, even though my anticipation was not that good back then. I evaded most of the attacks easily and leaped into the giants again and again until we defeated them all. It was a very thrilling expedition as I have never been in this cave before and it was full of giants and genasi. At the very end of the cave Amanda picked up the robes, along with some gloves. Back in Fort Miritrix Drexia got the gloves as she had a real use for them. The gloves were enhanced and very much looked like those monk gloves they use for fighting. Seeing Drexia is a monk, too, she very well deserved them and there were no objections from Amanda, Ell or me. Then we got to the robes and Amanda explained how they work. As a fighter the robe is even more interesting to me as I could store a ward on it and use it in battle, like Shadow Shield or Stoneskin, or Undeath’s Eternal Foe. As Ell passed on it and Drexia was pleased with the gloves, it was just Amanda and me. She then asked me if I was really going to make use of it and I told her she could bet on it. It would be silly not to use such a powerful armor. She then passed on it as well as her only real purpose was putting Undeath’s Eternal Foe on it and she thought I needed it more than her. How right she was and I really appreciate that she let me have the robes. A few days later Trouble casted a greater Stoneskin on it, but I somehow was not able to trigger said spell. Apparently I also need a specific spell component for some spells. Well, after Alantha stored a Shadow Shield on my robes I tried it and it works just fine. I have no idea how long the spell will last though. I will have to find it out later. I think Aerimor, Amanda and Alantha want one as well. Alantha later told me to let her know if I ever find a spare robe. She’d offer a great reward for a trade. I told her if I ever find a second one, I will let her know. Even if I had no use for mine I can’t hand it over to her as Amanda, Drexia, Ell and I agreed on that the robe is never to be sold or traded. Only the four of us were allowed to possess it. Fine with me. I have not the slightest intention to even give it away anyway. The robe is far too useful and I can make use of it. Alantha also told me not to only rely on it as it can be easily dispelled and therefore would leave me without protection.
My aunt Alantha taking care of me, it is kind of cute. Well the whole thing is rather cute. I don’t know how we got to it or who made it up, but it came out Angela is my mother and Storold my father. I think it was because someone said I bleed as much as Storold and have the skill with the blade of Angela. Well not her skill but I know how to use my blade, just like Angela. So now we make fun about Storold being my father and Angela being my mother. So Alantha asked me once we were back in Fort Gorge if I was Angela’s daughter she was related to Storold in any way and what she would be. Actually she would be my step-mother, but I think I rather call her aunt. We all know the whole thing is pretty much made up, but it is rather funny if I run to Storold and complain about something. Last time I complained about wanting to have a fine set of clothes reinforced with mithril. I did not get it though, but he told me I could buy his old cloak he does not need anymore. As far as I know it is called “Jorel’s Sheath”, but don’t ask me about who he is. I will have to do some research about this Jorel. Maybe Storold knows about him, though. However, I keep on forgetting to remind him about the cloak and therefore we actually did not settle down for a deal, yet. On the trip to the Shadow Temple Angela mentioned that it is her right to question about my new boyfriend. After all they are my “parents”, what Storold seconded. It is nice how rumors spread so I simply teased Angela about that it could be a girl as well. Not that I am into a girl but no one really knows about Caerwyn anyway, so I simply said maybe.
Not many know about Caerwyn and me and I think I only told Trouble and Ell about it, and only very few details. Caerwyn and I always respected each other and did not really care about what others are saying about someone. Well I don’t really care what rumors say about me but I know that some people don’t think highly of me. I don’t think Fehriel loves me after he was badmouthing my skill with the rapier on an expedition to the Great Rift and told me I could not harm a thing with it. Hey, no one calls my blade a knife, except Trouble and Maran. I know they just tease me with it, but Fehriel was pretty much serious about it. Then he was babbling something in elven with someone else while we were taking a breather and I asked him kindly to please talk in common as not everyone understands elven. I know I don’t understand elven. He simply barked at me to simply learn elven. How rude. Later Oma thunderclapped the group for going on in speaking elven and well, he then made the mistake to threaten Oma right next to me. No one threatens a friend of me right in front of me so I threatened him, too. Actually I was just stating that if he touches Oma, I’ll move him over to a world of pain. Oddly he left soon after that without losing any further word. After he left the group worked a lot better together and I think he now dislikes me for it. Of course we could have handled it by a duel, but I think he was afraid of being beaten down by poor innocent and fragile me. However, as I already mentioned Caerwyn and I respected each other a lot and I started to develop feeling that went past a normal friendship. At some point I met him in Vale in the Forest of Fogs as he wanted to ask me something important. It was about investigations he wanted to do about G’ork and as he knew he and I are comrades he wanted to ask for my approval first. I did not have to, yet it was cute. I mean he is free to do whatever he wants to and does not need to ask me for approval. I heard rumors about G’ork getting himself into trouble and he was searched in some parts of Dregar. Entering Lor was almost like trying to get into the city of Prantz. Anyway, before we departed again I asked him if he wanted to head to a bell together with me, which really embarrassed me. It is not like I never felt anything like that before, but after Trouble only wanted me for his fun and Snagnor betrayed me and played with the lives of our group I took some distances into relationships and thought for some time that they just use us women. Unlike with other women, like with Richelle, Tyrith and Lywn. I feel safe around them and know they would never betray me. Well after what happened in Nel and us being honored with the title of “Shields of Nel” our bond grew even stronger. Well I felt like I could trust Caerwyn and felt safe and respected around him and then I eventually asked if he liked to accompany me to a ball. He immediately asked me if I wanted to go on a date with him. Well I would not call it a date, but I guess it was more or less. He did not seem to mind going out with me.
A few weeks later we met in Port Hempstead where he asked me out to accompany him to the “Becoming the Beast” event, a ball for the wedding of Aylana and Benji. I was embarrassed he really wanted to head out there with me and soon we found ourselves making fun of possible costumes as one was supposed to show up either as an animal of the woods, or out of the myth. I did not know what costume to choose. I could have gone as a fairy, a dryad, a wolf or whatever. Honestly, I had no idea at all. A week before the ball we met in out of Prantz and decided to take a stroll in the woods. We therefore headed out to Corax Lake and then through the Forest of Fogs which was -oh wonder- filled with giants and I was not in the mood to sneak past them, even as I could easily do so, but it has been quite some time since Caerwyn and I fought back to back, trusting the other to guard ones back. We did just fine, just him and me. Once we reached Vale we washed ourselves the blood of the giants off and then continued to move deeper into the woods, the sacred wood close to Folian’s Temple which most are not aware of. It is a lovely place and peaceful. Everything seems to live in harmony. We talked a lot about what happened to us and also about our feelings and he made me blush several times. It really had been some time I enjoyed the presence of a man again. It was lovely and at some point I fell asleep and curled up under the tree at the small pond within Folian’s Wood. I think I did not sleep that good for quite some time in the open again. When I woke up Caerwyn was long gone again and being sad about his absence I left the woods again.
And just a week later the ball took place. As I was busy in Nel before I already was a little late when I left and I still had to settle for a costume! So when I finally made it over to Katherian and entered the shop, I found a note from Caerwyn, stating he picked two costumes for me already. I just had to choose one of them and pay the merchant for it. One was a dryad, the other one a cute little foxy maiden with a quiver on her back. Blond does not suit me very well so I went with foxy. The costume was lovely anyway. As fast as the costume allowed I hurried over to the wedding reception where I saw many gathered already, most of them in costumes, too. Caerwyn was unmistakably the big fox, like he said already on the note. Amanda had some butterfly wings attached, Ell had black dragon wings and I think she wore darker clothing, too. It really suits her, the darker clothing that is. Trouble said he wanted to show up as well, but I did not see him present. Maybe he had a full-body-suit as I did and therefore was not able to spot him at all. Angela and Storold were there, too. Many other people were present and I am afraid I don’t remember all of them. More important was the big fox anyway. The ceremony itself was lovely, even though Essa’s singing almost ruined the ceremony. Maybe she drank too much wine before the ceremony started. Once the ceremony was over Caerwyn and I congratulated the married couple before we left the party and headed to the Path of Elemental Balance where we had a great view down. During the ceremony we already whispered to each other and both of us blushed under our masks more than once. So while we stood there he slowly took off his mask, then mine and our lips softly touched and I melted into his arms. The warmth, the joy, the pleasure, it is indescribable. Some things just cannot be described by words and some things should never be tried to describe as it would ruin everything and the special moment. All I will say here is that it was breathtaking. It has been quite some time I kissed a man. Did I ever kiss a man? No, I don’t think so. The last one I kissed was when I was still a little brat and played a prank on someone. Well, actually I kissed Jaelle a few years back when we pulled a stunt on Maran, but then she is a woman and not a man. I am just saying as that’s the last kiss I remember. Ever since the ball we meet each other more frequently. We care for each other but it is still too early to say if this will last. But hey, I have to help him with decorating his house and there is still one room available he has no plans for just yet. For now I enjoy his warmth and his embraces and our romance. Only time will tell how this turns out. After all living with me might not be that easy. I still think I scare men away.
Not like with women like Sonya, though. I took a stroll around Dregar when I took a small rest at Corax Lake, where another woman was sitting around, probably bored as hell. Well she was quite cheery and in a good mood. I liked her from first sight, something that doesn’t happen all too often as most are just looking for others to fight and don’t even care about ones name, why one chose one weapon over the other and the whole background. As long as they fight a battle they are pleased with the world and themselves. Naturally I also don’t mind battles, but then I am not restlessly seeking battle after battle. If I fight too much and a too short period of time I become weary of it. Anyway, Sonya was looking for a comrade for a good battle, but before we started we talked about preferences in armor and weaponry. Unlike me Sonya would be a suitable student for Arngrim. Her favored weapon is a greatsword and she currently fights in a in a way too heavy half plate. I told her I could not wield either, even though I was trained with them, with emphasis on was! I did not wear heavy armors or weapons in ages and bet you I could hardly even move around with such heavy gear. I mean even light leathers decrease my nimbleness and therefore can’t dodge any incoming blows right in time. However, Sonya prefers heavy armors as well as big weapons which are absolutely her choice and no objections from my side, but naturally she started giggling about I could not harm giants with such a fragile blade as a rapier and she’d finish them off way faster. She even took a bet on it about 50 True. Needless to say I won the competition as we stormed their camp. I think the result was twenty to one or two. I am not entirely sure about it, but I pretty much won and earned her respect. It was lovely to fight along with her though as she has a lovely voice and her songs encourage me in battle. Everything went fine, but then we entered the cave close to their camp and things turned ugly. There were three giants blocking or passage further down the cave. There were two giants with axes or their fists and one archer. We held our position on a well secured spot and one of the giants spotted me, running towards us without giving commands to its fellow giants. He ran into our blades and was killed within a snatch. Knowing the archers was the bigger threat for both of us I leaped into it. Sadly the giant managed to fire two bolts at Sonya who fell within a few moments. Cursing the giants I pushed my blade into its lungs and knocked it down, focusing on the other giant who was first knocked down, then knocked out within seconds. Sadly I did not have any scrolls to help her. There were two bolts sticking out of her chest. Two bolts that should have been fired at me! I am a big girl, I can endure two bolts. Poor Sonya. I hope the next time we head out for an adventure are more pleasant for both of us. I feel somehow guilty that they focused on her and not on me.
While I am writing down my experiences in battle here right now, I should also write down about my progress with certain techniques in battle. I know Trouble always rolls his eyes when I tell him what technique I am currently trying to improve and my progress. If I did not improve my techniques and skill with the blade in the past I would be long dead already. The more I improve myself the more reliable I am in a huge battle and one should not forget that there are still the Drachs, the Dragon Stealers and the Green Dragon Cult which are all causing problems. However, the past years I focused on improving my anticipation in order to foresee their movements to dodge right under their attacks. I know I already managed the technique years ago, but there was still a lot of room for improvisations. It took me quite some time to figure it out and caused me the one or other headache, but in the end I succeeded and can dodge any incoming blows more easily. Most of it was just training though, as one has to be smart to anticipate any movements. The smarter I am, the more I benefit from this technique and their movements are easier to foresee. I know I already was able to do so years back, but I can use this technique more effectively as it is easier for me to anticipate these days. Also I focused a bit more on my attacks. I know Arngrim once told me one can use the remaining force of an attack on another opponent if you just defeated one. It takes quite some strength and coordination to perform such an attack. If I recall correctly then Arngrim called this technique Cleave. The coordination to learn this technique was rather easy. I mean I dance more or less on the battlefield, more in the air than on the ground and that already requires nimbleness and coordination as well as balance. I just had to put some more strength in the last attack when I defeat an opponent to pull the blade around and target on my next opponent. As I already say, practice is everything!
I also benefit from some new gear I got in the past few years. I got a new belt that improves my limberness even more and also grants me protection from any hold spells, like Trouble’s Stone Hold, or of those which can slow me down. Basically it does the same as the green feet spell does. Along that Maran managed to make me a ring which also enhances my grace, as well as something that helps me to resist acid. And everything out of my emeralds I gave him earlier to make those things for me. He did a lovely job and I hugged him for doing so. It is still nice to see how he flushes if I invade his personal space. But more important: I finally possess fine clothes reinforced with mithril! Tegan did a lovely job on it. I already gave her the mithril and right now I am collecting some silk for her. I have to pay it off after all and I really owe her. My new equipment works lovely, and I cannot wait to finally settle for a trade with my father to get a hold of his old cloak, too. The new equipment already helped me in the battles I fought so far, like down in the Shadow Temple or in the Forest of Fogs.
Unfortunately I did not have my new armor when Trouble, Ell and I ventured down in the one cave on Tilmar where the Al’Noth is crazy. The cave is filled with giants and normally that would not be such a problem, but it is hard to fight off like six fighters of them who all block the bridge and therefore also the way to their twenty archers, no kidding! Been there, seen that, had arrows everywhere, like every one of us three! Bet you, it was no fun at all. As our wards were gone, Trouble and Ell tried to cast spells so we had at least the most basic protections on us, like Bark- and Stoneskin. Thinking about it now it was very hilarious. Ell fireballed Trouble like twice or thrice, he turned himself to a penguin and a chicken and I was turned twice into a chicken and once into a penguin. If the giants spotted us in our attempt to renew our protections they’d have died laughing. As I already said, it was quite hilarious and in the end we eventually managed to be warded by the most basic spells. We stormed the bridge and defeated them in a long and painful fight, but in the process they blinded me and I had to rely on my other senses in battle which is easy for me as I used to fight blindfolded to sharpen my other senses in case I am not able to see an opponent, may it be because I am blinded or them invisible. Once out of the cave we found ourselves in the forest again and soon we had some company in form of some pit dwellers. I did not really see them as I was still blinded as I had to fight them, but after we defeated them we settled for a breather and Ell took take of my temporary blindness. After the rest we prepared for the way ahead of us and marched on. The spiders were no threat at all, but then we faced more pit dwellers. The first few were easily defeated, but then a larger one showed up. I ran towards it, my grip tight on the hilt of my blade. Just in the moment as I wanted to leap into it, I eyed it and all of a sudden I panicked and ran away. I cannot help it but such things and undead still give me the creeps! I really wanted to help Trouble and Ell with the fiend, but I was too scared to even move one step towards it, so I had to watch the dweller giving Trouble and Ell a hard time. It was my battle! I am the one who has to stand the ground and not run away hiding because I am scared of something. I hate it. I abandon those I want to help just because I am scared. Sometimes I am stronger, but those creepy things scare me far too often, really. Being easily scared also caused us to retreat out of the cave once we were in. It was full of skeletons and well, I am not all too keen on them and naturally you saw me running around screaming more frequently than facing them. Seeing I was needed on the front and not in the back hiding we decided it was better to just leave it be for now and return to this weird place another time, and hopefully better prepared. Well with my whole new equipment it should be easier to defeat at least all those giants. I just need to find a way not to be scared so easily.
Talking about being scared. I also had a rather strange encounter a few months ago. I was in Hlint with some other adventurers and someone was looking for some help. Well as I was around town I volunteered. Apparently a caravan found a naked old man out of town and brought them over to Ilsare’s Temple in Hlint where he was drooling at the fountain which seemed to be the only thing to calm him down. Also he was ill, but the priests at the temple had no idea what it was, even as they checked him all over several times. Nothing was known about the man, either. He just sat drooling in front of the fountain. So now our task was to move him over to the Aeridinite hospital in Krandor. One would think this as easy, but it was in no way. Once there was no water around him he kicked around himself and whatever. Jennara managed to muster a cart which the present dwarves filled with water. One druid changed into a water elemental and got his attention and the druid succeeded in getting the man in the water-filled cart where he toyed a little around in the water, apparently all pleased with himself and the world. But then we screwed up when the druid left the cart and changed back to a dwarf. Now it was time for the man to freak out and punched holes in the cart with his bare fists. Jennara tried to stop him and was thrown away quite some distance. The punch that hit her must have hurt a lot, even to Jennara. Amanda and Storold finally managed to calm him with an illusion of a waterfall or the fountain back at the temple. With some other hold-ups we eventually managed to reach the hospital where the healer was going to run some tests on him. According to Jennara and some others it could be possible that the man was walking the Path of the Claw. Well, he was. But before we got to know about it we had to find some ingredients for Argile the Aeridinite who took care about the feverish man. At some point he woke up and told us some story I already forgot about again. If you ask me it did not make any sense and therefore I forgot. Anyway, He mentioned the name “Cyn Chen” before the once feverish man casted a spell, ran out, changed into a snake and vanished into the seas. Who exactly this Cyn Chen is, we did not know. It just seems that the man apparently is a cultist and now succeeded the Path of the Claw, oh joy.
Well, months later I heard about rumors about Phal on Belinara. Apparently they pretty much closed the city and no one is allowed to enter or to leave town. There is an exception for merchants though, but apparently the guards control ever single merchant wanting to enter town. So in order to find out what was going on in town we somehow had to infiltrate it and you bet, everyone had a better idea than the other so we ended up discussing for ages, no kidding! In the end we settled for the plan we came up with in the first hour of our meeting. In the end we decided that only a few of us should try to make our way into Phal. There were two teams. The first wanted to infiltrate Phal through the gate, the other group wanted to take a ship and sail to Phal. Jaelle, Trouble, Caerwyn and Ell went into town by feet, while Argali, Fenrir and I took one of the Raven’s ships, some wares and entered the port of Phal. It was important to find the one or other good and reliable source of information without causing attention of the guards and there were many guards around. Even before we entered the docks we were controlled by some Drachs. Everything with our wares and ship was fine so we were allowed to enter port. Well, once the mooring took place Argali and I found a dock worker which we offered work as we had to move some wares so Fenrir, our Master Dwarf and merchant could sell his various goods. The worker was kind enough to show us around town. While Argali was getting information of him I headed over to the merchants who appraised their goods. While I was searching for nothing particular I heard several interesting things from the citizens and merchants. Ever since the lockdown the dragon Bastion has been missing and never been seen around anymore. The citizens are afraid something happened to him. The lookdown lasted for two weeks but even after the gates were opened again Bastion was not seen around just yet. Also I gathered that the Lord Nevsonger, who also was responsible for the military lockdown of Phal got visit by a woman recently. I did not find out anything specific about the lady, though. Later in the best inn in Phal I spotted some familiar faces, even though some of them wore a nice disguise. From what I heard Trouble and Ell were some farmers, trying to sell their potatoes. Trouble wore a pretty nice apron, too. Jaelle was a pregnant woman and Caerwyn probably the father. While Argali and I tasted the splendid ale in the tavern we also found out that the lady who visited Lord Nevsonger was said Cyn Chen. She is apparently the mistress of Tesak, also being called the “Dragon’s Fang”. Well what to make out of it, I don’t know. I only know that there are some things going on in Phal or in Khul in general that might not be all too pleasant for us at all. But well, we should meet again to discuss things. Maybe someone did some more research and found out more about the “Dragon’s Fang” Cyn Chen.
But well, the whole Path of the Claw and infiltration of Phal happened before Caerwyn and I kissed each other at the Path of Elemental Balance and I really prefer kissing Caerwyn over worrying about what is going on in Phal, yet I have to keep my eyes and ears open for any information regarding the situation. And there are also other things to do, like rescuing a little girl who was kidnapped on a story telling night.
I knew I saw some odd things already, but the kidnapping of the little girl tops at least two thirds of the odd stories and adventures I came across already. There were some carers together with like twenty children and their little camp had a horror theme and one of the carers told them a horror story about a cursed woman from the day she was born, an aberration. She was kind of bloodthirsty and also bit her father. He then found a way to ban her away or whatever. I was busy looking shyly over to Caerwyn from time to time and did not really pay attention to the whole story. I know it had something to do with his blood and apples. And then one of the girls, her name was Rosie, was missing and we offered our help. We soon found a hole in the ground and descended. Once we were able to see again we found ourselves in an odd place. It was like in a bad dream, just this one was real, at least it felt that way and the girl was really missing. On our way to rescue the child we had to fight some odd creatures which seemed to be made out of rye. At some point we found ourselves in a cave where we had to defeat a spider so a little girl could tell us where to find the girl, or the witch for that matter. Then we passed a house with a girl dressed all in red in front. She wanted us to kill her grandmother, but then she attacked us and we were forced to kill her and her wolves. Her grandmother was released to be rid of her granddaughter and showed us the entrance to a cave under water where the witch roams. After some time we found the girl and a little later a huge mirror. And then of course the witch showed up. Needless to say I was scared by her and I was mad at Jaelle. She simply casted a Thunderclap into the ongoing battle and stunned me and some others as well. If we were protected properly it did not really matter but someone forgot to cast twirly so once I was back focusing on the witch I was running away from her again, all afraid of something I cannot even recall anymore. But well, in the end everything went fine and we brought Rosie back to the camp. One of the weirdest expeditions ever!
But well, I still live and keep on living. Let’s see what happens next. Maybe I should start thinking about another Night of Duels? After all the first time was fun, even though making up the rules gave me the one or other headache. But then I want to see how I fare in duels with my new equipment now and I hope I do better against G’ork this time. I will probably dodge more of his attacks now, but I fear he will cut right through my armor and I won’t really get through his. But well, we’ll see.
*Phyress closes her journal, stuffs everything away and readies herself to leave Fort Gorge for now. For now Phyress travels back to Nel to arrange some things that are still left undone and really require her attention.*